TW201006895A - Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter - Google Patents
Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TW201006895A TW201006895A TW98118650A TW98118650A TW201006895A TW 201006895 A TW201006895 A TW 201006895A TW 98118650 A TW98118650 A TW 98118650A TW 98118650 A TW98118650 A TW 98118650A TW 201006895 A TW201006895 A TW 201006895A
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- group
- ink
- atom
- formula
- inkjet
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B23/00—Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
- C09B23/02—Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups
- C09B23/04—Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups one >CH- group, e.g. cyanines, isocyanines, pseudocyanines
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B47/00—Porphines; Azaporphines
- C09B47/04—Phthalocyanines abbreviation: Pc
- C09B47/06—Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide
- C09B47/065—Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide having -COOH or -SO3H radicals or derivatives thereof, directly linked to the skeleton
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B47/00—Porphines; Azaporphines
- C09B47/04—Phthalocyanines abbreviation: Pc
- C09B47/06—Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide
- C09B47/067—Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide from phthalodinitriles naphthalenedinitriles, aromatic dinitriles prepared in situ, hydrogenated phthalodinitrile
- C09B47/0678—Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide from phthalodinitriles naphthalenedinitriles, aromatic dinitriles prepared in situ, hydrogenated phthalodinitrile having-COOH or -SO3H radicals or derivatives thereof directly linked to the skeleton
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
- C09D11/00—Inks
- C09D11/30—Inkjet printing inks
- C09D11/32—Inkjet printing inks characterised by colouring agents
- C09D11/322—Pigment inks
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
- C09D11/00—Inks
- C09D11/30—Inkjet printing inks
- C09D11/32—Inkjet printing inks characterised by colouring agents
- C09D11/328—Inkjet printing inks characterised by colouring agents characterised by dyes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/0005—Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
- G03F7/0007—Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Materials Engineering (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optical Filters (AREA)
- Inks, Pencil-Leads, Or Crayons (AREA)
- Ink Jet Recording Methods And Recording Media Thereof (AREA)
Abstract
Description
201006895 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 ' 本發明係關於噴墨用印墨、彩色濾光片及其製法、與 - 使用它之液晶顯示器及影像顯示裝置。 【先前技術】 近年來,伴隨著個人電腦、特別是大畫面液晶電視的 發達’液晶顯示器(LCD)、尤其是彩色液晶顯示器的需要係 有增加的傾向。然而,由於彩色液晶顯示器價錢昂貴,所 以降低成本的要求係爲提高。特別是提高了對於成本上比 _ 重高之彩色濾光片的降低成本的要求。這樣的彩色濾光片 係通常具備了紅(R)、綠(G)、及藍(B)3原色的著色圖案。 在具備該彩色濾光片之液晶顯示器中,藉由ON、OFF(開、 關)對應於R、G、及B各畫素之電極,液晶係當作快門 (shutter)來動作,使光通過R、G、及3的各畫素以進行 彩色顯示。 以往的彩色濾光片之製法係可,舉例如染色法。該染色 法係首先在玻璃基板上形成染色,邊的饵、料、即水溶性的高 ❹ 分子材料,且根據微影法製程將其化成所希望的形狀 之後’把所得到的圖案浸漬於染色浴中以得到著色之圖 案。藉由重複3次上述,以形成R、G、及B的彩色濾光片 層。 又,其他的方法係有顔料分散法。該方法係首先形成 顏料分散於基板上之感光性樹脂層,並藉由圖案化以得到 單色的圖案。再者,藉由重複3次該製程,以形成r、G、 -4 - .201006895 及B的彩色濾光片層。201006895 VI. Description of the Invention: [Technical Field of the Invention] The present invention relates to an inkjet inkjet, a color filter, a method of manufacturing the same, and a liquid crystal display and an image display apparatus using the same. [Prior Art] In recent years, the demand for a developed liquid crystal display (LCD), particularly a color liquid crystal display, with personal computers, particularly large-screen liquid crystal televisions, has been increasing. However, since color liquid crystal displays are expensive, the cost reduction requirement is increased. In particular, the cost reduction requirement for a color filter having a higher cost than the weight is increased. Such a color filter usually has a color pattern of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) 3 primary colors. In a liquid crystal display including the color filter, the liquid crystal is operated as a shutter by ON, OFF (on, off) electrodes corresponding to the respective pixels of R, G, and B, and the light is passed. The pixels of R, G, and 3 are displayed in color. Conventional color filter production methods are, for example, dyeing methods. The dyeing method firstly forms a dyed, bait-based material, that is, a water-soluble sorghum molecular material on a glass substrate, and after immersing it into a desired shape according to a lithography process, immersing the obtained pattern in dyeing. In the bath to get a colored pattern. The color filter layers of R, G, and B were formed by repeating the above three times. Further, other methods are pigment dispersion methods. This method first forms a photosensitive resin layer in which a pigment is dispersed on a substrate, and is patterned to obtain a monochromatic pattern. Furthermore, the process is repeated three times to form color filter layers of r, G, -4 - .201006895 and B.
• 然而,無論是在哪一個方法中,爲了著色R、G、及B 之3色,都有相同製程必須重複3次的必要,而會有成本 變高的問題、或爲了重複同様的製程而使得產率降低的問 題。做爲解決此等問題的彩色濾光片之製法,已提案有以 噴墨法噴塗著色印墨以形成著色層(色畫素)之方法(專利文 獻 1、2}。 噴墨法係有從非常微細的噴嘴將印墨液滴直接吐出至 φ記錄構件上後使其附著,以得到文字或影像之記錄方式。 噴墨法係藉由依序移動噴墨頭,而可以高生產性製造大面 積的彩色瀘光片,具有低噪音且操作性更佳的優點。 依照這樣的噴墨法以製造彩色濾光片中,係利用使用 顔料之噴墨用印墨。使用這樣的顔料之噴墨用印墨係已提 案有例如含有黏結劑成分、顔料、及沸點爲180°C~260°C 且在常溫的蒸氣壓爲〇.5mmHg以下的溶劑之彩色濾光片 用噴墨印墨(專利文獻3}。 Φ 利用使用這樣的顔料之噴墨用印墨以製造彩色濾光片 之情形中,所製造的彩色濾光片係耐光性、耐熱性優異, 惟另一方面,會有由於顔料粒子所引起的散射使得對比降 低、或產生霧度增加的問題。又,由於因印墨的顔料凝集 所引起的噴嘴堵塞現象係頻繁地發生,從所謂的吐出安定 性之點而言係爲不佳。再者,由於凝集的顔料,藉由所謂 擦拭或沖洗的吐出回復動作而回復印墨吐出狀態之回復機 能亦爲惡化。此外,於擦拭時由於凝集的顔料摩擦噴嘴面, 201006895 而亦會引起印墨的吐出方向的彎曲。 另一方面,在使用染料的印墨之情形中,彩色濾光片 ' 的對比或霧度等光學特性的提昇係爲期待的。又,一般來 . 說即使吐出安定性提高了,伴隨著印墨黏度的增加等亦會 有噴嘴目堵塞之情形,藉由擦拭或沖洗而能輕易地回復印 墨吐出狀態係爲期待的。然而,關於色畫素之耐光性或耐 熱性所謂的堅牢性方面係還不夠充分,實用上未必能満足。 爲此,近年係有難以對應高亮度背光等的問題。 又,由於做爲用於液晶顯示器(LCD)等的FPD(平面顯 g 示器)之電極所大多使用的ITO(氧化銦錫)在成膜時的高 溫,而會有上述光學特性等的特性係爲變化的問題。 例如,在藍色的印墨中雖然已知有使用紫色系的染料 之印墨,但如上述般的色畫素之耐光性與耐熱性等的水平 不爲充分,而期待進一步的改良。 【專利文獻1】特開昭59-75205號公報 【專利文獻2】特開2004-339332號公報 【專利文獻3】特開2002-201387號公報 ❿ 【發明內容】 發明所欲解決之課題 本發明係有鑑於上述事情者,其目的爲提供可製造呈 現良好的色相,可形成耐光性、耐熱性優異之色畫素,特 別是對比或霧度等的光學特性優異,且耐光性或耐熱性優 異的彩色濾光片,顯示優良的吐出安定性之噴墨用印墨; 藉由這樣的噴墨用印墨所得之上述光學特性、耐光性或耐 201006895 熱性等的特性優異之彩色濾光片;及可製造具有這樣的特 * 性安定彩色濾光片、且不會招致提高成本的彩色濾光片之 - 製法;以及能對應於高亮度背光之高對比、高彩度的液晶 顯示器與影像顯示裝置。 解決課題之手段 本發明人等進行專心一意檢討之結果,發現上述課題 係能藉由下述的<1>~<28>的構成而可解決。 <1> —種噴墨用印墨,其特徵係含有通式(I)所表示之亞 φ甲基二吡咯系化合物、與由金屬原子或金屬化合物所得之 亞甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物, 通式⑴• However, no matter which method is used, in order to color the three colors of R, G, and B, it is necessary to repeat the same process three times, and there is a problem that the cost becomes high, or in order to repeat the same process. The problem of lowering the yield. As a method of producing a color filter for solving such problems, a method of spraying a colored ink by an inkjet method to form a colored layer (color tex) has been proposed (Patent Documents 1 and 2). The very fine nozzle directly ejects ink droplets onto the φ recording member and attaches them to obtain a recording method of characters or images. The inkjet method can produce a large area with high productivity by sequentially moving the inkjet head. The color light-receiving sheet has the advantage of low noise and better operability. In the ink jet method to produce a color filter, an inkjet ink using a pigment is used. Inkjet ink using such a pigment Inkjet inks for color filters containing a binder component, a pigment, and a solvent having a boiling point of 180 ° C to 260 ° C and a vapor pressure of 〇.5 mmHg or less at normal temperature have been proposed (Patent Document 3) Φ In the case of producing a color filter using an inkjet ink using such a pigment, the color filter produced is excellent in light resistance and heat resistance, but on the other hand, it may be caused by pigment particles. Scattering The problem is that the ratio is lowered or the haze is increased. Further, since the nozzle clogging phenomenon caused by the agglomeration of the ink of the ink is frequently generated, it is not preferable from the point of so-called discharge stability. The agglomerated pigment is also deteriorated by the so-called wiping or rinsing discharge recovery operation, and the recovery function of the copying ink discharge state is also deteriorated. Further, since the agglomerated pigment rubs against the nozzle surface during wiping, 201006895 also causes the ink discharge direction. On the other hand, in the case of an ink using a dye, an improvement in optical characteristics such as contrast or haze of the color filter is expected. Further, generally speaking, even if the discharge stability is improved, The nozzle may be clogged with an increase in the viscosity of the ink, etc. It is desirable to be able to easily return the ink discharge state by wiping or rinsing. However, the light resistance or heat resistance of the color pixel is so-called In terms of fastness, it is not enough, and it may not be able to meet the needs in practice. In recent years, it has been difficult to cope with problems such as high-brightness backlights. In the case of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) which is used for an electrode of an FPD (flat display) such as a display (LCD), the high temperature at the time of film formation causes a problem that the characteristics such as the above optical characteristics are changed. In the blue ink, although an ink using a purple dye is known, the level of light resistance and heat resistance of the color chromin is not sufficient, and further improvement is expected. [Patent Document 3] JP-A-2002-201387 [Patent Document 3] JP-A-2002-201387 A SUMMARY OF INVENTION Technical Problem The present invention has been made in view of the above. In view of the above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a color filter which is excellent in light resistance and heat resistance, and which is excellent in optical properties such as contrast or haze, and which is excellent in light resistance or heat resistance. a light sheet, an ink jet ink which exhibits excellent discharge stability; a color filter excellent in optical characteristics, light resistance, or heat resistance such as 201006895 obtained by such ink jet ink; and * Laid made having such color filter of stability, without incurring increase in cost of a color filter - Method; energy corresponds to high contrast and high brightness of the backlight, and a liquid crystal display device a display image of high saturation. Means for Solving the Problem As a result of intensive review, the inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by the following configurations of <1>~<28>. <1> - Inkjet inkjet ink, characterized by comprising a sub-φ methyldipyrrole compound represented by the formula (I), which is mismatched with a methylene dipyrrole metal obtained from a metal atom or a metal compound Compound, general formula (1)
R6R6
R R (通式(I)中’ R「R6係各自獨立表示氫原子、或取代基, R7係表示氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基卜 <2>如<1>中記載的噴墨用印墨,其中前述亞甲基二吡 略系金屬錯合物化合物爲通式(11_ i)所表示之化合物, 通式(I I - 1)RR (in the general formula (I), R and R6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R7 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. <2> The inkjet ink according to the above aspect, wherein the methylene dipyridyl metal complex compound is a compound represented by the formula (11-i), and the formula (II-1)
-7 - 201006895 (通式(π-υ中,Rl~Re係各自獨立表示氫原子、或取代 基,R7表示氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基, Ma表示金屬原子或金屬化合物,Xa係表示爲了中和]^&電 荷的必要之基’Xi係表示可與Ma鍵結之基,χι與X2係可 互相鍵結以形成5員、6員、或7員的環》。 <3>如<1>中記載的噴墨用印墨,其中前述亞甲基二吡 咯系金屬錯合物化合物爲通式(Π-2)所表示之化合物, 通式(I I - 2)-7 - 201006895 (In the formula (π-υ, Rl~Re each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R7 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and Ma represents a metal atom) Or a metal compound, Xa represents a necessary base for neutralizing the charge of '^& 'Xi means a bond which can be bonded to Ma, and χι and X2 can be bonded to each other to form a 5-, 6-, or 7-member. The inkjet ink according to the <1>, wherein the methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound is a compound represented by the formula (Π-2), and the formula ( II - 2)
(通式(II-2)中,Ri~R6、及R8~Ri3係各自獨立表示氫 原子、或取代基,R7及Ri4係各自獨立表示氫原子、鹵素 原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基’ Ma表示金屬原子或金屬化 合物)。 <4>如<1>中記載的噴墨用印墨,其中前述亞甲基二吡 咯系金屬錯合物化合物爲通式(III)所表示之化合物、或該化 201006895 通式(I I I)(In the formula (II-2), Ri to R6 and R8 to Ri3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R7 and Ri4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a hetero group. The ring group 'Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound). The inkjet ink according to the <1>, wherein the methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound is a compound represented by the formula (III) or the compound of the formula (I I I)
(通式(III)中’ R2~RS係各自獨立表示氫原子、或取代 基,R7表示氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基, ® Ma表示金屬原子或金屬化合物。X3係表示nr(R表示氫原 子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、醯基、烷基磺醯基、或 方基磺醯基)、氮原子、氧原子、或硫原子,X4係表示NRa(Ra 表示氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、醯基、烷基磺 醯基、或方基擴酿基)、氧原子、或硫原子,Υι係表示Nrc(rc 表示氫原子、烷基 '烯基、芳基'雜環基、醯基、烷基擴 醯基、或方基擴醯基)、氮原子、或碳原子,Y2表示氮原子、 參或碳原子,R8及R9係各自獨立表示烷基、烯基、芳基、雜 環基、烷氧基、芳氧基、烷基胺基、芳基胺基、或雜環胺 基。R8與Υι係表示可互相鍵結以形成5員、6員、或7員 的環,R9與Y2係可互相鍵結以形成5員、6員、或7員的 環。X5表示可與Ma鍵結之基,a表示〇、i、或 <5>如<1>中記載的噴墨用印墨,其中前述通式⑴所表 示之亞甲基二吡咯系化合物爲通式(IV)所表示之化合物, 201006895 通式(IV)(In the formula (III), 'R2 to RS each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R7 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and ® Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound. X3 represents nr (R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a fluorenyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or a sulfonyl group), a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom, X4 represents NRa (Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a fluorenyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or a aryl group), an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom, and is represented by Υι Nrc (rc represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl 'alkenyl group, an aryl 'heterocyclic group, a fluorenyl group, an alkyl group, or a aryl group), a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom, and Y2 represents a nitrogen atom, a ginseng Or a carbon atom, R8 and R9 each independently represent an alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylamino, arylamine or heterocyclic amine group. Υι means that they can be bonded to each other to form a ring of 5 members, 6 members, or 7 members, and R9 and Y2 systems can be bonded to each other to form a ring of 5 members, 6 members, or 7 members. X5 indicates that it can be bonded to Ma. In the inkjet ink according to the above formula (1), the methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the above formula (1) is represented by the formula (IV). Compound, 201006895 Formula (IV)
(通式(IV)中,Ri~R4、及R6係各自獨 或取代基,R7係表示氫原子、鹵素原子、 雜環基)。 <6>如<1>~<5>項中任一項之噴墨用Εί 屬原子或金屬化合物爲Fe、Zn、Co、V =( <7>如<1>~<6>項中任一項之噴墨用曰 屬原子或金屬化合物爲Zn。 <8>如<1>~<7>項中任一項之噴墨用曰 通式(A)所表示之四氮卟吩系色素, 立表示氫原子、 烷基、芳基、或 墨,其中前述金 >、或 Cu。 墨,其中前述金 |墨,其中更含有(In the formula (IV), Ri to R4 and R6 each independently or a substituent, and R7 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a heterocyclic group). <6> The ink atom or metal compound for inkjet according to any one of <1> to <5> is Fe, Zn, Co, V = (<7> as <1>~< The ruthenium atom or the metal compound for inkjet according to any one of the items of the item [6] is Zn. The inkjet enthalpy of the inkjet according to any one of <1> to <7> The tetrazole-based dye represented by the formula, wherein R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an ink, wherein the above gold > or Cu. Ink, wherein the aforementioned gold|ink, which further contains
(通式(A)中,Mi表示金屬原子或金屬j Z3、及Z4係各自獨立表示形成由碳原子、 子所選出的原子所構成之6員環的原子群: <9>如<8>中記載的噴墨用印墨,其中 色素爲通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素, ::合物,Z1、Z2、 氮原子、及氫原 〇 前述四氮卟吩系 .201006895(In the general formula (A), Mi represents a metal atom or a metal j Z3 and a Z4 system each independently represents an atomic group of a 6-membered ring formed by an atom selected by a carbon atom: < <9> (8) The inkjet ink according to the above-mentioned item, wherein the dye is a phthalocyanine dye represented by the formula (B), a complex, a Z1, a Z2, a nitrogen atom, and a hydrogen atom, the aforementioned tetrazolium. 201006895
(通式(B)中,Ri〇i~Ri“係各自獨立表示氫原子或取代 基,M2表示金屬原子或金屬化合物) < 10>如< 1>~<9>項中任一項之噴墨用印墨,其中更含 有聚合性單體。 <11>如<1〇>中記載的噴墨用印墨,其中前述聚合性單 體的聚合性基係由環氧基、丙烯醯氧基及甲基丙烯醯氧$ 所構成群組中所選出之任一者。 <12>如<1>~<11>項中任一項之噴墨用印墨,其中更含 有黏結劑樹脂。 <13>如<1>~<12>項中任一項之噴墨用印墨,其中更含 有界面活性劑。 <14>如<1>~<13>項中任一項之噴墨用印墨,其中在吐 出時的黏度爲2~30mPa«s。 <15>如<1>~<14>項中任一項之噴墨用印墨,其中在 25°C的表面張力爲20~40mN/m。 < 16>—種彩色濾光片之製法,其係具有:利用噴墨法 將如<1>~<15>項中任一項之噴墨用印墨的液滴,供給至藉 由形成於基板上之隔壁所區隔劃分的凹部內,以形成彩色 -1 1 - 201006895 濾光片之色畫素的畫素形成製程。 <17>如<16>項之彩色濾光片之製法,其中前述畫素形 — 成製程係具有依照前述噴墨法使前述印墨做成液滴供給至 - 前述凹部之描繪製程、與使供給至前述凹部之前述印墨硬 化以形成前述色畫素之硬化製程。 <18>如<17>項之彩色濾光片之製法,其中前述硬化製 程係具備在去除前述印墨中所含有之溶劑成爲印墨殘餘部 分之後,對前述印墨殘餘部分照射活性能量線之照射製程 及/或加熱前述印墨殘餘部分之加熱製程,且依照前述照射 ® 製程及/或前述加熱製程聚合前述印墨殘餘部分以形成前 述色畫素。 <19>如<17>或<18>項之彩色濾光片之製法,其中前述 描繪製程係將前述噴墨用印墨的液滴從噴墨頭的吐出噴嘴 吐出並供給至前述基板的前述凹部內者, 其係更具有在前述描繪製程之前,檢査前述噴墨頭之 吐出噴嘴的吐出狀態之檢査製程,與 前述吐出狀態的檢査結果在指定規定範圍外的情形 Θ 下’於前述噴墨頭之描繪領域外,就相當於前述指定規定 範圍外之吐出噴嘴實施印墨吐出動作之前處理製程, 在該前處理製程之後,回到前述檢査製程再次檢查前 述吐出狀態,且在前述指定規定範圍内之情形下,依照前 述描繪製程開始前述色畫素的描繪。 <20>如<17>或<18>項之彩色濾光片之製法,其中前述 描繪製程係將前述噴墨用印墨的液滴從噴墨頭的吐出噴嘴 1 .201006895 吐出並供給至前述基板的前述凹部內者, 其係更具有在前述描繪製程之前,檢査前述噴 吐出噴嘴的吐出狀態之檢査製程,與 根據在前述檢査製程的檢査,於前述噴墨頭有 噴嘴之情形下,對於含有複數個吐出噴嘴之中的前 出噴嘴之前述噴墨頭的一部分或者全部,實施藉由 壓而使前述吐出噴嘴的印墨沖洗動作、吸引來自前 噴嘴之印墨的印墨吸引動作、擦拭前述噴墨頭之噴 ®擦拭動作之中的一部份或者全部之前處理製程, 在該前處理製程之後,回到前述檢査製程再次 述吐出狀態,且在前述指定規定範圍内之情形下, 述描繪製程開始前述色畫素的描繪。 <21>如<19>或<20>項之彩色濾光片之製法,其 有: 回收前述前處理製程中由前述印墨吐出動作所 印墨、由前述印墨沖洗所沖洗之印墨及由前述印墨 ©吸引之印墨的回收製程, 保管所回收之回收印墨的保管製程, 評價包含所保管之回收印墨濃度之印墨特性的 程; 根據所評價之回收印墨的評價結果,將前述回 再調液以做爲形成前述色畫素之前述噴墨用印墨的 製程。 <22>如<16>~<21>項中任一項之彩色濾光片之 墨頭之 不吐出 述不吐 噴頭加 述吐出 嘴面的 檢査前 依照前 中更含 吐出之 吸引所 評價製 收印墨 再調液 製法, 201006895 其中更具有: 預先將高濃度印墨保存放置在高濃度印墨保存儲槽、 · 將稀釋用印墨保存放置在稀釋用印墨保存儲槽的第1保存 · 製程; 由前述高濃度印墨保存儲槽供給前述高濃度印墨、由 前述稀釋用印墨保存儲槽供給前述稀釋用印墨的供給製 程; . 調液所供給之前述高濃度印墨與所供給之前述稀釋用 印墨,並生成做爲用以形成前述色畫素的前述噴墨用印墨 @ 之調液印墨的調液製程; 將做爲前述噴墨用印墨所調液之前述調液印墨保存於 調液印墨保存儲槽的第2保存製程, 前述描繪製程中,保存於前述調液印墨保存儲槽之前 述調液印墨係供給做爲前述噴墨用印墨。 <23>如<16>~<22>項中任一項之彩色濾光片之製法, 其中前述稀釋用印墨爲前述溶媒。 <24>—種彩色濾光片,其係依照<16>~<23>項中任一 ❹ 項之彩色濾光片之製法而製造的。 <25>—種彩色濾光片,其係使用<1>~<15>項中任一項 之噴墨用印墨,利用噴墨法而製造的。 <26>—種彩色濾光片,其係具備使用<1>~<15>項中任 一項之噴墨用印墨所形成之色畫素。 <27> —種液晶顯示器,其係具備<24>~<26>項中任— 項之彩色濾光片。 -14- 201006895 <28>—種影像顯示裝置,其係具備<24>~<26>項中任 '—項之彩色濾光片。 ' 發明之效果 根據本發明,能夠提供可製造呈現良好的色相,可形 成耐光性、耐熱性優異之色畫素,特別是對比或霧度等的 光學特性優異,且耐光性或耐熱性優異的彩色濾光片,顯 示優良的吐出安定性之噴墨用印墨:藉由這樣的噴墨用印 墨所得之上述光學特性、耐光性或耐熱性等的特性優異之 ©彩色濾光片;及可製造具有這樣的特性安定彩色濾光片、 且不會招致提高成本的彩色濾光片之製法;以及能對應於 高亮度背光之高對比、高彩度的液晶顯示器與影像顯示裝 置。 【實施方式】 實施發明之最佳形態 以下,就關於本發明的噴墨用印墨、使用該噴墨印墨 之彩色濾光片及其製法、以及使用它之液晶顯示器與影像 ®顯示裝置來詳細說明。 <噴墨用印墨及其製法> 首先,詳細說明本發明的噴墨用印墨、其構成成分及 其製法。 本發明的噴墨用印墨係含有通式(I)所表示之亞甲基二 啦咯系化合物、與由金屬或金屬化合物所得到之亞甲基二 啦咯系金屬繪合物化合物。 <通式(I)及通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯系化合物> 201006895 以下’就通式⑴及通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯系化 合物的各基加以說明。 通式⑴(In the formula (B), Ri〇i~Ri "each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and M2 represents a metal atom or a metal compound" <10> as in any of <1>~<9> The inkjet ink according to the above-mentioned inkjet ink according to <1>, wherein the polymerizable group of the polymerizable monomer is an epoxy group. Any one selected from the group consisting of a propylene oxy group and a methacryl oxime. <12> The ink for inkjet according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein The inkjet ink according to any one of <1> to <12>, further comprising a surfactant. <14> <1>~<13> The ink for inkjet according to any one of the items, wherein the viscosity at the time of discharge is 2 to 30 mPa «s. <15> The ink for inkjet according to any one of <1> to <14>, The surface tension at 25 ° C is 20 to 40 mN / m. <16> - A method for producing a color filter, which has the following items: <1>~<15> a droplet of ink for inkjet And supplied to the concave portion divided by the partition walls formed on the substrate to form a pixel forming process of the color pixels of the color-1 1 - 201006895 filter. <17> as in <16> The method of manufacturing a color filter, wherein the pixel forming process has a drawing process for supplying the ink onto the concave portion in accordance with the inkjet method, and the ink is supplied to the concave portion The method of producing a color filter according to the item <17>, wherein the hardening process is provided with removing a solvent contained in the ink to become a residual portion of the ink. Thereafter, irradiating the residual portion of the ink with an irradiation process of the active energy ray and/or heating the remaining portion of the ink, and polymerizing the ink residue according to the aforementioned illuminating process and/or the aforementioned heating process to form the aforementioned color The method of producing a color filter according to the item <17> or <18>, wherein the drawing process is to eject the droplet of the inkjet ink from the discharge nozzle of the inkjet head Further, the inside of the concave portion of the substrate is supplied, and the inspection process for inspecting the discharge state of the discharge nozzle of the ink jet head before the drawing process is performed, and the inspection result of the discharge state is outside the specified predetermined range. Further, in the field of drawing of the ink jet head, the discharge nozzle corresponding to the predetermined range is subjected to a process before the ink discharge operation, and after the pretreatment process, the process returns to the inspection process to check the discharge state again. In the case where the predetermined range is specified, the drawing of the aforementioned color pixels is started in accordance with the aforementioned drawing process. <20> The method of producing a color filter according to the <17> or <18>, wherein the drawing process discharges and supplies the droplet of the inkjet ink from the discharge nozzle 1 .201006895 of the inkjet head Further, in the recessed portion of the substrate, the inspection process for inspecting the discharge state of the ejection nozzle before the drawing process is performed, and in the case where the inkjet head has a nozzle according to the inspection in the inspection process In some or all of the ink jet heads including the front discharge nozzles among the plurality of discharge nozzles, the ink rinsing operation of the discharge nozzle by the pressing and the ink suction operation of sucking the ink from the front nozzle are performed. And wiping a part or all of the pre-treatment process of the inkjet head of the inkjet head, after the pre-treatment process, returning to the inspection process to re-express the discharge state, and within the specified range The depiction process begins the depiction of the aforementioned color pixels. <21> The method of producing a color filter according to the item <19> or <20>, wherein: recovering ink printed by the ink discharge operation in the pre-treatment process, and being washed by the ink wash a process for recovering ink from ink and ink collected by the ink, and storing a process for collecting ink recovered by the storage, and evaluating a process of ink characteristics including the concentration of the recovered ink to be stored; As a result of the evaluation, the above-mentioned re-reconstitution is used as a process for forming the inkjet ink of the color chromaticity. <22> The ink head of the color filter according to any one of <16>~<21> is not spouted, and the spouting nozzle is inspected before the inspection of the spouting surface. The method for preparing the ink refilling liquid for evaluation, 201006895, wherein: the high-density ink is stored in a high-concentration ink-preserving storage tank in advance, and the diluted ink is stored in the first of the diluted ink-filled storage tanks. a process of supplying the high-density ink to the high-concentration ink-storing storage tank and supplying the ink for dilution by the dilution ink-storing storage tank; the high-concentration ink and the ink supplied by the liquid adjustment Supplying the aforementioned ink for dilution, and generating a liquid preparation process for the ink preparation ink of the inkjet ink used to form the color chromophore; and the liquid adjustment as the liquid preparation for the inkjet ink The ink is stored in the second storage process of the liquid-control ink storage tank. In the drawing process, the liquid-control ink stored in the liquid-control ink storage tank is supplied as the ink-jet ink. The method of producing a color filter according to any one of <16>, wherein the ink for dilution is the solvent. <24> A color filter manufactured by the method of producing a color filter according to any one of <16> to <23>. <25> A color filter manufactured by the inkjet method using the inkjet ink according to any one of <1> to <15>. <26> A color filter comprising a color pixel formed by using the inkjet ink according to any one of <1> to <15>. <27> A liquid crystal display comprising a color filter of any of the items <24> to <26>. -14-201006895 <28> - A type of video display device comprising a color filter of any of the items of <24>~<26>. According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a color chrome which exhibits a good hue and which is excellent in light resistance and heat resistance, and is excellent in optical properties such as contrast and haze, and excellent in light resistance and heat resistance. Color filter, inkjet ink which exhibits excellent discharge stability: color filter which is excellent in characteristics such as optical characteristics, light resistance, heat resistance and the like obtained by such inkjet ink; and can be manufactured A method of manufacturing a color filter having such characteristics as a stable color filter without incurring an increase in cost; and a liquid crystal display and an image display device capable of responding to high contrast and high chroma of a high-intensity backlight. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, the inkjet ink of the present invention, the color filter using the inkjet ink, the method for producing the same, and the liquid crystal display and image® display device using the same will be described in detail. Description. <Inkjet inkjet and its preparation method> First, the inkjet ink of the present invention, its constituent components, and a method for producing the same will be described in detail. The inkjet ink according to the present invention contains a methylenebislocene compound represented by the formula (I) and a methylenebislocene metal pattern compound obtained from a metal or a metal compound. <Methylene dipyrrole-based compound represented by the formula (I) and the formula (IV) > 201006895 Hereinafter, each of the methylene dipyrrole compounds represented by the formula (1) and the formula (IV) Base to explain. General formula (1)
通式(IV)General formula (IV)
通式(I)中的Ri~R6、及通式(IV)中的Rl~R4、及以係 各自獨立表示氫原子、或取代基,取代基係表示例如鹵素 原子(例如’氟原子、氯原子、溴原子)、烷基(較佳爲碳數 1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24的、直鏈、枝鏈、或環狀的烷基, 例如:甲基、乙基、丙基、異丙基、丁基、t -丁基、戊基、 己基、庚基、辛基、2 -乙基己基、十二烷基、十六烷基、 環丙基、環戊基、環己基、1-降萡基、1-金剛烷基)、烯基(較 佳爲碳數2~48、更佳爲碳數2~18的烯基,例如:乙烯基、 烯丙基、3-丁 -1-烯基)、芳基(較佳爲碳數6~48、更佳爲碳 數6 ~24的芳基,例如:苯基、萘基)、雜環基(較佳爲碳數 1~32、更佳爲碳數1~18的雜環基,例如:2 -噻吩基、4- 201006895 吡啶基、2 -呋喃基、2 -嘧啶基、1-吡啶基、2 -苯并噻唑基、 卜咪唑基、1-吡唑基、苯并三唑-1-基)、矽烷基(較佳爲碳 - 數3~38、更佳爲碳數3~18的矽烷基,例如:三甲基矽烷 基、三乙基矽烷基、三丁基矽烷基、t-丁基二甲基矽烷基、 t-己基二甲基矽烷基)、羥基、羧基、氰基、硝基、烷氧基(較 佳爲碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24的烷氧基,例如:甲氧 基、乙氧基、1-丁氧基、2-丁氧基、異丙氧基、t-丁氧基、 十二烷氧基、環烷氧基,例如:環戊氧基、環己氧基)、芳 ©氧基(較佳爲碳數6~48、更佳爲碳數6~24的芳氧基,例如: 苯氧基、1-萘氧基)、雜環氧基(較佳爲碳數1~32、更佳爲 碳數1~ 18的雜環氧基,例如:1-苯基四唑-5-氧基、2-四 氫吡喃基氧基)、矽烷氧基(較佳爲碳數1~32、更佳爲碳數 1~18的矽烷氧基,例如:三甲基矽烷氧基、t-丁基二甲基 矽烷氧基、二苯基甲基矽烷氧基)、醯氧基(較佳爲碳數 2~48、更佳爲碳數2~24的醯氧基,例如:乙醯氧基、新 戊醯氧基、苯甲醯氧基、十二醯氧基)、烷氧基羰氧基(較佳 β爲碳數2~48、更佳爲碳數2~24的烷氧基羰氧基’例如: 乙氧基羰氧基、丁氧基羰氧基、環烷氧基羰氧基’例如: 環己氧基羰氧基)、芳氧基羰氧基(較佳爲碳數7~32、更佳 爲碳數7~24的芳氧基羰氧基’例如:苯氧基羰氧基)、胺 甲醯氧基(較佳爲碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24的胺甲酸氧 基,例如:N,N-二甲基胺甲醯氧基、N -丁基胺甲醯氧基、 N-苯基胺甲醯氧基、N-乙基-N-苯基胺甲醯氧基)、胺磺醯 氧基(較佳爲碳數丄〜32、更佳爲碳數1~24的胺磺酿氧基’ 17 - 201006895 例如:N,N-二乙基胺磺醯氧基、N-丙基胺磺醯氧基}、烷基 磺醯氧基(較佳爲碳數1 ~38、更佳爲碳數1 ~24的烷基磺醯 ‘ 氧基,例如:甲基磺醯氧基、十六烷基磺醯氧基、環己基 - 磺醯氧基)、芳基磺醯氧基(較佳爲碳數6~32、更佳爲碳數 6~24的芳基磺醯氧基,例如:苯基磺醯氧基)、醯基(較佳 爲碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1〜24的醯基,例如:甲醯基、 乙醯基、新戊醯基、苯甲醯基、十四醯基、環己醯基)、烷 氧基羰基(較佳爲碳數2~48、更佳爲碳數2~24的烷氧基羰 基,例如:甲氧基羰基、乙氧基羰基、十八烷氧基羰基、 0 環己氧基羰基、2,6-二-第三丁基-4-甲基環己氧基羰基)、 芳氧基羰基(較佳爲碳數7~32、更佳爲碳數7~24的芳氧基 羰基,例如:苯氧基羰基)、胺甲醯基(較佳爲碳數1 ~4 8、 更佳爲碳數1~24的胺甲醯基,例如:胺甲醯基、N,N -二乙 基胺甲醯基、N-乙基-N-辛基胺甲醯基、Ν,Ν-二丁基胺甲醯 基、Ν-丙基胺甲醯基、Ν-苯基胺甲醯基、Ν-甲基-Ν-苯基胺 甲醯基、Ν,Ν-二環己基胺甲醯基)、胺基(較佳爲碳數32以 下,更佳爲碳數24以下的胺基,例如:胺基、甲基胺基、 〇 Ν,Ν-二丁基胺基、十四烷基胺基、2-乙基己基胺基、環己 基胺基)、苯胺基(較佳爲碳數6~32、更佳爲碳數6〜24的 苯胺基,例如:苯胺基、Ν-甲基苯胺基)、雜環胺基(較佳爲 碳數1~32、更佳爲碳數1~18的雜環胺基,例如:4 -吡啶 基胺基)、碳醯胺基(較佳爲碳數2~48、更佳爲碳數2~24 的碳醯胺基,例如:乙醯胺基、苯甲醯胺基、十四烷醯胺 基、新戊醯基醯胺基、環己烷醯胺基)、脲基(較佳爲碳數 .201006895 1~32、更佳爲碳數1~24的脲基,例如:脲基、N,N-二甲 基脲基、N-苯基脲基)、醯亞胺基(較佳爲碳數36以下,更 ' 佳爲碳數24以下的醯亞胺基,例如:N-琥珀醯亞胺基、N-酞醯亞胺基)、烷氧基羰基胺基(較佳爲碳數2~48、更佳爲 碳數2~24的烷氧基羰基胺基,例如:甲氧基羰基胺基、乙 氧基羰基胺基、t-丁氧基羰基胺基、十八烷氧基羰基胺基、 環己氧基羰基胺基)、芳氧基羰基胺基(較佳爲碳數7~32、 更佳爲碳數7~24的芳氧基羰基胺基,例如:苯氧基羰基胺 Ο基)、胺磺醯基(較佳爲碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24的胺 磺醯基,例如:甲胺磺醯基、丁胺磺醯基、苯胺磺醯基、 十六烷胺磺醯基、環己基胺磺醯基)、胺磺醯基胺基(較佳爲 碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24的胺磺醯基胺基,例如:N、 N-二丙基胺磺醯基胺基、N-乙基-N-十二烷基胺磺醯基胺 基)、偶氮基(較佳爲碳數1〜32、更佳爲碳數1~24的偶氮 基,例如:苯基偶氮基、3 -吡唑基偶氮基)、烷硫基(較佳爲 碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24的烷硫基,例如:甲硫基、 ®乙硫基、辛硫基、環己硫基)、芳硫基(較佳爲碳數6~48、 更佳爲碳數24的芳硫基,例如:苯硫基)、雜環硫基(較 佳爲碳數1~32、更佳爲碳數1~18的雜環硫基,例如:2-苯并噻唑硫基、2-吡啶硫基、:L-苯基四唑基硫基)、烷基亞 磺醯基(較佳爲碳數1~32、更佳爲碳數1~24的烷基亞磺醯 基,例如:十二烷亞磺醯基)、芳基亞磺醯基(較佳爲碳數 6〜32、·更佳爲碳數6~24的芳基亞磺醯基,例如:苯基亞 磺醯基)、烷基磺醯基(較佳爲碳數1~48、更佳爲碳數1~24 201006895 的烷基磺醯基,例如:甲基磺醯、乙基磺醯、丙基磺醯、 丁基磺醯、異丙基磺醯、2-乙基己基磺醯、十六烷基磺醯、 辛基磺醯、環己基磺醯)、芳基磺醯基(較佳爲碳數6~48、 更佳爲碳數6~24的芳基磺醯基,例如:苯基磺醯、卜萘基 磺醯)、胺磺醯基(較佳爲碳數32以下,更佳爲碳數24以 下的胺磺醯基,例如:胺磺醯基、N,N -二丙基胺磺醯基、 N-乙基-N-十二烷基胺磺醯基、N-乙基-N-苯基胺磺醯基、 N-環己基胺磺醯基}、磺酸基、磺醯基(較佳爲碳數1~32、 更佳爲碳數1~24的磺醯基,例如:苯氧基磺醯基、辛氧基 磺醯基、苯基磺醯基)、膦基胺基(較佳爲碳數1~32、更佳 爲碳數1~24的膦基胺基,例如:二乙氧基膦基胺基、二辛 氧基膦基胺基>。 通式(I)中的Ri~R6、以及通式(IV)中的R^IU、及R6 的取代基在可更爲取代之基的情形中,可具有以上述之通 式(I)的Ri~R6所說明之取代基,在具有2個以上的取代基 的情形中,此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 通式⑴中的Ri與R2、R2與R3、R4與Rs、或/及Rs 與R6、以及通式(IV)中的Ri與R2、或/及R2與R3係可各 自獨立互相鍵結以形成5員、6員、或是7員的飽和環、 或不飽和環.。所形成之5員、6員、及7員的環爲可進一 步取代之基的情形中,亦可爲上述之通式(I)的所說 明之取代基所取代,在爲2個以上的取代基所取代之情形 中’此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 通式(I)中的R7係表示氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、 201006895 或雜環基’與上述之通式(I)的Rl~R6的取代基中所說明之 鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、及雜環基同義,其較佳範圍亦爲 . 相同。 R7的焼基、芳基、及雜環基爲可進—步取代之基的情 形中’亦可爲上述之通式(1)的的取代基中所說明之 取代基所取代的,在爲2個以上的取代基所取代之情形中, 此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 <金屬原子或金屬化合物> ® 爲了得到本發明的噴墨用印墨中所含有之特定金屬錯 合物化合物-1、特定金屬錯合物化合物_IV,除了上述特定 化合物(通式(I)或通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯系化合物) 以外,金屬原子或金屬化合物係爲必要的。此外,所謂的 特定金屬錯合物化合物-I係指通式(I)所表示之亞甲基二吡 咯系化合物、與含有金屬原子或金屬化合物之亞甲基二吡 咯系金屬錯合物化合物。又,所謂的特定金屬錯合物化合 物-IV係指通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯系化合物、與含 ®有金屬原子或金屬化合物之亞甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化 合物。 形成特定化合物以及特定金屬錯合物化合物-1、特定金 屬錯合物化合物-IV之金屬原子或金屬化合物,若爲可形成 錯合物的金屬原子或金屬化合物的話可爲任一者,包含2 價的金屬原子、2價的金屬氧化物、2價的金屬氫氧化物、 或2價的金屬氯化物。例如,除了 Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、 Pt、Pd、Mo、Μη、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、Fe 等以外,也包含 201006895 A1C1、InCl、FeCl、TiC12、SnCl2、SiCl2、GeCU 等的金 屬氯化物、TiO、VO等的金屬氧化物、Si(OH)2等的金屬氫 氧化物。 _ 此等之中,從錯合物的安定性、分光特性、耐熱、耐 光性、及製造適性等的觀點來看,以Fe ' Zn、Co、V = 0、 或Cu爲佳,以Zn爲最佳。 接著,就通式(I)、及通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯系 化合物的較佳範圍加以說明。 較佳爲通式(I)及通式(IV)中’Ri及R6係各自獨立表示 〇 氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、矽烷基、羥基、氰 基、烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、醯基、烷氧基羰基、胺 甲醯基、胺基、苯胺基、雜環胺基、碳醯胺基、脲基、醯 亞胺基、烷氧基羰基胺基、芳氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、 偶氮基、烷硫基、芳硫基、雜環硫基、烷基磺醯基、芳基 磺醯基、或膦基胺基,R2及R5係各自獨立表示氫原子、鹵 素原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、羥基、氰基、硝基、 烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、醯基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基 © 羰基、胺甲醯基、醯亞胺基、烷氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、 偶氮基、烷硫基、芳硫基、雜環硫基、烷基磺醯基、芳基 磺醯基、或胺磺醯基,R3及R4係各自獨立表示氫原子、鹵 素原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、矽烷基、羥基、氰 基、烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、醯基、烷氧基羰基、胺 甲醯基、苯胺基、碳醯胺基、脲基、醯亞胺基、烷氧基羰 基胺基、胺磺醯基、偶氮基、烷硫基、芳硫基、雜環硫基、 m -22 - 201006895 烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、胺磺醯基、或膦基胺基,R7係 表示氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基,金屬原 子或金屬化合物係表示Zn、Mg、Si、Pt、Pd、Μο、Μη、 Cu、Ni、Co、TiO、或 VO。 更佳爲通式(I)及通式(IV)中,Ri及R6係各自獨立表示 氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、’氰基、醯基、烷氧 基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺基、雜環胺基、碳醯胺基、脲基、 醯亞胺基、烷氧基羰基胺基、芳氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、 〇 偶氮基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、或膦基胺基,r2及r5 係各自獨立表示烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、氰基、硝基、 醯基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、醢亞胺基、 烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、或胺磺醯基,R3及R4係各自獨 立表示氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、氰基、醯基、 烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、碳醯胺基、脲基、醯亞胺基、烷 氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、烷硫基、芳硫基、雜環硫基、 烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、或胺磺醯基,R7係表示氫原子、 ®鹵素原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基,金屬原子或金屬化合 物係表示 Zn、Mg、Si、Pt、Pd、Cu、Ni、Co、或 VO。 特佳爲通式(I)及通式(IV)中,1^及Re係各自獨立表示 氫原子、烷基、芳基、雜環基、胺基、雜環胺基、碳醯胺 基、脲基、醯亞胺基、烷氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、偶氮 基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、或膦基胺基,R2及RS係各 自獨立表示烷基、芳基、雜環基、氰基、醯基、烷氧基簾 基、胺甲醯基、烷基磺醯基、或芳基磺醯基,仏及R4係各 -23 201006895 自獨立表示氫原子、院基、芳基、或雜環基,R7係表示氫 原子、烷基、芳基、或雜環基’金屬原子或金屬化合物係 表示 Zn、Cu、Co、或 VO。 通式⑴中的R 1與R2、R2與R3、R4與R5、或/及R5 與R6、以及通式(IV)中的Ri與R2、或/及R2與r3係各自 獨立互相鍵結而形成不具有取代基之5員、6員、或7貴 的飽和環或不飽和環之情形,可舉例如:吡咯環、呋喃環、 噻吩環、吡唑環、咪唑環、三唑環、曙唑環、噻唑環、耻 咯烷環、哌啶環、環戊烯環、環己烯環、苯環、吡啶環、 吡阱環、嗒畊環,較佳係可舉例如苯環、吡啶環。 又,具有取代基之情形中,該取代基係可舉例如上述 之通式(I)的Ri~FU中所說明之取代基,較佳的取代基亦與 R 1〜R 6相同。 此外’通式(IV)所表示之化合物亦可爲互變異構物。 <通式(II-1)所表示之化合物> 由上述通式(I)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯化合物與金屬原 子或金屬化合物所得之亞甲基二吡咯金屬錯合物(特定金屬 錯合物化合物-1)、及由上述通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯 化合物與金屬原子或金屬化合物所得之亞甲基二吡咯金屬 錯合物(特定金屬錯合物化合物_IV)的適宜實施態様,可舉 例如下述通式(II-1)所表示之化合物(以下,適宜稱爲「特定 金屬錯合物化合物-H-1」)。 201006895 通式(I I - 1)Ri to R6 in the formula (I), and R1 to R4 in the formula (IV), and each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and the substituent means, for example, a halogen atom (for example, 'fluorine atom, chlorine Atom, a bromine atom, an alkyl group (preferably a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group such as methyl, ethyl or propyl. Base, isopropyl, butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, ring Hexyl, 1-norbornyl, 1-adamantyl), alkenyl (preferably a carbon number of 2 to 48, more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, vinyl, allyl, 3- Butyr-1-enyl), aryl (preferably a carbon number 6 to 48, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group or a naphthyl group), or a heterocyclic group (preferably a carbon number) 1 to 32, more preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, 2 -thienyl, 4-201006895 pyridyl, 2-furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 1-pyridyl, 2-benzothiazole Base, imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), decylalkyl (preferably carbon - number 3~) 38. More preferably, it is a decyl group having a carbon number of 3 to 18, for example, trimethyl decyl group, triethyl decyl group, tributyl decyl group, t-butyl dimethyl decyl group, t-hexyl dimethyl group. a mercaptoalkyl group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, 1-butoxy, 2-butoxy, isopropoxy, t-butoxy, dodecyloxy, cycloalkoxy, for example: cyclopentyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), aromatic a base (preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 48 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenoxy group, a 1-naphthyloxy group) or a heterocyclic oxy group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 32) More preferably, it is a heterocyclic oxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, 1-phenyltetrazole-5-oxy group, 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy group, decyloxy group (preferably carbon number 1) More preferably, it is a decyloxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 18, for example, a trimethyldecyloxy group, a t-butyldimethylsilyloxy group, a diphenylmethyldecyloxy group, or a decyloxy group ( It is preferably a decyloxy group having a carbon number of 2 to 48, more preferably 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, an ethoxylated group, a neopentyloxy group, a benzamidine group. Dodecyloxy), alkoxycarbonyloxy (preferably β is an alkoxycarbonyloxy group having a carbon number of 2 to 48, more preferably 2 to 24 carbon atoms), for example: ethoxycarbonyloxy group, butyl An oxycarbonyloxy group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyloxy group such as a cyclohexyloxycarbonyloxy group, or an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably having a carbon number of 7 to 32, more preferably a carbon number of 7 to 24) An aryloxycarbonyloxy group such as a phenoxycarbonyloxy group, an amine methyl methoxy group (preferably a carboxylic acid oxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, N, N-dimethylamine methyl methoxy, N-butylamine methyl methoxy, N-phenylamine methyl methoxy, N-ethyl-N-phenylamine methyl oxime), amine sulfonium sulfonate An oxy group (preferably having a carbon number of 3232 to 32, more preferably an amine sulfonyloxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 24) 17 - 201006895 For example: N,N-diethylamine sulfonyloxy group, N-propylamine a sulfomethoxy group, an alkylsulfonyloxy group (preferably an alkylsulfonyloxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 38, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, methylsulfonyloxy group, 16 An alkylsulfonyloxy group, a cyclohexyl-sulfonyloxy group, an arylsulfonyloxy group (preferably an arylsulfonyloxy group having a carbon number of 6 to 32, more preferably a carbon number of 6 to 24, Such as: phenylsulfonyloxy), fluorenyl (preferably a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably a fluorenyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, a decyl group, an ethyl fluorenyl group, a neopentyl group, a benzene group a mercaptocarbonyl group, a tetradecyl group, a cyclohexyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably a carbon number of 2 to 48, more preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, Ethoxycarbonyl, octadecyloxycarbonyl, 0 cyclohexyloxycarbonyl, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyloxycarbonyl), aryloxycarbonyl (preferably carbon) The number of 7 to 32, more preferably an aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenoxycarbonyl group, or an amine methyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 4 8 and more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24) Aminomethyl thiol group, for example: amine mercapto, N,N-diethylamine, fluorenyl, N-ethyl-N-octylamine, fluorene, hydrazine, hydrazine-dibutylamine , Ν-propylamine methyl hydrazino, fluorenyl-phenylamine methyl hydrazino, hydrazine-methyl-hydrazine-phenylamine methyl hydrazino, anthracene, fluorene-dicyclohexylamine carbhydryl group, amine group Preferably, the carbon number is 32 or less, more preferably an amine group having a carbon number of 24 or less, for example, an amine group, a methylamino group, an anthracene, a fluorene-dibutylamino group, a tetradecylamine. a base, a 2-ethylhexylamino group, a cyclohexylamino group, an anilino group (preferably an anthranyl group having a carbon number of 6 to 32, more preferably a carbon number of 6 to 24, for example, an anilino group or a fluorenyl-methylaniline group) a heterocyclic amine group (preferably a carbon number of 1 to 32, more preferably a heterocyclic amine group having a carbon number of 1 to 18, for example, a 4-pyridylamino group), a carboguanamine group (preferably a carbon) a number of 2 to 48, more preferably a carbon amide group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, an acetamino group, a benzylamino group, a tetradecyl fluorenyl group, a neopentyl guanylamino group, a cyclohexane Amidino), ureido (preferably carbon number: 201006895 1 to 32, more preferably a ureido group having a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, urea group, N,N-dimethylureido group, N-phenyl group Urea group), quinone imine group (preferably having a carbon number of 36 or less, more preferably a quinone imine group having a carbon number of 24 or less, for example, N-succinimide group, N-quinone imine group), Alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably alkoxycarbonylamino group having a carbon number of 2 to 48, more preferably 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methoxycarbonylamino group, ethoxycarbonylamino group, t- Butoxycarbonylamino, octadecyloxycarbonylamino, cyclohexyloxycarbonylamino), aryloxycarbonylamino It is preferably an aryloxycarbonylamino group having a carbon number of 7 to 32, more preferably a carbon number of 7 to 24, for example, a phenoxycarbonylamine fluorenyl group or an amine sulfonyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 48). More preferably, it is a sulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methotrexate, butylsulfonyl, aniline sulfonyl, cetylamine sulfonyl, cyclohexylamine sulfonyl), an amine a sulfonylamino group (preferably a sulfonylamino group having a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, N, N-dipropylamine sulfonylamino group, N-B a azo-N-dodecylamine sulfonylamino group, an azo group (preferably an azo group having a carbon number of 1 to 32, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, a phenylazo group, 3-pyrazolylazo), alkylthio (preferably a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably an alkylthio group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methylthio, ethylthio, octylthio , cyclohexylthio), arylthio (preferably having a carbon number of 6 to 48, more preferably an arylthio group having a carbon number of 24, for example, a phenylthio group) or a heterocyclic thio group (preferably having a carbon number of 1~) 32. More preferably, it is a heterocyclic thio group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, 2-benzothiazolylthio group, 2-pyridylthio group, L-phenyltetrazolylthio group, or alkyl group. Sulfhydryl (preferably an alkyl sulfinylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 32, more preferably 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, dodecylsulfinyl), an arylsulfinyl group (preferably carbon) a number of 6 to 32, more preferably an arylsulfinyl group having a carbon number of 6 to 24, for example, a phenylsulfinyl group, or an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 48, more preferably Alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms of 201006895, for example, methylsulfonium, ethylsulfonium, propylsulfonium, butylsulfonium, isopropylsulfonium, 2-ethylhexylsulfonium, ten Hexaalkylsulfonium, octylsulfonium, cyclohexylsulfonyl), arylsulfonyl (preferably an arylsulfonyl group having a carbon number of 6 to 48, more preferably 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, benzene A sulfonamide, a naphthylsulfonium sulfonate, an amine sulfonyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 32 or less, more preferably an sulfonyl group having a carbon number of 24 or less, for example, an amine sulfonyl group, an N,N-dipropylamine Sulfonyl, N-ethyl-N-dodecylamine sulfonyl, N-ethyl-N-phenylamine sulfonyl, N-cyclohexylamine sulfonyl}, sulfonate, sulfonate Base (preferably a sulfonyl group having 1 to 32 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, phenoxysulfonyl, octyloxysulfonyl, phenyl Sulfhydryl), phosphinoamino group (preferably a phosphino group having a carbon number of 1 to 32, more preferably 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, diethoxyphosphinoamino group, dioctyloxyphosphino group Amine Group>. The substituents of Ri to R6 in the formula (I) and R^IU and R6 in the formula (IV) may have the above formula (I) in the case of a more substituted group. In the case of the substituent described by Ri~R6, in the case of having two or more substituents, the substituents may be the same or different. Ri and R2, R2 and R3, R4 and Rs, or/and Rs and R6 in the formula (1), and Ri and R2, and/or R2 and R3 in the formula (IV) may each independently bond each other to each other. Form a saturated ring, or an unsaturated ring of 5, 6 or 7 members. In the case where the ring of the 5 member, the 6 member, and the 7 member formed is a further replaceable group, the substituent described in the above formula (I) may be substituted, and the substitution may be two or more. In the case where the radical is substituted, the substituents may be the same or different. R7 in the formula (I) represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a 201006895 or a heterocyclic group, and a halogen atom described in the substituent of R1 to R6 of the above formula (I), The alkyl group, the aryl group, and the heterocyclic group are synonymous, and the preferred range thereof is also the same. In the case where the fluorenyl group, the aryl group, and the heterocyclic group of R7 are a group which can be further substituted, 'the substituent which is described in the substituent of the above formula (1) may be substituted, In the case where two or more substituents are substituted, the substituents may be the same or different. <Metal Atom or Metal Compound> ® In order to obtain the specific metal complex compound-1 and the specific metal complex compound_IV contained in the inkjet ink of the present invention, in addition to the above specific compound (Formula (I) In addition to the methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the formula (IV), a metal atom or a metal compound is necessary. Further, the specific metal complex compound-I means a methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the formula (I) and a methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound containing a metal atom or a metal compound. Further, the specific metal complex compound-IV means a methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the formula (IV), and a methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound containing a metal atom or a metal compound. Compound. Forming a specific compound and a specific metal complex compound-1, a metal atom or a metal compound of the specific metal complex compound-IV, and if it is a metal atom or a metal compound capable of forming a complex, it may be any one, including 2 A valence metal atom, a divalent metal oxide, a divalent metal hydroxide, or a divalent metal chloride. For example, in addition to Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Μη, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, etc., 201006895 A1C1, InCl, FeCl, TiC12, SnCl2, SiCl2, GeCU, etc. are also included. Metal chloride, metal oxide such as TiO or VO, or metal hydroxide such as Si(OH)2. _ Among these, from the viewpoints of stability, spectral characteristics, heat resistance, light resistance, and manufacturing suitability of the complex, Fe 'Zn, Co, V = 0, or Cu is preferred, and Zn is used. optimal. Next, preferred ranges of the methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the general formula (I) and the general formula (IV) will be described. Preferably, in the general formula (I) and the general formula (IV), 'Ri and R6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a decyl group, a hydroxy group, a cyano group or an alkoxy group. Alkyl, aryloxy, heterocyclic oxy, fluorenyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminemethanyl, amine, anilino, heterocyclic amine, carboguanyl, ureido, quinone, alkoxy Carbocarbonylamine, aryloxycarbonylamino, sulfonyl, azo, alkylthio, arylthio, heterocyclic thio, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, or phosphinoamine The groups R2 and R5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group or an anthracene group. , alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxy, carbonyl, amine, mercapto, quinone, alkoxycarbonyl, sulfonyl, azo, alkylthio, arylthio, heterocyclic sulphur a group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, or an aminesulfonyl group, each of R3 and R4 independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a decyl group, or a hydroxy group. , cyano, alkane Oxyl, aryloxy, heterocyclic oxy, fluorenyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminemethanyl, anilino, carboguanamine, ureido, oxime imido, alkoxycarbonylamino, amine sulfonate Sulfhydryl, azo, alkylthio, arylthio, heterocyclic thio, m -22 - 201006895 alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonyl, or phosphinoamine, R7 It represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and a metal atom or a metal compound means Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Μο, Μη, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, or VO. More preferably, in the general formula (I) and the general formula (IV), Ri and R6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a 'cyano group, an anthracenyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group. , Aminomethyl, Amino, Heterocyclic Amine, Carboguanamine, Urea, Iridium, Alkoxycarbonyl, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, A , alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, or phosphinoamine, r2 and r5 each independently represent alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cyano, nitro, decyl, alkoxy a carbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amine carbaryl group, a fluorenylene group, an alkyl sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, or an amine sulfonyl group, and each of R 3 and R 4 independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkene group. Or an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a decyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amine carbaryl group, a carboguanamine group, a ureido group, a quinone imine group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an amine sulfonyl group, An alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, or an aminesulfonyl group, and R7 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic ring. Base, metal atom or metal compound Line represents Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, or VO. Particularly preferably, in the general formula (I) and the general formula (IV), the 1 and the Re each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amine group, a heterocyclic amino group, a carbon amide group, Ureido, oxime imido, alkoxycarbonylamino, amine sulfonyl, azo, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, or phosphinoamine, R2 and RS each independently represent an alkane , aryl, heterocyclic, cyano, fluorenyl, alkoxy, amidyl, alkylsulfonyl, or arylsulfonyl, fluorene and R4 each -23 201006895 self-independent A hydrogen atom, a aryl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and R7 means a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group 'metal atom or a metal compound means Zn, Cu, Co, or VO. R 1 and R 2 in the formula (1), R 2 and R 3 , R 4 and R 5 , or / and R 5 and R 6 , and Ri and R 2 in the formula (IV) and/or R 2 and r 3 are each independently bonded to each other. In the case of forming a 5-member, 6-member, or 7-valent saturated or unsaturated ring having no substituent, examples thereof include a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, and an anthracene. The azole ring, the thiazole ring, the ruthenium ring, the piperidine ring, the cyclopentene ring, the cyclohexene ring, the benzene ring, the pyridine ring, the pyridene ring, and the hydrazine ring are preferably, for example, a benzene ring or a pyridine ring. . Further, in the case of having a substituent, the substituent may, for example, be a substituent described in Ri~FU of the above formula (I), and a preferred substituent is also the same as R 1 to R 6 . Further, the compound represented by the formula (IV) may also be a tautomer. <Compound represented by the formula (II-1)> A methylene dipyrrole metal complex obtained from the methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the above formula (I) and a metal atom or a metal compound (specific Metal complex compound-1), and a methylene dipyrrole metal complex (specific metal complex compound) obtained from a methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the above formula (IV) and a metal atom or a metal compound In a suitable embodiment, the compound represented by the following formula (II-1) (hereinafter, referred to as "specific metal complex compound-H-1" as appropriate) is exemplified. 201006895 Formula (I I - 1)
通式(II-l)中的Rl〜Re係各自獨立表示氫原子、或取代 基’與通式(I)中的Rl~R6同義,較佳態樣亦爲相同。 ^ 通式(11-1)中的Ma表示金屬原子或金屬化合物,且與 在上述特定金屬錯合物化合物中說明之金屬原子或金屬 化合物同義,其較佳範圍亦爲相同。 通式(II-1)中的R7係與通式(I)中的R7同義,較佳態樣 亦爲相同。 通式(II-1)中的Χι係表示可與Ma鍵結之基,若爲可與 金屬原子Ma鍵結之基的話可爲任一者,可舉例如水、醇類 (例如’甲醇、乙醇、丙醇)等以及「金屬螯合劑」[1]坂口 武一,上野景平著(1995年南江堂)、同[2](1996宇)'同 [3](1997年)等、中記載的化合物。 通式(II-1)中的Χ2係表示爲了中和Ma電荷的必要之 基,可舉例如鹵素原子、羥基、羧酸基、磷酸基、磺酸基 等。 通式(II-1)中的Χι與X2係可互相鍵結與Ma —起形成 5員、6員、或7員的環。所形成之5員、6員、及7員的 環係可爲飽和環、或是不飽和環。又,5員、6員、及7員 的環係可僅以碳原子而構成的’亦可形成具有至少1個選 -25 201006895 自於氮原子、氧原子、或/及硫原子之原子的雜環。 <通式(II-2)所表示之化合物> 由上述通式(I)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯化合物與金屬原 - 子或金屬化合物所得之亞甲基二吡咯金屬錯合物(特定金屬 錯合物化合物-1)、及由上述通式(IV)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯 化合物與金屬原子或金屬化合物所得之亞甲基二吡咯金屬 錯合物(特定金屬錯合物化合物-IV)的適宜實施態樣,係可 適當使用下述通式(Π-2)所表示之化合物(以下,適宜稱爲 「特定金屬錯合物化合物-II-2」)。 馨 通式(I I -2) R3R1 to Re in the formula (II-1) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent 'is synonymous with R1 to R6 in the formula (I), and preferred embodiments are also the same. ^Ma in the formula (11-1) represents a metal atom or a metal compound, and is synonymous with the metal atom or metal compound described in the above specific metal complex compound, and the preferred range thereof is also the same. The R7 group in the formula (II-1) is synonymous with R7 in the formula (I), and the preferred embodiment is also the same. The Χι line in the formula (II-1) represents a group which may be bonded to Ma, and may be any group which may be bonded to a metal atom Ma, and may, for example, be water or an alcohol (for example, 'methanol, ethanol , propanol) and other "metal chelating agents" [1] Sakaguchi Takeshi, Ueno Jingping (1995 Nanjiangtang), Tong [2] (1996 Yu) 'the same [3] (1997), etc. Compound. The oxime 2 in the formula (II-1) represents a group necessary for neutralizing the charge of Ma, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a sulfonic acid group. The Χι and X2 lines in the formula (II-1) may be bonded to each other to form a ring of 5 members, 6 members, or 7 members. The ring system of the 5 members, 6 members, and 7 members formed may be a saturated ring or an unsaturated ring. Further, the ring system of 5 members, 6 members, and 7 members may be formed of only carbon atoms, or may form at least one atom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, or/and sulfur atoms. Heterocyclic. <Compound represented by the formula (II-2)> A methylene dipyrrole metal complex obtained from the methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the above formula (I) and a metal pro- or metal compound (Specific metal complex compound-1), and a methylene dipyrrole metal complex obtained by a methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the above formula (IV) and a metal atom or a metal compound (specific metal is mismatched) In a suitable embodiment of the compound (IV), a compound represented by the following formula (Π-2) (hereinafter referred to as "specific metal complex compound-II-2" is suitably used). Xin Formula (I I -2) R3
❹ 通式(II-2)中的RrRe係與通式(I)中的Ri~r6同義, 較佳態樣亦爲相同。 通式(II-2)中的Rs~Ri3所表示之取代基係與通式⑴所 表示之化合物的Ri~R6所表示之取代基同義,其較佳態樣 亦爲相同。通式(II-2)所示化合物的RS~R13所表示之取代 基在可更爲取代之基的情形中,亦可爲在通式⑴所表示之 化合物的Ri~Re中所說明之取代基所取代,在爲2個以上 的取代基所取代之情形中,此等的取代基係可相同或是不 -26 201006895 同。 通式(II-2)中的R7係與通式⑴中的R7同義,較佳態樣 ' 亦爲相同。 通式(II-2)中的係表示氫原子、鹵素原子、烷基、 芳基、或雜環基’彼等各基係與通式⑴中的R7同義。R14 的較佳範圍係與上述R7的較佳範圍相同。r14係在可更爲 取代之基的情形中,亦可爲在通式(I)所表示之化合物的 Ri~R6的取代基中所說明之基所取代,在爲2個以上的取 φ代基所取代之情形中,此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 通式(II-2)中的Ma表示金屬原子或金屬化合物,可與 上述特定金屬錯合物化合物-I中所說明之金屬原子或金屬 化合物同義,其較佳範圍亦爲相同。 通式(II-2)中的 R8 與 R9、R9 與 Rio、Rii 與 R12、Ri2 與R13亦可各自獨立地互相鍵結以形成5員、6員、或7 員的飽和環、或不飽和環,此等係與通式(I)所表示之化合 物的Ri與R2、R2與R3、R4與R5、或/及Rs與Re同義, ®其較佳態樣亦爲相同。 <通式(III)所表示之化合物> 特定金屬錯合物化合物-1、及特定金屬錯合物化合物 -IV的適宜實施態樣係可舉例如下述通式(ΙΠ)所表示之化 合物(以下,適宜稱爲「特定金屬錯合物化合物-111」)。 201006895 通式(I I I)R The RrRe system in the formula (II-2) is synonymous with Ri~r6 in the formula (I), and preferred embodiments are also the same. The substituent represented by Rs to Ri3 in the formula (II-2) is synonymous with the substituent represented by Ri~R6 of the compound represented by the formula (1), and the preferred aspects thereof are also the same. The substituent represented by RS to R13 of the compound of the formula (II-2) may be substituted as described in Ri~Re of the compound represented by the formula (1) in the case of a more replaceable group. Substituents, in the case of substitution of two or more substituents, these substituents may be the same or not -26 201006895. The R7 in the formula (II-2) is synonymous with R7 in the formula (1), and the preferred embodiment 'is also the same. The group in the formula (II-2) represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and each of the groups is synonymous with R7 in the formula (1). The preferred range of R14 is the same as the preferred range of the above R7. In the case where the r14 is a more substitutable group, it may be substituted with a group described in the substituent of Ri~R6 of the compound represented by the formula (I), and two or more φ is substituted. In the case where the group is substituted, the substituents may be the same or different. In the formula (II-2), Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound, and may be synonymous with the metal atom or metal compound described in the above specific metal complex compound-I, and the preferred range thereof is also the same. R8 and R9, R9 and Rio, Rii and R12, Ri2 and R13 in the formula (II-2) may also be bonded to each other independently to form a saturated ring of 5 members, 6 members, or 7 members, or unsaturated. Rings, which are synonymous with Ri and R2, R2 and R3, R4 and R5, or / and Rs and Re of the compound represented by the formula (I), and the preferred aspects thereof are also the same. <Compound represented by the formula (III)> A specific embodiment of the specific metal complex compound-1 and the specific metal complex compound-IV is, for example, a compound represented by the following formula (ΙΠ) (Hereinafter, it is suitably referred to as "specific metal complex compound-111"). 201006895 Formula (I I I)
通式(III)中的R2~R5、及R7係各自與通式(I)中的 Ri~R6、及R7同義,較佳態様亦爲相同。 通式(III)中的Ma表示金屬原子或金屬化合物’可與上 述特定金屬錯合物化合物-I中所說明之金屬原子或金屬化 合物同義,其較佳範圍亦爲相同。 通式(III)中,R8及R9係各自獨立表示烷基(較佳爲碳 數1~36、更佳爲碳數1~12的直鏈、枝鏈、或環狀的烷基, 例如:甲基、乙基、丙基、異丙基、丁基、異丁基、t-丁基、 己基、2-乙基己基、十二烷基、環丙基、環戊基、環己基、 1-金剛烷基)、烯基(較佳爲碳數2~24、更佳爲碳數2~12 的烯基,例如:乙烯基、烯丙基、3-丁 -1-烯基)、芳基(較 佳爲碳數6~36、更佳爲碳數6~18的芳基,例如:苯基、 萘基)、雜環基(較佳爲碳數1~24、更佳爲碳數1~12的雜 環基,例如:2 -噻吩基、4 -吡啶基、2 -呋喃基、2 -嘧啶基、 卜吡啶基、2 -苯并噻唑基、:[-咪唑基、1-吡唑基、苯并三 唑-1-基)、烷氧基(較佳爲碳數1~36、更佳爲碳數1~18的 烷氧基,例如:甲氧基、乙氧基、丙氧基、丁氧基、己氧 基、2-乙基己氧基、十二烷氧基、環己氧基)、芳氧基(較佳 28 201006895 爲碳數6~24、更佳爲碳數1~18的芳氧基,例如:苯氧基、 萘氧基)、烷基胺基(較佳爲碳數1~36、更佳爲碳數1~18 ' 的烷基胺基,例如:甲基胺基、乙基胺基、丙基胺基、丁 基胺基、己基胺基、2-乙基己基胺基、異丙基胺基、t-丁基 胺基、t-辛基胺基、環己基胺基、Ν,Ν-二乙基胺基、N,N-二丙基胺基、N,N-二丁基胺基、N-甲基-N-乙基胺基)、芳 基胺基(較佳爲碳數6-36、更佳爲碳數6~18的芳基胺基, 例如:苯基胺基、萘基胺基、Ν,Ν-二苯基胺基、N-乙基-N-® 苯基胺基}、或雜環胺基(較佳爲碳數1~24、更佳爲碳數 1~12的雜環胺基,例如:2-胺基吡咯、3-胺基吡唑、2-胺 基吡啶、3-胺基吡啶)。 通式(III)中,R8及R9的烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、 烷氧基、芳氧基、烷基胺基、芳基胺基、或雜環胺基爲可 進一步取代之基的情形中,亦可爲上述通式(I)的Ri~R6中 所說明之取代基所取代,在爲2個以上的取代基所取代之 情形中,此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 ® 通式(III)中,X3係表示NR、氮原子、氧原子、或硫原 子,X4係表示NRa、氧原子、或硫原子。R與Ra係各自 獨立表示氫原子、烷基(較佳爲碳數1~36、更佳爲碳數1~12 的直鏈、枝鏈、或環狀的烷基,例如:甲基、乙基、丙基、 異丙基、丁基、異丁基、t-丁基、己基、2-乙基己基、十二 烷基、環丙基、環戊基、環己基、1-金剛烷基)、烯基(較佳 爲碳數2~24、更佳爲碳數2~12的烯基,例如:乙烯基、 烯丙基、3-丁 -1-烯基)、芳基(較佳爲碳數6〜36、更佳爲碳 -29 201006895 數6~18的芳基,例如:苯基、萘基)、雜環基(較佳爲碳數 1~24、更佳爲碳數1~12的雜環基,例如:2-噻吩基、4-吡啶基、2-呋喃基、2-嘧啶基、;[-吡啶基、2-苯并唾唑基、 1-咪唑基、1-吡唑基、苯并三唑-1-基)、醯基(較佳爲碳數 1~24、更佳爲碳數2~18的醯基,例如:乙醯基、新戊醯 基、2-乙基己基、苯甲醯基、環己醯基)、烷基磺醯基(較佳 爲碳數1~24、更佳爲碳數1~18的烷基磺醯基,例如:甲 基磺醯、乙基磺醯、異丙基磺醯、環己基磺醯)、芳基磺醯 基(較佳爲碳數6~24、更佳爲碳數6~18的芳基磺醯基,例 如:苯基磺醯、萘基磺醯)。 上述R與Ra的烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、醯基、烷 基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基係亦可進一步爲上述通式(I)的 的取代基中所說明之基所取代,以複數的取代基所取 代之情形中,此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 通式(III)中,Yi係表示NRc、氮原子、或碳原子,Y2 表示氮原子、或碳原子,Rc係與上述X3的R同義。 通式(III)中,R8與Υι係亦可互相鍵結與r8、Yt及碳 原子一起形成5員環(例如,環戊烷、吡略烷、四氫味喃、 二氧戊環、四氫噻吩、吡咯、呋喃、噻吩、吲哚、苯并呋 喃、苯并噻吩)、6員環(例如,環己基、哌啶、吡畊、味啉、 四氫吡喃、二噚烷、硫雜環己烷、二噻烷、苯、哌啶、吡 阱、嗒畊、唾啉、喹唑啉)、或7員環(例如,環庚烷、六亞 甲亞胺)。 通式(ΠΙ)中,R9與Υ2係亦可互相鍵結與R9、Y2及碳 201006895 原子一起形成5員、6員、或7員的環。所形成之5員、6 員、及7員的環係可舉例如:將由上述的尺8與Υι及碳原 -子所形成之環中的1個鍵予以變化爲雙鍵之環。 通式(ΙΠ)中’以與Yl、及以與γ2結合所形成之5員、 6員及7員的環係可更爲取代之環的情形中,亦可爲在上述 通式(III)的R2~RS的取代基中所說明之基所取代,在爲2 個以上的取代基所取代之情形中,此等的取代基係可相同 或是不同。 Φ 通式(ΙΠ)中’ X5表示可與Ma鍵結之基,可舉例如與 上述通式(ll-ι)中的X!爲相同之基。 a表示0、1、或2。 通式(ΠΙ)所表示之化合物的較佳態樣係r2~r5、r7、 及Ma分別爲在通式⑴所表示之化合物的說明中所記載之 較佳態樣,X3係NR(R爲氫原子、烷基)、氮原子或氧原子, X4係NRa(Ra爲氫原子、烷基、雜環基}或氧原子,丫“系 NRc(Rc爲氫原子、或烷基)、氮原子或碳原子,Y2係氮原 e 子、或碳原子,χ5係透過氧原子鍵結之基,Re及R9係各 自獨立地爲烷基、芳基、雜環基、烷氧基、或是烷基胺基’ 或R8與Υι互相鍵結以形成5員或是6員環’或Rg與Y2 互相鍵結以形成5員或是6員環,a表示〇或1° 通式(III)所表示之化合物的更佳態樣係R2~Rs、R7、 Ma分別爲在通式(I)所表示之化合物的說明中所記載之特 佳態様,X3及X4爲氧原子,Υι爲NH,Y2爲氮原子,X5 係透過氧原子鍵結之基,Re及R9係各自獨立地爲院基、芳 201006895 基、雜環基、烷氧基、或是烷基胺基,或尺8與Yi互相鍵 結以形成5員或是6員環,或R9與Z2互相鍵結以形成5 員或是6員環,a表示0或1« 本發明中的特定金屬錯合物化合物-1~特定金屬錯合物 化合物-IV(亞甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物)的莫耳吸光 係數係因爲化合物的構造而非常的高。從膜厚的觀點來 看’莫耳吸光係儘量越高者爲佳。又,最大吸收波長λ max 係從提昇色純度的觀點來看,以520nm~580nm爲佳, 530nm~570nm爲更佳。又,本發明中所使用的亞甲基二 吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物係與吡唑并吡咯系甲亞胺色素比 較時,1)吸收爲陡峭,且對於彩色濾光片的藍色爲必要要件 之在450nm的吸收値較小(穿透率較高)且色純度較高。2) 對於吡唑并吡咯系甲亞胺色素的吸光係數爲約60000,亞 甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物的吸光係數爲約 130000,吸光係數較高(色價較高)。3)亞甲基二吡咯系金 屬錯合物化合物係耐熱性、耐光性優異,且藉由與後述之 酞菁系色素倂用可更提昇耐熱性、耐光性,而變得堅牢。 此外,最大吸收波長' 及莫耳吸光係數係利用分光光度計 UV-2400PC(島津製作所公司製)來測定。 本發明中特定金屬錯合物化合物-I的熔點,從溶解性 之觀點來看,不要太高者爲佳。 接著’以下係表示本發明中的特定金屬錯合物化合物 -I(包含特定金屬錯合物化合物-11-1、特定金屬錯合物化合 物- Π- 2'特定金屬錯合物化合物ΙΠ、及特定金屬錯合物化 201006895 合物-IV)的具體例,惟本發明係不受限於此等。R2 to R5 and R7 in the formula (III) each have the same meaning as Ri to R6 and R7 in the formula (I), and the preferred state is also the same. The term "Ma" in the formula (III) represents a metal atom or a metal compound' which may be synonymous with the metal atom or metal compound described in the above specific metal complex compound -I, and the preferred range thereof is also the same. In the formula (III), R8 and R9 each independently represent an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms), for example: Methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1 -adamantyl), alkenyl (preferably a carbon number of 2 to 24, more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 3-but-1-enyl group), or an aromatic group a base (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group) or a heterocyclic group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 24, more preferably a carbon number) a heterocyclic group of 1 to 12, for example, 2 -thienyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, pyridyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, :[-imidazolyl, 1-pyridyl Azolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), alkoxy (preferably alkoxy having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, methoxy, ethoxy, propyl Oxyl, butoxy, hexyloxy, 2-ethylhexyloxy, dodecyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), aryloxy (preferably 28 201006895 is carbon number 6~ 24. More preferably, it is an aryloxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, a phenoxy group, a naphthyloxy group, or an alkylamine group (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 36, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 18'). Alkylamino group, for example: methylamino, ethylamino, propylamino, butylamino, hexylamino, 2-ethylhexylamino, isopropylamino, t-butylamine Base, t-octylamino group, cyclohexylamino group, anthracene, fluorene-diethylamino group, N,N-dipropylamino group, N,N-dibutylamino group, N-methyl-N -ethylamino), arylamine (preferably an arylamino group having a carbon number of 6 to 36, more preferably a carbon number of 6 to 18, for example, a phenylamino group, a naphthylamino group, an anthracene, an anthracene group) a diphenylamino group, an N-ethyl-N-® phenylamino group, or a heterocyclic amine group (preferably a heterocyclic amino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms) For example: 2-aminopyrrole, 3-aminopyrazole, 2-aminopyridine, 3-aminopyridine. In the formula (III), an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group and a heterocyclic ring of R8 and R9. In the case where the group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamine group or heterocyclic amine group is a further substituted group, it may also be in the above-mentioned formula (I) in Ri~R6. Description of substitution Substituted, in the case of substitution of two or more substituents, the substituents may be the same or different. In the formula (III), X3 represents NR, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or sulfur. The atom, X4 represents NRa, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. R and Ra each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably a linear or branched chain having a carbon number of 1 to 36, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 12). Or a cyclic alkyl group, for example: methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropane a group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a 1-adamantyl group, an alkenyl group (preferably a carbon number of 2 to 24, more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, a vinyl group, an allyl group, 3 -but-1-enyl), aryl (preferably carbon number 6 to 36, more preferably carbon -29 201006895 number 6 to 18 aryl group, for example, phenyl, naphthyl), heterocyclic group (more Preferably, the carbon number is from 1 to 24, more preferably a heterocyclic group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, 2-thienyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl; [-pyridyl, 2 - benzoxazolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), a base (preferably a fluorenyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, an ethyl fluorenyl group, a neopentyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a benzamidine group or a cyclohexyl group) An alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 24, more preferably a carbon number of 1 to 18, for example, methylsulfonium, ethylsulfonium, isopropylsulfonium, or a ring; Hexylsulfonyl), arylsulfonyl (preferably, an arylsulfonyl group having a carbon number of 6 to 24, more preferably a carbon number of 6 to 18, for example, phenylsulfonyl, naphthylsulfonium). The alkyl group, the alkenyl group, the aryl group, the heterocyclic group, the fluorenyl group, the alkylsulfonyl group or the arylsulfonyl group of the above R and Ra may be further described in the substituent of the above formula (I). Substituents substituted by a plurality of substituents may be the same or different. In the formula (III), Yi represents NRc, a nitrogen atom or a carbon atom, Y2 represents a nitrogen atom or a carbon atom, and Rc is synonymous with R of the above X3. In the general formula (III), R8 and Υι may also be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered ring together with r8, Yt and a carbon atom (for example, cyclopentane, pyridine, tetrahydromethane, dioxolane, tetra Hydrothiophene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, anthracene, benzofuran, benzothiophene), 6-membered ring (eg, cyclohexyl, piperidine, pyridin, porphyrin, tetrahydropyran, dioxane, thia Cyclohexane, dithiane, benzene, piperidine, pyrimidine, hydrazine, porphyrin, quinazoline), or a 7-membered ring (eg, cycloheptane, hexamethyleneimine). In the formula (ΠΙ), R9 and Υ2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring of 5, 6 or 7 members together with R9, Y2 and carbon 201006895 atoms. The ring system of the five members, the six members, and the seven members formed may be, for example, a ring in which one of the rings formed by the above-mentioned ruler 8, Υι, and carbonogen is changed to a double bond. In the general formula (ΙΠ), in the case of a ring which is more substituted with Y1 and a ring system of 5 members, 6 members and 7 members formed by bonding with γ2, the above formula (III) may also be used. The substituents described in the substituents of R2 to RS are substituted, and in the case of substitution with two or more substituents, the substituents may be the same or different. Φ In the formula (ΙΠ), X5 represents a group which can be bonded to Ma, and is, for example, the same group as X! in the above formula (ll-ι). a represents 0, 1, or 2. Preferred embodiments of the compound represented by the formula (ΠΙ) are r2 to r5, r7, and Ma, respectively, which are preferred embodiments described in the description of the compound represented by the formula (1), and the X3 series NR (R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom, X4 is NRa (Ra is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a heterocyclic group) or an oxygen atom, and 丫 " is NRc (Rc is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a nitrogen atom Or a carbon atom, a Y2-based nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom, a ruthenium 5-based group bonded through an oxygen atom, and Re and R9 are each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, or an alkane. The amino group ' or R8 and Υι are bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring' or Rg and Y2 are bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, and a represents 〇 or 1°. The more preferable examples of the compounds represented by R2 to Rs, R7 and Ma are the particularly preferred states described in the description of the compound represented by the formula (I), X3 and X4 are oxygen atoms, and Υι is NH, Y2. Is a nitrogen atom, X5 is a group bonded through an oxygen atom, and Re and R9 are each independently a hospital group, a aryl 201006895 group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylamine group, or a ruler 8 and Yi are mutually Bonding Forming a 5-member or 6-membered ring, or R9 and Z2 are bonded to each other to form a 5-member or 6-membered ring, and a represents 0 or 1« a specific metal complex compound-1 to a specific metal complex in the present invention. The Mohr absorbance coefficient of the compound-IV (methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound) is extremely high because of the structure of the compound. From the viewpoint of film thickness, it is preferred that the Mohr absorbance system is as high as possible. Further, the maximum absorption wavelength λ max is preferably 520 nm to 580 nm and more preferably 530 nm to 570 nm from the viewpoint of enhancing color purity. Further, the methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound used in the present invention is further preferred. When compared with the pyrazolopyrrole-based imine pigment, 1) the absorption is steep, and the blue color of the color filter is necessary. The absorption enthalpy at 450 nm is small (high transmittance) and color purity. Higher. 2) The absorption coefficient of the pyrazolopyrrole-based imine pigment is about 60,000, and the absorption coefficient of the methylene-dipyrrole-based metal complex compound is about 130,000, and the absorption coefficient is high (higher color value) 3) Methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound is heat resistant and light resistant In addition, it is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance by using a phthalocyanine dye which will be described later. In addition, the maximum absorption wavelength ' and the Mohr absorbance coefficient are based on a spectrophotometer UV-2400PC (Shimadzu Corporation) The melting point of the specific metal complex compound-I in the present invention is preferably not too high from the viewpoint of solubility. Next, 'the following is a specific metal complex compound in the present invention. Specific examples of -I (including a specific metal complex compound-11-1, a specific metal complex compound - Π-2' specific metal complex compound ΙΠ, and a specific metal complex compound 201006895-IV), However, the invention is not limited thereto.
化合物 號碼 Ri=Ee=丑eHKis Sa=R$=Rtf=Rw R3=R4=Rii—Rn B7=Rm Ma I a~l —NHj & —CHj -Η Zn I a-2 间上 同上 同上 同上 Cu Ϊ a-3 同上 同上 同上 同上 Co I a_4 闻上 同上 苘上 固上 V=0 la-5 一NHCOCH, 同上 鬨上 同上 Zn i a-6 同上 间上 同上 間上 Cu la-7 同上 同上 同上 -ch3 Zn Ia*8 同上 同上 同上 Zn la-9 同上 同上 同上 同上 Zn Ia.lG 同上 同上 —0^7〇$〇) -H Zn I &Ί1 同上 同上 同上 一 CHa Zn I &*12 同上 同上 —聯) -Η Cu Ia*13 一nh2 苘上 同上 一 CHe Zn la-14 同上 间上 同上 -Η Zn I a* 15 同上 躅上 -〇 間上 Zn la-16 —MHCOCHj 同上 —OMH3HOOOH -CHs Cu la-17 —ΝΗ^ 同上 -〇 一 Η Zn I a* 18 同上 冏上 同上 间上 Cu I a-19 网上 词上 同上 苘上 V;0 I a-20 同上 同上 网上 -CHa Zn I a-2J —NHCOCH, 同上 诃上 同上 Zn la-22 —NHCtK^GH^COOH 同上 同上 -Η Zn I a-23 鬨上 同上 同上 -CHa Zn la-24 同上 间上 同上 同上 Cu 1 an25 m± 同上 ~〇~ci 网上 Zn Ia26 同上 同上 同上 Zn 201006895Compound number Ri=Ee=ugly eHKis Sa=R$=Rtf=Rw R3=R4=Rii—Rn B7=Rm Ma I a~l —NHj & —CHj —Η Zn I a-2 is the same as above Ϊ a-3 Same as above Ibid. Co I a_4 Smell on the same upper sputum and put on V=0 la-5-NHCOCH, the same as above, the same as above, Zn i a-6, the upper and upper sides of the same upper Cu 37, ibid. Ch3 Zn Ia*8 Same as above, the same as above, Zn la-9, the same as above, the same as above, the same as above, Zn Ia.lG, the same as above, 0^7〇$〇) -H Zn I &Ί1 Same as above, the same as the above CHa Zn I &*12 Ibid. - )) - Η Cu Ia*13 - nh2 苘 upper same as the previous CHe Zn la-14 same as above - Zn I a* 15 same as above - 〇 Zn la-16 - MHCOCHj Same as above - OMH3HOOOH -CHs Cu La-17 —ΝΗ^ Same as above—〇一Η Zn I a* 18 Same as above on the upper top of the upper Cu I a-19 Online word on the same as above V; 0 I a-20 Ibid. I-Online-CHa Zn I a-2J —NHCOCH, the same as above, the same as above, Zn la-22—NHCtK^GH^COOH, the same as above, Η Zn I a-23, the same as above, the same as above-CHa Zn la-24, the same as above Cu 1 an25 m ± supra ~ ~ CI square internet Zn Ia26 ditto Zn 201006895
化合物 號碼 Ri^Re=R6F=Ru Rs^Ra^S^Rn R^R<=RiossRn Rt^Rm Ma la-27 QOW -卿〇 —¢00-(^-¾ -ca -Η Cxi Ia‘28 同上 同上 间上 ^CHs Zn la-29 同上 同上 同上 Cu I a-30 同上 興上 阏上 Cu U‘31 同上 -Ό 同上 Zn la-32 周上 同上 同上 Zn Ia*33 —NHSO^ 同上 CHa 间上 Zn la-34 同上 同上 同上 Zn la-35 -c^-Q^och, 闻上 鬨上 Zn la-36 Ψ> -N-»A 同上 同上 间上 Zn I a.37 ψψϋΜ 同上 同上 同上 Zn la 38 -a 間上 同上 同上 Cu la-39 —S-CH,O00H 闻上 网上 同上 Cu I a-40 —S-CHCOOW 同上 -CHa 同上 Cu Ia_41 P上 同上 同上 同上 v=o la 42 —SOjCHj 同上 同上 同上 v=o la-43 苘上 同上 'Ο 同上 Cti I a*44 -X <n 同上 同上 同上 Cu 201006895Compound number Ri^Re=R6F=Ru Rs^Ra^S^Rn R^R<=RiossRn Rt^Rm Ma la-27 QOW -Qing 〇—¢00-(^-3⁄4 -ca -Η Cxi Ia'28 Ibid. Same as above ^CHs Zn la-29 Same as above Isomorphous Cu I a-30 Same as above Shangyu Shangyu Cu U'31 Same as above - Ό Same as Zn la-32 On the same as above Zn Ia*33 —NHSO^ Same as above CHa La-34 Same as above, the same as above, Zn la-35 -c^-Q^och, smear Zn la-36 Ψ> -N-»A Same as above, Zn I a.37 ψψϋΜ Same as above, Zn la 38 - a above the same as above, Cu la-39 —S-CH, O00H smells on the same network as Cu I a-40 —S-CHCOOW same as above—CHa Same as above Cu Ia_41 P Same as above ibid. v=o la 42 —SOjCHj Same as above i =o la-43 苘上上上'Ο Same as above Cti I a*44 -X <n Same as above ibid. Cu 201006895
化合物 號碼 R* r9 化合物 號碼 Re r9 瓜一2 5 1-切 CHJ〇^ -ch3 m-2 6 —CHjCHjCOOCjHj -CHs m— 2 7 rH cooch3 同上 瓜一2 8 -Ϊ心 同上 m-2 9 —ch2nhso2ch3 —ch2nhso2ch3 Π—3 0 —ΟΗ,ϋΗΝΗβΟ^ CH, —CHfCriMhSC^CH, CHs m— 3 1 —CHjNHSdjCHj CjHj —chc4h, ΠΙ-3 2 —CHjCHNHSO^ —C4H,(t) m_33 -CHs Π-3 4 —CHjCNIlhsOjCH, k m-3 5 同上 瓜一3 6 NHS0zGH3 -CHs m— 3 7 nhso2ch3 同上 ΠΙ-3 8 -Q n 瞧r〇 同上 m-3 9 OH 同上 诅一4 0 OCH, 同上 Μ-4 1 -Q so2nh2 同上 ΠΙ-4 2 ~Q ^ SQjNCH, 同上 3 同上 瓜一4 4 -O"S〇2ch3 同上 201006895Compound number R* r9 Compound number Re r9 Melon one 2 5 1-cut CHJ〇^ -ch3 m-2 6 —CHjCHjCOOCjHj -CHs m— 2 7 rH cooch3 Same as melon one 2 8 - Ϊ心同上 m-2 9 —ch2nhso2ch3 —ch2nhso2ch3 Π—3 0 —ΟΗ,ϋΗΝΗβΟ^ CH, —CHfCriMhSC^CH, CHs m— 3 1 —CHjNHSdjCHj CjHj —chc4h, ΠΙ-3 2 —CHjCHNHSO^ —C4H,(t) m_33 −CHs Π-3 4 — CHjCNIlhsOjCH, k m-3 5 Ibid. Melon 3 6 NHS0zGH3 -CHs m— 3 7 nhso2ch3 Ibid.-3 8 -Q n 瞧r〇 Same as above m-3 9 OH Ibid. 4 0 OCH, Ibid.-4 1 - Q so2nh2 Ibid.-4 2 ~Q ^ SQjNCH, Ibid. 3 Ibid. 4 4 -O"S〇2ch3 Ibid. 201006895
化合物 號碼 r8 r9 化合物 號碼 R* r9 瓜一 4 5 -CHa -CHs SI 一 4 6 ΟΛ —CHC4H9 CjH. —chc4h, 1Π-4 7 —64H,(t) 瓜一4 8 Ο -Ό ΠΙ_4 9 —ch2nhSo2ch, -CHs 瓜一5 0 —CHjMHSOjCHj —CHjNHSOjCH, in- 5 1 —chnhso2ch3 k 同上 IH-5 2 —CWiHSOjCHj k —CHWKOjCH, k m_5 3 —CHNHSOjCH, CA 同上 m-54 -Q nhso2ch3 -CHs m_5 5 nhso2ch3 HQ NHSOjCH, ffl_ 5 6 -Q SO/HGOCH, 同上 m-5 7 ch3 CH, -CHs Π-5 8 GH. -<^ch3 CH, ch3 m— 5 9 QCHzCH20H 同上 瓜一 6 0 OOOGH3 -ch3 ΙΠ-6 1 OCH, 〇ch3 同上 m— 6 2 NHS02CH, 同上 m- 6 3 同上 Π-6 4 201006895Compound number r8 r9 Compound number R* r9 Melon 4 5 -CHa -CHs SI A 4 6 ΟΛ -CHC4H9 CjH. —chc4h, 1Π-4 7 —64H,(t) Melon 4 8 Ο -Ό ΠΙ_4 9 —ch2nhSo2ch , -CHs 瓜一五 0 0 - CHjMHSOjCHj - CHjNHSOjCH, in- 5 1 —chnhso2ch3 k Same as above IH-5 2 —CWiHSOjCHj k —CHWKOjCH, k m_5 3 —CHNHSOjCH, CA Same as above m-54 -Q nhso2ch3 -CHs m_5 5 nhso2ch3 HQ NHSOjCH, ffl_ 5 6 -Q SO/HGOCH, ibid. m-5 7 ch3 CH, -CHs Π-5 8 GH. -<^ch3 CH, ch3 m— 5 9 QCHzCH20H Same as melon 6 0 OOOGH3 -ch3 ΙΠ- 6 1 OCH, 〇ch3 Same as above m-6 2 NHS02CH, same as above m- 6 3 Ibid. -6 4 201006895
❹❹
化合物 號碼 Rs R.t Re BI- 9 0 *ca -CH* -ch3 -CHs HI —* 9 1 同上 同上 同上 —CHNHSO^Hj m-9 2 同上 同上 —CHNHSO^CH, U 同上 E— 9 3 -Ο -CHs -CHs 顶一9 4 同上 圃上 wCJl9(t) C4Hft(t) m- 9 5 同上 同上 —CHHHS02CH3 同上 m-9 6 同上 同上 NHSOAH-t -CHs N咖tC〜 hQ> HHSOjCHj -CHs —CHs IB-9 8 -P CH, 同上 同上 HI- 9 9 ~^H!I Cl —O-Cf Gl 同上 閗上 ΙΠ- 1 0 0 -〇-0CH, -hQ-och, 同上 同上 in- 1 0 1 同上 同上 M- 1 0 2 -Q N 脚 2qtl7 Hmt%% BI- 10 3 ch3 —chczh5 CH, -ΟΗΟ,Η* —(jnnsi^hj —CHHHSOjCHa CA 201006895Compound number Rs Rt Re BI- 9 0 *ca -CH* -ch3 -CHs HI —* 9 1 Same as above Same as above—CHNHSO^Hj m-9 2 Same as above—CHNHSO^CH, U Same as E-9 3 -Ο - CHs -CHs Top one 9 4 Same as above cCJl9(t) C4Hft(t) m- 9 5 Same as above—CHHHS02CH3 Same as above m-9 6 Same as above NHSOAH-t -CHs N coffee tC~ hQ> HHSOjCHj -CHs —CHs IB -9 8 -P CH, Same as above HI- 9 9 ~^H!I Cl —O-Cf Gl Same as above - 1 0 0 -〇-0CH, -hQ-och, Same as above in- 1 0 1 Ibid Same as above M- 1 0 2 -QN foot 2qtl7 Hmt%% BI- 10 3 ch3 —chczh5 CH, -ΟΗΟ,Η* —(jnnsi^hj —CHHHSOjCHa CA 201006895
由上述通式(I)所表示之亞甲基二吡咯系化合物所得之 金屬錯合物化合物-I(包含特定金屬錯合物化合物11-1、特 定金屬錯合物化合物11-2、特定金屬錯合物化合物III、及 特定金屬錯合物化合物IV)係可以美國專利第4,774,339 ί3 -38 - 201006895 號、同-5,433,896 號、特開 2001-240761 號、同 2002-155052 號、專利第 3614586 號、Aust.J.Chem, 19 6 5,1 1,1835-1845 ' J.H.Boger et al, Heteroatom Chemistry,ν〇1·1,Νο·5,389(1990)等中記載的方法進行 合成。 本發明的噴墨用印墨係亦可分別1種單獨使用、亦可 倂用2種以上的上述特定金屬錯合物化合物-ΐ~上述特定金 屬錯合物化合物-IV。 〇 上述的亞甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物(包含特定金 屬錯合物化合物-1、特定金屬錯合物化合物-11-1、特定金 屬錯合物化合物-11-2、特定金屬錯合物化合物-III、及特定 金屬錯合物化合物-IV)的噴墨用印墨中的總含量係以1~20 質量%爲佳。低於1質量。/。之情形中,爲了達成作爲彩色濾 光片所必要的光學濃度,所以膜厚變厚。爲此,由於黑底 亦有增厚之必要,且黑底形成變得困難而爲不佳。超過20 質量%之情形中,由於印墨黏度變高且吐出變得困難,又於 ®溶媒的溶解變的困難而爲不佳。 <通式(Α)所表示之四氮卟吩系氰基色素> 本發明的噴墨用印墨係除了上述的亞甲基二吡咯系金 屬錯合物化合物(包含特定金屬錯合物化合物-1、特定金屬 錯合物化合物-11-1、特定金Ρ錯合物化合物-11-2、特定金 屬錯合物化合物-III、及特定金屬錯合物化合物-IV)以外, 倂用下述通式(Α)所表示之四氮卟吩系氰基色素(以下,適宜 稱爲「特定色素-Α」),可藉以製作色純度優異、堅牢性優 -39 - 201006895 異、使用該噴墨用印墨之彩色濾光片。特別是適合使用於 CCD用及CMOS用。 以下,說明通式(A)所表示之四氮卟吩系氰基色素的各 基。A metal complex compound-I obtained from the methylene dipyrrole compound represented by the above formula (I) (containing a specific metal complex compound 11-1, a specific metal complex compound 11-2, a specific metal) The complex compound III, and the specific metal complex compound IV) can be used in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,774,339, 037-38 - 201006895, the same as the 5,433,896, the JP-A-2001-240761, the same as the 2002-155052, and the patent No. 3,614,586. , Aust. J. Chem, 19 6 5, 1, 1, 1835-1845 'JH Boger et al, Heteroatom Chemistry, ν〇1·1, Νο·5, 389 (1990), etc. were synthesized. The inkjet inkjet ink of the present invention may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds of the above specific metal complex compounds - the above-mentioned specific metal complex compound -IV. The above-mentioned methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound (containing a specific metal complex compound-1, a specific metal complex compound-11-1, a specific metal complex compound-11-2, a specific metal error The total content of the inkjet ink of the compound-III and the specific metal complex compound-IV) is preferably from 1 to 20% by mass. Less than 1 mass. /. In this case, in order to achieve the optical density necessary for the color filter, the film thickness is increased. For this reason, since the black matrix is also necessary for thickening, the formation of the black matrix becomes difficult and is not preferable. In the case of more than 20% by mass, the ink viscosity becomes high and the discharge becomes difficult, and the dissolution of the ® solvent becomes difficult, which is not preferable. <Teribo-nitrophenic cyanochrome represented by the formula (Α)> The inkjet ink of the present invention is a methylene dipyrrole-based metal complex compound (including a specific metal complex compound) -1, except for the specific metal complex compound-11-1, the specific metal ruthenium compound-11-2, the specific metal complex compound-III, and the specific metal complex compound-IV) The cyanoquinone-based cyano dye represented by the above formula (hereinafter referred to as "specific dye-purine") can be used to produce excellent color purity and excellent fastness - 39 - 201006895 Ink ink color filter. It is especially suitable for use in CCD and CMOS. Hereinafter, each group of the tetrazolium-based cyano dye represented by the formula (A) will be described.
通式(A)中,Mi表示金屬原子或金屬化合物。金屬原子 或金屬化合物若爲可形成錯合物之金屬原子或金屬化合物 的話可爲任一者,包含2價的金靥原子、2價的金屬氧化 物、2價的金屬氫氧化物、或2價的金屬氯化物。 通式(A)中的Mi係包含例如Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、 Pt、Pd、Mo、Μη、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、及 Fe 等、以及 A1C1、 InCl、FeCl、TiCl2、SnCl2、SiCl2、GeCl2 等的金屬氯化 物、TiO、VO等的金屬氧化物、Si(〇H)2等的金屬氫氧化物。 通式(A)中的Zi、Z2、Z3、及Z4係各自獨立表示爲了 形成由選自於碳原子、氮原子、及氫原子之原子所構成之6 員環所必要的原子群。該6員環係可爲飽和環、亦可爲不 飽和環,可爲無取代、亦可具有取代基。再者,亦可縮合 其他的5員或6員的環。6員環係包含苯環、環己基環、 吡啶環、嘧啶環、吡畊環等。 本發明中的特定色素-A之最大吸收波長zmax係從色 -40 - 201006895 純度提昇的觀點來看,以 580nm~700nm 爲佳, 600nm~68〇nm爲更佳。此外’最大吸收波長係與特定金 屬錯合物化合物-I同樣地測定。 <通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素> 上述通式(A)所表示之四氮卟吩系氰基色素之中,特別 是以下述通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素(以下,適宜稱爲「特 定色素-B」}爲佳。 诵式(B) R102 R103In the formula (A), Mi represents a metal atom or a metal compound. The metal atom or the metal compound may be any one of a metal atom or a metal compound which can form a complex, and includes a divalent gold atom, a divalent metal oxide, a divalent metal hydroxide, or 2 The price of metal chloride. The Mi in the general formula (A) includes, for example, Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Μη, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, and Fe, and the like, and A1C1, InCl, FeCl, TiCl2. a metal chloride such as SnCl 2 , SiCl 2 or GeCl 2 , a metal oxide such as TiO or VO, or a metal hydroxide such as Si (〇H) 2 . The Zi, Z2, Z3, and Z4 in the formula (A) each independently represent a group of atoms necessary for forming a 6-membered ring composed of an atom selected from a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, and a hydrogen atom. The 6-membered ring system may be a saturated ring or an unsaturated ring, and may be unsubstituted or substituted. Furthermore, it is also possible to condense other rings of 5 or 6 members. The 6-membered ring system includes a benzene ring, a cyclohexyl ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyridine ring, and the like. The maximum absorption wavelength zmax of the specific dye-A in the present invention is preferably from 580 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably from 600 nm to 68 Å, from the viewpoint of improving the purity of the color -40 - 201006895. Further, the 'maximum absorption wavelength range was measured in the same manner as the specific metal complex compound-I. <Phthalocyanine-based dye represented by the formula (B)> Among the tetrazole-based cyano dyes represented by the above formula (A), in particular, the phthalocyanine represented by the following formula (B) It is preferable that the coloring matter (hereinafter, referred to as "specific dye-B" is preferable). Formula (B) R102 R103
通式(B)中,M2係與在上述通式(A)所表示之化合物中 的Mi之例同義,其較佳態樣亦爲相同。 通式(B)中,係各自獨立表示氫原子或取代 基,R101〜R116所表示之取代基係與前述的通式(1)中的 Ri~R6所表示之取代基之例示同義,其較佳態様亦爲相同。 通式(B)所表示之化合物的RiQi-Rii6的取代基在可更爲取 代之基的情形中,亦可爲在前述的通式(I)中的RrRs中所 說明之取代基所取代,在爲2個以上的取代基所取代之情 形中,此等的取代基係可相同或是不同。 以下,表示特定色素-B之R1G1~R116的取代基之例 (T-1~T141)。但是,在本發明係不受限於此等。 -41 201006895 又,R1G1~R116所表示之取代基的較佳態樣之—,可舉 例如「* — s( = 0)m— (L)n - (A)p」(以下,稱爲取代基A)所 · 示之基。A係各自獨立地表示氫原子或取代基,該取代基的 - 定義係與Ri〇i~Rii6所表示之取代基同義。*表示與苯環的 鍵結位置。此外,R101~R116的至少一個爲取代基A爲佳, 個爲取代基A爲較佳。亦可通式(B)中的各苯環基中每 1個爲取代基A。含有複數個的取代基A之情形中,彼等係 可相同、亦可不同。 m係各自獨立地表示1或2,m爲2時爲佳。η係各自 g 獨立表示0或l,n爲1時爲佳。p係各自獨立地表示:l~5 的整數,1~3時爲佳,爲1時爲更佳。 L係表示脂肪族或芳香族的連結基,複數個的L係可相 同或是不同。L所示之脂肪族的連結基係可無取代、亦可具 有取代基,以總碳數1~20的脂肪族基爲佳,總碳數爲1~15 的脂肪族基爲更佳。可舉例如亞甲基、伸乙基、申丙基、 伸丁基等。 L所示之芳香族的連結基係可無取代、亦可具有取代 © 基,以總碳數6~20的芳香基爲佳,總碳數爲6〜16的芳香 基爲更佳。可舉例如伸苯基、伸萘基等,最佳爲伸苯基。 此外,η爲0時,A與S係直接鍵結。 另外,在本發明的效果點上,A係較佳爲鹵素原子、脂 肪族基(烷基等)' 氰基、羧基、胺甲醯基、脂肪族羥羰基、 芳基羥羰基、羥基、脂肪族氧基、胺甲醯氧基、雜環氧基、 脂肪族羥羰氧基、羥羰基胺基、胺磺醯基胺基、脂肪族經 m -42 201006895 羰基胺基、脂肪族胺磺醯基、芳基胺磺醯基、脂肪族硫基、 ' 芳硫基、脂肪族磺醯基、芳磺醯基、胺磺醯基、脂肪族磺 - 醯胺甲醯基、芳磺醯胺甲醯基、脂肪族羰基胺磺醯基、芳 羰基胺磺醯基、脂肪族磺醯胺磺醯基、芳磺醯胺磺醯基、 醯亞胺基、磺酸基、或此等組合之基。 在本發明,分子中複數個的A係可分別相同或是不同, 較佳係複數個的A中至少1個的A具有—OY、— COOY、 -so3y、一 CON(Y)CO -、con(y)so2 -或一so2n(y)co 上述—ΟΥ、- COOY、— so3y、- CON(Y)CO-、 CON(Y)S〇2 —或一S〇2N(Y)CO-亦可與連結基L鍵結,亦 可不透過連接基L而與—s( = 0)m -直接鍵結。不透過連接 基L而與一 S( = 0)m —直接鍵結之情形中,R3係-OY爲佳, 構成直接鍵結於一 s( = o)m —與四氮雜卟啉環之-S03Y(m = 2)爲佳。 Y係表示氫原子、金屬原子或共軛酸。Y所示之金屬原 ®子可舉例如Li、Na、K、Mg、Ca,較佳者爲Li、Na、K。 形成Y所示之共軛酸的鹼係較佳爲3級胺類(例如:三乙 胺、三丙胺、三丁胺、二異丙基乙胺、Ν -甲基哌啶、4 -甲 基味啉)、胍類(例如:胍、Ν, Ν-二苯基胍、1,3 -二-〇-甲 苯基胍)、吡啶類(例如:吡啶、2-甲基吡啶)等。其中,尤 以三乙胺、三丙胺、三丁胺、Ν,Ν -二苯基胍、1,3 -二- 〇-甲苯基胍爲佳 以下,表示特定色素—Β的R101~Rii6的取代基之例(Τ 43 201006895 一 1~Τ_ 141)。但是,本發明並不受限於此等。此外,以下 之例中,較佳係可舉例如Τ— 87、Τ— 89、Τ— 94、Τ— 95、 Τ-96、Τ - 97 > Τ-98、Τ — 125、Τ - 126、Τ— 127、Τ -128、Τ- 129、Τ- 140、Τ- 141。In the general formula (B), the M2 system is synonymous with the case of Mi in the compound represented by the above formula (A), and the preferred aspects thereof are also the same. In the formula (B), each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and the substituent represented by R101 to R116 is synonymous with the exemplified substituent represented by Ri to R6 in the above formula (1). The good state is also the same. The substituent of RiQi-Rii6 of the compound represented by the formula (B) may be substituted with a substituent described in the above-mentioned RrRs in the formula (I) in the case of a more replaceable group. In the case where two or more substituents are substituted, the substituents may be the same or different. Hereinafter, examples of the substituent of R1G1 to R116 of the specific dye-B (T-1 to T141) will be described. However, the invention is not limited thereto. Further, in the preferred embodiment of the substituent represented by R1G1 to R116, for example, "* - s( = 0) m - (L)n - (A)p" (hereinafter, referred to as substitution) Base A). The A group each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and the definition of the substituent is synonymous with the substituent represented by Ri〇i to Rii6. * indicates the bonding position with the benzene ring. Further, at least one of R101 to R116 is preferably a substituent A, and the other is a substituent A. Further, each of the benzene ring groups in the formula (B) may be the substituent A. In the case where a plurality of substituents A are contained, they may be the same or different. The m systems each independently represent 1 or 2, and m is preferably 2. Each of the η systems g independently represents 0 or l, and n is preferably 1. The p-systems are each independently represented by an integer of 1 to 5, preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1. The L system represents an aliphatic or aromatic linking group, and the plurality of L systems may be the same or different. The aliphatic linking group represented by L may be unsubstituted or substituted, and is preferably an aliphatic group having a total carbon number of 1 to 20, and preferably an aliphatic group having a total carbon number of 1 to 15. For example, a methylene group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, and the like can be mentioned. The aromatic linking group represented by L may be unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group having a total carbon number of 6 to 20, and an aromatic group having a total carbon number of 6 to 16 is more preferable. For example, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group or the like can be mentioned, and a phenyl group is most preferred. Further, when η is 0, A and S are directly bonded. Further, in the effect of the present invention, the A system is preferably a halogen atom, an aliphatic group (alkyl group, etc.) 'cyano group, a carboxyl group, an amine carbenyl group, an aliphatic hydroxycarbonyl group, an arylhydroxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyl group, a fat. Alkoxy, amine methyloxy, heterocyclic oxy, aliphatic hydroxycarbonyloxy, hydroxycarbonylamino, sulfonylamino, aliphatic via m-42 201006895 carbonylamino, aliphatic amine sulfonium Base, arylamine sulfonyl, aliphatic thio, 'arylthio, aliphatic sulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonamide, aliphatic sulfonamide, sulfonamide Sulfhydryl, aliphatic carbonyl sulfonyl sulfonyl, aryl carbonyl sulfonyl sulfonyl, aliphatic sulfonamide sulfonyl sulfonyl sulfonyl sulfonyl sulfonyl sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfonate, or a combination thereof . In the present invention, a plurality of A-systems in the molecule may be the same or different, and preferably at least one of the plurality of A has -OY, -COOY, -so3y, a CON(Y)CO-, con (y) so2 - or a so2n(y)co The above -ΟΥ, -COOY, - so3y, -CON(Y)CO-, CON(Y)S〇2 - or a S〇2N(Y)CO- may also Bonded to the linking group L, or directly bonded to -s(= 0)m - without passing through the linking group L. In the case where it is directly bonded to a S(= 0)m without a linking group L, R3 is preferably -OY, and is directly bonded to a s(=o)m- and tetraazaporphyrin ring. -S03Y (m = 2) is preferred. Y represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom or a conjugate acid. The metal progeny represented by Y may, for example, be Li, Na, K, Mg or Ca, and preferably Li, Na or K. The base which forms the conjugate acid represented by Y is preferably a tertiary amine (for example, triethylamine, tripropylamine, tributylamine, diisopropylethylamine, hydrazine-methylpiperidine, 4-methyl group). (porphyrin), anthracene (for example: hydrazine, hydrazine, fluorene-diphenylanthracene, 1,3 -di-indole-tolylhydrazine), pyridine (for example, pyridine, 2-methylpyridine), and the like. Among them, triethylamine, tripropylamine, tributylamine, anthracene, fluorene-diphenylanthracene, and 1,3-di-fluorene-tolylhydrazine are preferred, and the substitution of R101 to Rii6 of a specific pigment-purine is indicated. Example of the base (Τ 43 201006895 a 1~Τ_ 141). However, the invention is not limited thereto. Further, in the following examples, preferred are, for example, Τ-87, Τ-89, Τ-94, Τ-95, Τ-96, Τ-97 > Τ-98, Τ-125, Τ-126, Τ—127, Τ-128, Τ-129, Τ-140, Τ-141.
44 201006895 T-1 —F T一 9 T, 參 Τ-20 _2 T-3 T-4 T-5 T-6 T-7 T- •8 -Cl —Br —ch3 —C# 9(t) —cf3 —CN — no2 T-1 0 T- -11 T_ 一1 2 T_ -13 T-1 4 —conh2 _ •0 - -N^ \^N ch3 «^^00Ν(0Η20Η200Η3)2 T-1 6 T- -17 T- 18 T-1 9 COOH COOC^g . _n〜cooca H \^N n’s(ch2)2oc2h5 _ 〇CH3 -0C3H7(iso) T- -2 1 T一2 2 T_ -23 T -24 — -0(CH2)20H —OCCH^OCjHj - -ochch2oh - 0(CH2)20(CH2)0CH3 ch3 T-26 T- 27 T-28 Τ一 2 5 -〇(CH2)20(CH2)2〇(CH2)20CH3 -0CHCH20CH2(piC4H9 -〇CH2CH2〇~(0> -〇 (CH2) 2SC4H9 CH3 C2H5 ~ T-2 9 T-3 0 0 -och2-chnhso2ch3 _ o-ch2ch2-n、 T-3 1 T-3 2 -OCH^CF^CH/ -〇CF3 ch3 T-3 6 T-3 3 -och2-chn-so2ch3 CH3 T-3 8 T-3 4 T-3 5 T-3 6 T-3 7 —0CHzC00C2H5 -OCHCOOC^i; -OCHjCOOj^COOC^g -〇CH2COO(CH2)2OCCH3 -0-^) CH3 T-3 9 CH3 T-40 T-4 1 T-4 2 -〇-<〇KH9(t) -〇-Q)OCH3 -OH0)- 0CH2CHC4H5 —〇-^^-〇(CH2)2〇C2H, T-4 3 —0 T-4 4 T-45 T-4 6 -i) 〇C4H9 T一4 7 cooc+h944 201006895 T-1 —FT-9 T, Τ-20 _2 T-3 T-4 T-5 T-6 T-7 T- •8 -Cl —Br —ch3 —C# 9(t) —cf3 — CN — no2 T-1 0 T- -11 T_一1 2 T_ -13 T-1 4 —conh2 _ •0 - -N^ \^N ch3 «^^00Ν(0Η20Η200Η3)2 T-1 6 T- - 17 T- 18 T-1 9 COOH COOC^g . _n~cooca H \^N n's(ch2)2oc2h5 _ 〇CH3 -0C3H7(iso) T- -2 1 T_2 2 T_ -23 T -24 — - 0(CH2)20H —OCCH^OCjHj - -ochch2oh - 0(CH2)20(CH2)0CH3 ch3 T-26 T- 27 T-28 Τ一 2 5 -〇(CH2)20(CH2)2〇(CH2) 20CH3 -0CHCH20CH2(piC4H9 -〇CH2CH2〇~(0> -〇(CH2) 2SC4H9 CH3 C2H5 ~ T-2 9 T-3 0 0 -och2-chnhso2ch3 _ o-ch2ch2-n, T-3 1 T-3 2 -OCH^CF^CH/ -〇CF3 ch3 T-3 6 T-3 3 -och2-chn-so2ch3 CH3 T-3 8 T-3 4 T-3 5 T-3 6 T-3 7 —0CHzC00C2H5 -OCHCOOC ^i; -OCHjCOOj^COOC^g -〇CH2COO(CH2)2OCCH3 -0-^) CH3 T-3 9 CH3 T-40 T-4 1 T-4 2 -〇-<〇KH9(t) -〇 -Q)OCH3 -OH0)- 0CH2CHC4H5 —〇-^^-〇(CH2)2〇C2H, T-4 3 —0 T-4 4 T-45 T-4 6 -i) 〇C4H9 T_4 7 cooc +h9
Cl T-4 8 T-4 9 T-5 0 T-5 1 -〇^3·δ02°Η3 -0-O"S03K _〇O"S〇2NH2 201006895 T-52 _0 "〇-δ〇Α Τ-56 -Ο '-〇-so; +ΗΗ Τ-5 3 Τ 一 54 Τ-5 5 外㈣ t-^J)-C0N*C^7(iso) -0-^yS0H2CHC^9 Τ-57 C«3 ν、ν "°Vc^(t) Τ-5 8 Τ-5 9 Τ-60 % αι3 -咖公叫-000^ ' ch3 ^-NH-C-NH-^ CH3 ch3 τ—61 Τ —62 Τ —63 Τ —64 Τ —65 -COO(CHj)20(CH2)2OCjHs _CO〇d) -C0NHS02CH3 —CONHpH2OCH3 -COWUCHjj^OC^ % T-6 6 T-6 7 T-68 T-69 T — 70 -CON (CHP,0CH3 -C0NHCH(CH2)3(MCH3 -〇〇〇〇^5 (CHp^ GH3 CHjCl T-4 8 T-4 9 T-5 0 T-5 1 -〇^3·δ02°Η3 -0-O"S03K _〇O"S〇2NH2 201006895 T-52 _0 "〇-δ〇Α Τ-56 -Ο '-〇-so; +ΗΗ Τ-5 3 Τ 54 54 Τ-5 5 外(四) t-^J)-C0N*C^7(iso) -0-^yS0H2CHC^9 Τ-57 C«3 ν, ν "°Vc^(t) Τ-5 8 Τ-5 9 Τ-60 % αι3 - 咖公叫-000^ ' ch3 ^-NH-C-NH-^ CH3 ch3 τ-61 Τ —62 Τ —63 Τ —64 Τ —65 —COO(CHj)20(CH2)2OCjHs _CO〇d) -C0NHS02CH3 —CONHpH2OCH3 -COWUCHjj^OC^ % T-6 6 T-6 7 T-68 T-69 T — 70 -CON (CHP,0CH3 -C0NHCH(CH2)3(MCH3 -〇〇〇〇^5 (CHp^ GH3 CHj
-coShQ-coShQ
T-7 1 一 COf (CHj)30H (CHPaOHT-7 1 - COf (CHj)30H (CHPaOH
T-7 2 T-73 T一74 -NHC^ -NHCCH^OH e T-78 T-79 T-80 a 〇 ^CH2 h -NHS0zCH3 一 n *-75 -76T-7 2 T-73 T-74 -NHC^ -NHCCH^OH e T-78 T-79 T-80 a 〇 ^CH2 h -NHS0zCH3 a n *-75 -76
-SCH3 T-7 7 0 T-84 -S〇2CH3 T-8 8 T-89 T-90 —SO^^iJ^SOjNa -SO^CHPjSOjNiCHjCH^jOCHPj ~S〇2CH2-CHC4H, T —91 T-9 2 T —93 T-9 4 -SOjCCHPjOiCHjP^KCH^OCHj —S02(CH2)jC00H -SOjtCHPjCOOCHj -S〇2«ay 2C00CH2^HC^, 〇2«5 T-9 5 T-96 T-97 —SOjCCH^SOjNHCHCHjOCHj -SOjCCHj) 380^(^3()0,¾ -S02(CH2) 380^((^2)300^ -nso2ch3 —(KCH^OGH 〇y 「 T-8 5 T —86 丁一87 ——SO^CHp^iGHj)^ —S02(<M^JSm(W^QC^ ❹ T一9 8 —so2-^hcon (α^οο/τ) 2 ch3-SCH3 T-7 7 0 T-84 -S〇2CH3 T-8 8 T-89 T-90 —SO^^iJ^SOjNa -SO^CHPjSOjNiCHjCH^jOCHPj ~S〇2CH2-CHC4H, T —91 T-9 2 T —93 T-9 4 -SOjCCHPjOiCHjP^KCH^OCHj —S02(CH2)jC00H -SOjtCHPjCOOCHj -S〇2«ay 2C00CH2^HC^, 〇2«5 T-9 5 T-96 T-97 —SOjCCH^ SOjNHCHCHjOCHj -SOjCCHj) 380^(^3()0,3⁄4 -S02(CH2) 380^((^2)300^ -nso2ch3 —(KCH^OGH 〇y "T-8 5 T -86 Dingyi 87 - SO^CHp^iGHj)^ —S02(<M^JSm(W^QC^ ❹ T_9 8 —so2-^hcon (α^οο/τ) 2 ch3
T-9 9 —SOjNHCOCH '3 -100 -gowso2gh3T-9 9 —SOjNHCOCH '3 -100 -gowso2gh3
IS 46 201006895 ❹IS 46 201006895 ❹
Τ-1 01 T-102 T-103 T-104 T-106 -SOjGyjHjCWjHg -SOJHCOOCA -SO,IΤ-1 01 T-102 T-103 T-104 T-106 -SOjGyjHjCWjHg -SOJHCOOCA -SO,I
02CHGOOGHGH, —SO^HCOyC^s CH3 T-107 T-108 T-109 S〇2GHfC¥« -SOrQ' -S〇i〇CH, -SO,- T-1 0602CHGOOGHGH, —SO^HCOyC^s CH3 T-107 T-108 T-109 S〇2GHfC¥« -SOrQ' -S〇i〇CH, -SO,- T-1 06
OH T-1 1 1 GOQH T-1 1 5 110OH T-1 1 1 GOQH T-1 1 5 110
112 -sor T-1 2 0 T-1 2 1 -SOjNHj -SOjNHCjHj T-113 T-114€H9 - ®〜 CH. T-116 T-117 -SOjl112 -sor T-1 2 0 T-1 2 1 -SOjNHj -SOjNHCjHj T-113 T-114€H9 - ®~ CH. T-116 T-117 -SOjl
SOjK T-1 1 8SOjK T-1 1 8
-SO^ttKCHPaPCHj -SOjNHCCHPjOCHj NHpH^OCK, C«s T-1 25 T-1 26 T-1 27 . T-1 2 8 9Λ T-1 29-SO^ttKCHPaPCHj -SOjNHCCHPjOCHj NHpH^OCK, C«s T-1 25 T-1 26 T-1 27 . T-1 2 8 9Λ T-1 29
-斯仏一SOfWdOCH, —$0#叫风 一《VWCHipA CA (〇g 丨OCH, CjHs CHj CH, 130 t 31 -SO^CHCH, 1 32 •133 T-1 34 τ-1 35 ^(CHPjDCCH^jOC^ -SO?N^) -COH^O —00,^1 -劝和 τ-1 36 ο -~S. /~\ -so5h-n ο —S(yi ο-斯仏一 SOfWdOCH, —$0#叫风一“VWCHipA CA (〇g 丨OCH, CjHs CHj CH, 130 t 31 -SO^CHCH, 1 32 •133 T-1 34 τ-1 35 ^(CHPjDCCH^jOC ^ -SO?N^) -COH^O —00,^1 - persuade and τ-1 36 ο -~S. /~\ -so5h-n ο —S(yi ο
-137•SOJ Γ-1 38 —δ02-(€Η^· Τ-130 τ-140 Τ_Ί 41 一 ίη- + 沪 Η 一 % +Sh -so, νη,-C-W, -so- ^c^oo, 〇»νη·5·νη々 GHj 0¾ 接著’說明通式(Β)所表示之酞菁系色素的較佳範圍。 上述通式(Β)所表示之酞菁系色素係α位的取代物(α 取代物)在(R1〇l 與 R104)、(R105 與 R108)、(R109 與 R112)、 及(R 11 3與R 1 1 6)的組合之至少1組中具有取代基、或/3位f· -47 - 201006895 的取代物(办取代物)在(尺1〇2與r103}、(r106與r107)、(Rii〇 與R111 )、及(R114與R115)的組合之至少1組中具有取代 - 基’或α位、及冷位的取代物在(Ri〇i與ri〇3及/或Rl〇2 與 R104)、(R105 與 及 /或以06與 r1〇8)、(尺1〇9與 R111 及 / 或 RHO 與 RH2)、及(1^113與 R115 及 /或尺114與 R116) 的組合之中至少1組具有取代基爲佳。 在此,上述R101~R116所表示之取代基係可舉例如鹵素 原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、矽烷基、羥基、羧基、 氰基、硝基、烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、矽烷氧基、酿 @ 氧基、烷氧基羰氧基、芳氧基羰氧基、胺甲醯氧基、胺磺 醯氧基、烷基磺醯氧基、芳基磺醯氧基、醯基、烷氧基幾 基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、雜環胺基、胺基、苯胺基、 碳醯胺基、脲基、醯亞胺基、烷氧基羰基胺基、芳氧基羰 基胺基、胺磺醯基、胺磺醯基胺基、偶氮基、烷硫基、芳 硫基、雜環硫基、烷基亞磺醯基、芳基亞磺醯基、烷基磺 醯基、芳基磺醯基、胺磺醯基、磺酸基、磺醯基、膦基胺 基。M2 係可舉例如 Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、Pt、Pd、Mo、-137•SOJ Γ-1 38 —δ02-(€Η^· Τ-130 τ-140 Τ_Ί 41 aίη- + Η Η 1% +Sh -so, νη,-CW, -so- ^c^oo, 〇»νη·5·νη々GHj 03⁄4 Next, a preferred range of the phthalocyanine-based dye represented by the formula (Β) is shown. The phthalocyanine-based pigment represented by the above formula (Β) is a substitute for the α-position ( The α-substituent) has a substituent, or /3, in at least one of (R1〇l and R104), (R105 and R108), (R109 and R112), and (R11 3 and R 1 16) At least one group of the combination of (f) 1〇2 and r103}, (r106 and r107), (Rii〇 and R111), and (R114 and R115) Substituents having a substitution-group' or alpha position, and a cold position are (Ri〇i and ri〇3 and/or Rl〇2 and R104), (R105 and/or with 06 and r1〇8), It is preferable that at least one of the combination of the ruler 1〇9 and R111 and/or RHO and RH2), and (1^113 and R115 and/or the ruler 114 and R116) has a substituent. Here, the above R101 to R116 The substituent represented by the halogen group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, and an anthracene Base, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, nitro, alkoxy, aryloxy, heterocyclooxy, nonyloxy, aryloxy, alkoxycarbonyloxy, aryloxycarbonyloxy, amine Alkoxy, acesulfonyloxy, alkylsulfonyloxy, arylsulfonyloxy, fluorenyl, alkoxy, aryloxycarbonyl, aminemethanyl, heterocyclic amine, amine , anilino, carboguanamine, ureido, oxime imido, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, amidoxime, amine sulfonylamino, azo, alkylthio , arylthio, heterocyclic thio, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, aminesulfonyl, sulfonate, sulfonyl, phosphine The amino group. The M2 system may, for example, be Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo,
Mn、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、Fe、TiO、VO 等。 上述通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素的較佳範圍係爲 a 取代物(單取代物)在(Ri〇i或R104)、(R1Q5或R108)、(R109 或R112)、及(R113或Rii6)之中的至少一個具有取代基,或 泠取代物(單取代物)在(R102或1?1〇3}、(1^1〇6或1^1〇7)、(1?11〇 或RU1)、及(R114或R11S)之中的至少一個具有取代基之化 合物。 1 -48 - 201006895 在此,上述RiQi~Ri16所表示之取代基係較佳可舉例如 鹵素原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、矽烷基、羥基、 羧基、氰基、硝基、烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、醯氧基、 胺甲醯氧基、醯基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、 胺基、苯胺基、碳醯胺基、脲基、醯亞胺基、烷氧基羰基 胺基、芳氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、胺磺醯基胺基、偶氮 基、烷硫基、芳硫基、雜環硫基、烷基亞磺醯基、芳基亞 磺醯基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、胺磺醯基、磺酸基、 ©膦基胺基。M2係可舉例如Zn、Pd、Cu、Ni、Co、TiO、 VO等。 上述通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素的更佳範圍係爲 α 取代物在(R101 或 R104)、(R105 或 R108)、(Ri〇9 或 Rii2)、 及(Rii3或Rii”之中的至少3個具有取代基,或々取代物 在(Rl〇2 或 R103)、旧1〇6或 R107)、(R110 或 R111)、及(尺114 或R115)之中的至少3個具有取代基之化合物。 在此,上述所表示之取代基係較佳可舉例如 ©鹵素原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、羥基、羧基、氰 基、硝基、烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、酿基、烷氧基羰 基、胺甲醯基、胺基、苯胺基、碳醯胺基、脲基、醯亞胺 基、烷氧基羰基胺基、芳氧基羰基胺基、胺磺醯基、胺磺 醯基胺基、偶氮基、烷基亞磺醯基、芳基亞磺醯基、烷基 磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、胺磺醯基、磺酸基。M2係可舉例如 Zn、Pd、Cu、Ni、Co、VO 等。 上述通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素的更佳範圍係爲 α -49 201006895 取代物在(R1 ◦ 1 或 R10 4)、(R1 ◦5 或 R10 8)、(R10 9 或 R112)、 及(R113或Ri16)之中的至少3個具有相同的取代基,或冷 取代物在(尺1(32或 Rl03)、(尺106或 R107)、(R11〇 或 R111)、 及(Rii4或Ri15)之中的至少3個具有相同的取代基之化合 物。 在此,上述R1G1~R116所表示之取代基係較佳可舉例如 鹵素原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、雜環基、羧基、氰基、烷 氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、醯基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、 碳醯胺基、脲基、醯亞胺基、胺磺醯基、烷基亞磺醯基、 芳基亞磺醯基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、胺磺醯基、磺 酸基。M2係可舉例如Zn、Pd、Cu、Ni、Co、或VO等。 上述通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素的特佳範圍係爲 α 取代物在(R101 或 R104)、(R105 或 R108}、(R109 或 R112)、 及(Rii3或Ri16)之中的至少3個具有取代基,或点取代物 在(Rl〇2 或 R103)、旧1〇6或 R107)、(R110 或 R111)、及(尺114 或R115)之中的至少3個具有取代基,其取代基係爲全部相 同的化合物。 在此,上述所表示之取代基較佳係可舉例如 鹵素原子、院基、雜環基、翔基、氰基、院氧基、芳氧基、 雜環氧基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺 醯基、胺磺醯基、或磺酸基。M2係可舉例如Zn、Pd、Cu、 Ni、Co、或 VO 等。 上述通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素的最佳範圍係爲 α 取代物在(R101 或 R104)、(R105 或 RIO”、(R109 或 R112)、 201006895 及(Rii3或R116)之中的至少3個具有取代基,或々取代物 在(R 1 〇 2 或 R 10 3)、( R 1 0 6 或 R10 7)、( R 11 0 或 R1 Η )、及(R114 " 或R115)之中的至少3個具有取代基,其取代基係爲全部相 同的化合物,該R1()1~R116所表示之取代基係可舉例如鹵素 原子、烷基、雜環基、羧基、烷氧基、芳氧基、雜環氧基、 烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醢基、胺磺 醯基、或磺酸基。M2係可舉例如Zn等。 以下,表示通式(A)所表示之四氮卟吩系氰基色素(包含 β通式(B)所表示之酞菁系色素)的具體例。但是,在本發明係 不受限於此等。Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, TiO, VO, and the like. The preferred range of the phthalocyanine dye represented by the above formula (B) is that the a substituent (monosubstituted) is (Ri〇i or R104), (R1Q5 or R108), (R109 or R112), and At least one of R113 or Rii6) has a substituent, or a hydrazine substituent (monosubstituted) at (R102 or 1?1〇3}, (1^1〇6 or 1^1〇7), (1? The compound represented by the above-mentioned RiQi to Ri16 is preferably a halogen atom or an alkane, and the substituent represented by the above-mentioned RiQi to Ri16 is preferably a halogen atom or an alkane. Base, alkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic, decyl, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, nitro, alkoxy, aryloxy, heterocyclic oxy, decyloxy, amine methyl methoxy, fluorenyl , alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, amine mercapto, amine, anilino, carboguanamine, ureido, oxime imido, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, amine Sulfonyl, sulfonylamino, azo, alkylthio, arylthio, heterocyclic thio, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, aryl Sulfonyl, sulfonyl, sulfonic acid The phosphine-based group may be, for example, Zn, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, VO, etc. The more preferable range of the phthalocyanine-based dye represented by the above formula (B) is an α-substituent. At least 3 of (R101 or R104), (R105 or R108), (Ri〇9 or Rii2), and (Rii3 or Rii) have a substituent, or a ruthenium substitution is at (Rl〇2 or R103), A compound having at least three substituents of the former 1 or 6 or R107), (R110 or R111), and (foot 114 or R115). Here, the substituent represented by the above may preferably be, for example, halogen. Atom, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, nitro, alkoxy, aryloxy, heterocyclooxy, aryl, alkoxycarbonyl, amidyl , an amine group, an anilino group, a carboguanamine group, a ureido group, a quinone imine group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, an amine sulfonyl group, an amine sulfonylamino group, an azo group, An alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, an aminesulfonyl group, or a sulfonic acid group. Examples of the M2 system include Zn, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, VO, etc. The above formula (B a better range of the phthalocyanine dye represented by α -49 201006895 Substituent at (R1 ◦ 1 or R10 4), (R1 ◦5 or R10 8), (R10 9 or R112), and (R113 or At least three of Ri16) have the same substituent, or a cold substitute is among (foot 1 (32 or R10), (foot 106 or R107), (R11〇 or R111), and (Rii4 or Ri15) At least 3 compounds having the same substituent. Here, the substituent represented by the above R1G1 to R116 is preferably, for example, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group or a heteroepoxy group. Base, mercapto group, alkoxycarbonyl group, amine mercapto group, carboguanamine group, urea group, quinone imine group, amine sulfonyl group, alkyl sulfinyl group, aryl sulfinyl group, alkyl sulfonate Anthracenyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonyl, sulfonate. The M2 system may, for example, be Zn, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, or VO. A particularly preferable range of the phthalocyanine-based dye represented by the above formula (B) is that the α-substituent is among (R101 or R104), (R105 or R108}, (R109 or R112), and (Rii3 or Ri16). At least 3 substituents, or at least 3 substituents having a substituent at (R1〇2 or R103), old 1〇6 or R107), (R110 or R111), and (foot 114 or R115) have a substituent The substituents are all the same compounds. Here, the substituent represented by the above may preferably be, for example, a halogen atom, a group, a heterocyclic group, a sulfhydryl group, a cyano group, an aristocratic group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an amine. A decyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, an amine sulfonyl group, or a sulfonic acid group. The M2 system may, for example, be Zn, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, or VO. The optimum range of the phthalocyanine-based dye represented by the above formula (B) is that the α-substituent is among (R101 or R104), (R105 or RIO", (R109 or R112), 201006895 and (Rii3 or R116). At least 3 of which have a substituent, or a hydrazine substituent at (R 1 〇2 or R 10 3), (R 1 0 6 or R10 7), (R 11 0 or R1 Η ), and (R114 " or R115 At least three of the substituents have a substituent, and the substituents are all the same compounds, and the substituent represented by R1()1 to R116 may, for example, be a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a heterocyclic group, a carboxyl group or an alkane. An oxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amine carbaryl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, an amine sulfonyl group, or a sulfonic acid group. The M2 system may, for example, be Zn. The following is a specific example of the tetrazolium-based cyano dye represented by the general formula (A) (including the phthalocyanine-based dye represented by the general formula (B)). However, the present invention is not limited. This is the case.
-51 201006895-51 201006895
化合物號碼 Ra Rb 化合物號碼 R a Rb CA— 1 T- 1 4 T-l 4 CA-2 T-l 4 丁…1 5 CA—3 T一 1 4 T-8 8 CA-4 T-l 4 T-9 9 C A—5 T-l 4 T- 1 4 I C A— 6 T-4 6 T-4 6 CA«7 T-4 6 T-4 9 CA-8 T-4 θ T—5 6 CA-9 T —8 9 T-8 9 CA- 1 0 T-8 9 T-8 S CA- 1 1 T-8 9 T-9 9 CA- 1 2 T-8 9 T- 1 4 1 CA— 1 3 T—9 5 T-9 5 CA- 1 4 T-9 5 T—8 8 C A一 I 5 T-9 5 T-l 1 2 C A— 1 6 T-9 S T~ 1 5 CA- I 7 T-9 5 T-l 1 4 CA-1 8 T-9 5 T— 1 3 4 C A— 1 9 T-9 5 T-l 4 1 CA-2 0 T-9 6 τ- 9 6 CA— 2 1 T-9 6 t-s a CA-2 2 T-9 6 T-9 9 CA-23 T _ 9 6 T-l 1 2 CA—24 T-9 6 T-l 34 CA-2 5 T-9 6 T- 1 3 5 CA-2 6 T-9 6 T- 1 4 1 CA-2 7 T-9 7 T-9 7 CA- 2 8 T- 9 7 T— 1 5 CA- 2 9 T-9 7 T™ 8 8 CA- 3 0 T-9 7 T-99 CA- 3 1 T-9 7 T- l 1 2 CA-3 2 T-9 7 T-l 2 0 CA- 3 3 T-9 7 X— 13 4 C A™ 3 4 T-9 7 T-l 4 1 C A— 3 5 T- 1 1 5 T- Ϊ 1 5 CA-3 6 T-l 1 5 T-l 1 2 CA- 3 7 T-l 1 5 T- I 1 8 CA— 3 8 τ-11 s T-l 34 C A- 3 9 T-l 1 5 T— 14 1 CA-40 T- 1 1 6 T- 1 1 6 C A*™ 4 1 T_ 1 1 6 T_ 1 1 2 CA — 42 T- 1 1 6 T - 1 3 4 C A-4 3 T- 116 T- Ϊ 4 1 CA-44 T- X 3 0 T - 1 3 0 CA〜4 5 T-l 30 T- 1 3 4 CA-4 6 T— 1 3 0 T- 1 4 1Compound number Ra Rb Compound number R a Rb CA-1 T-1 4 Tl 4 CA-2 Tl 4 D...1 5 CA-3 T-1 4 T-8 8 CA-4 Tl 4 T-9 9 CA-5 Tl 4 T- 1 4 ICA— 6 T-4 6 T-4 6 CA«7 T-4 6 T-4 9 CA-8 T-4 θ T—5 6 CA-9 T —8 9 T-8 9 CA-1 0 T-8 9 T-8 S CA- 1 1 T-8 9 T-9 9 CA- 1 2 T-8 9 T- 1 4 1 CA— 1 3 T—9 5 T-9 5 CA - 1 4 T-9 5 T-8 8 CA-I 5 T-9 5 Tl 1 2 CA-1 6 T-9 ST~ 1 5 CA- I 7 T-9 5 Tl 1 4 CA-1 8 T- 9 5 T— 1 3 4 CA— 1 9 T-9 5 Tl 4 1 CA-2 0 T-9 6 τ- 9 6 CA— 2 1 T-9 6 ts a CA-2 2 T-9 6 T- 9 9 CA-23 T _ 9 6 Tl 1 2 CA—24 T-9 6 Tl 34 CA-2 5 T-9 6 T- 1 3 5 CA-2 6 T-9 6 T- 1 4 1 CA-2 7 T-9 7 T-9 7 CA- 2 8 T- 9 7 T— 1 5 CA- 2 9 T-9 7 TTM 8 8 CA- 3 0 T-9 7 T-99 CA- 3 1 T- 9 7 T- l 1 2 CA-3 2 T-9 7 Tl 2 0 CA- 3 3 T-9 7 X— 13 4 CATM 3 4 T-9 7 Tl 4 1 CA— 3 5 T- 1 1 5 T- Ϊ 1 5 CA-3 6 Tl 1 5 Tl 1 2 CA- 3 7 Tl 1 5 T- I 1 8 CA— 3 8 τ-11 s Tl 34 C A- 3 9 Tl 1 5 T— 14 1 CA -40 T- 1 1 6 T- 1 1 6 CA*TM 4 1 T_ 1 1 6 T_ 1 1 2 CA — 42 T- 1 1 6 T - 1 3 4 C A-4 3 T- 116 T- Ϊ 4 1 CA-44 T- X 3 0 T - 1 3 0 CA~4 5 Tl 30 T - 1 3 4 CA-4 6 T— 1 3 0 T- 1 4 1
-52- 201006895-52- 201006895
化合物號碼 Ra Rb 化合物號碼 R a Rb CB —1 T一 1 4 T-1 4 CB-2 T-1 4 T-1 5 CB- 3 T- 1 4 T ™ 8 8 CB-4 T— l 4 T-9 9 CB — 5 T— 1 4 T-1 4 1 CB-6 T-4 6 T-46 CB-7 T-4 6 T-4 9 CB-8 T-4 6 T™ 5 6 CB-9 T-8 9 T-8 9 CB- 1 0 T-8 9 T-8 8 CB—1 1 T-8 9 T-9 9 CB- 1 2 T-8 9 T- 1 4 1 CB- 1 3 T—9 5 T-9 5 CB- 1 4 T-9 5 T—8 8 CB- 1 5 T-9 5 T- 1 1 2 CB- 1 6 T-9 5 T-1 5 CB- 1 7 T- 9 5 T-1 1 4 CB- 1 8 T-9 5 T- 1 3 4 CB- 1 9 T-9 5 T- 1 4 1 CB-20 T-9 6 T-9 6 CB-2 1 T-9 6 T一 8 8 CB-2 2 T-9 6 T-9 9 CB—2 3 T-9 6 T-1 1 2 CB-24 T-9 6 T-1 3 4 C B — 2 5 T—96 T— 1 3 5 CB-2 6 T-9 6 T- 14 1 CB-27 T —9 7 T—9 7 CB-28 T™9 7 T-1 5 CB-2 9 T —9 7 T-8 8 CB — 30 T-9 7 T-9 9 CB — 3 1 T-9 7 T-1 1 2 CB-3 2 T-9 7 T—1 2 0 CB-3 3 T-9 7 T-1 34 CB-34 T-9 7 T-1 4 1 CB-3 5 T一 1 1 5 T-1 1 5 CB-3 6 T-1 1 5 T— 1 1 2 CB-3 7 τ-1 1 5 T-1 1 8 CB-3 8 T- 1 1 5 T-1 34 CB —3 9 T—1 1 5 T-1 4 1 CB-40 T-1 16 T- 1 1 6 CB-4 1 T- 1 1 6 T-1 1 2 CB-4 2 T-1 1 6 T-1 3 4 CB-4 3 T - 1 1 6 T-1 4 1 CB-4 4 T~1 3 0 T- 1 3 0 CB-4 5 T- 1 3 0 T—1 3 4 C B ™ 4 6 T — 1 3 0 T- 1 4 1 '•K ri.Compound Number Ra Rb Compound Number R a Rb CB —1 T -1 4 T-1 4 CB-2 T-1 4 T-1 5 CB- 3 T- 1 4 T TM 8 8 CB-4 T— l 4 T -9 9 CB — 5 T— 1 4 T-1 4 1 CB-6 T-4 6 T-46 CB-7 T-4 6 T-4 9 CB-8 T-4 6 TTM 5 6 CB-9 T-8 9 T-8 9 CB- 1 0 T-8 9 T-8 8 CB-1 1 T-8 9 T-9 9 CB- 1 2 T-8 9 T- 1 4 1 CB- 1 3 T —9 5 T-9 5 CB- 1 4 T-9 5 T—8 8 CB- 1 5 T-9 5 T- 1 1 2 CB- 1 6 T-9 5 T-1 5 CB- 1 7 T- 9 5 T-1 1 4 CB- 1 8 T-9 5 T- 1 3 4 CB- 1 9 T-9 5 T- 1 4 1 CB-20 T-9 6 T-9 6 CB-2 1 T- 9 6 T-8 8 CB-2 2 T-9 6 T-9 9 CB-2 T-9 6 T-1 1 2 CB-24 T-9 6 T-1 3 4 CB — 2 5 T-96 T-1 3 5 CB-2 6 T-9 6 T- 14 1 CB-27 T —9 7 T—9 7 CB-28 TTM9 7 T-1 5 CB-2 9 T —9 7 T-8 8 CB — 30 T-9 7 T-9 9 CB — 3 1 T-9 7 T-1 1 2 CB-3 2 T-9 7 T—1 2 0 CB-3 3 T-9 7 T-1 34 CB-34 T-9 7 T-1 4 1 CB-3 5 T-1 1 5 T-1 1 5 CB-3 6 T-1 1 5 T-1 1 2 CB-3 7 τ-1 1 5 T -1 1 8 CB-3 8 T- 1 1 5 T-1 34 CB —3 9 T—1 1 5 T-1 4 1 CB-40 T-1 16 T- 1 1 6 CB-4 1 T- 1 1 6 T-1 1 2 CB-4 2 T-1 1 6 T-1 3 4 CB-4 3 T - 1 1 6 T-1 4 1 CB-4 4 T~1 3 0 T- 1 3 0 CB-4 5 T- 1 3 0 T-1 3 4 CB TM 4 6 T — 1 3 0 T- 1 4 1 '•K ri.
-53 201006895-53 201006895
化合物號碼 Ra 化合物號碼 Ra 化合物號碼 Ra CC— 1 T一 1 4 CC_2 T-4 6 CC- 3 T-8 9 CC-4 T-8 9 CC —5 T一 9 5 CC一 6 T- 9 6 CC- 7 T-9 7 CC-8 T-l 1 5 CC-9 T- 1 1 6 cc-i 0 T-l 30 化合物號碼 Ra Rb Ma CK- 1 T-l 4 T— 1 5 Zn CK-2 T-l 4 T- 1 5 Co CK-3 T-l 4 T- 1 s v=o CK—4 T-l 4 T- 1 5 Pd CK-5 T-l 4 T- 1 3 4 Zn CK-6 T- 1 4 T-l 34 C o CK-7 T-l 4 T- 1 4 1 Zn CK—8 T-4 6 T-l 1 2 Z n CK-9 T-4 6 T- 1 3 4 v=o CK一 1 0 T— 4 6 T- 1 4 1 v=o CK- 1 I T-9 5 T- 1 1 2 Zn CK- 1 2 T-9 6 T-8 8 Zn CK- 1 3 T — 9 6 T-l 1 2 Co CK- 1 4 T-9 6 T-l 3 4 v^o CK- I 5 T-9 6 T-l 4 1 P d CK- 1 6 T- 1 3 0 T-l 34 Z n CK— ί 7 T-l 3 0 T- 1 3 4 F e CK- 1 8 T-l 3 0 T-l 4 1 N i CK- I 9 T- 1 3 0 T-l 4 1 T iCompound number Ra Compound number Ra Compound number Ra CC-1 T-1 4 CC_2 T-4 6 CC- 3 T-8 9 CC-4 T-8 9 CC —5 T- 9 5 CC- 6 T- 9 6 CC - 7 T-9 7 CC-8 Tl 1 5 CC-9 T- 1 1 6 cc-i 0 Tl 30 Compound number Ra Rb Ma CK- 1 Tl 4 T— 1 5 Zn CK-2 Tl 4 T- 1 5 Co CK-3 Tl 4 T- 1 sv=o CK—4 Tl 4 T- 1 5 Pd CK-5 Tl 4 T- 1 3 4 Zn CK-6 T- 1 4 Tl 34 C o CK-7 Tl 4 T - 1 4 1 Zn CK—8 T-4 6 Tl 1 2 Z n CK-9 T-4 6 T- 1 3 4 v=o CK_1 0 T— 4 6 T- 1 4 1 v=o CK- 1 I T-9 5 T- 1 1 2 Zn CK- 1 2 T-9 6 T-8 8 Zn CK- 1 3 T — 9 6 Tl 1 2 Co CK- 1 4 T-9 6 Tl 3 4 v^ o CK- I 5 T-9 6 Tl 4 1 P d CK- 1 6 T- 1 3 0 Tl 34 Z n CK— ί 7 Tl 3 0 T- 1 3 4 F e CK- 1 8 Tl 3 0 Tl 4 1 N i CK- I 9 T- 1 3 0 Tl 4 1 T i
54 20100689554 201006895
混合物 化合物號碼 Ra Rb 化合物號碼 Ra Rb C I - 1 T-1 4 Τ-1 4 C I -2 T-1 4 T- 1 S C 1-3 T-1 4 Τ-8 8 C I «4 T_1 4 T-9 9 CI〜5 T-1 4 Τ_1 4 1 C I -6 T-4 6 T-4 6 C I -7 T-46 Τ_4 9 C I -8 T-4 6 T-5 6 C1 —9 T —89 Τ 一 89 C I -1 0 T-8 9 T-8 8 C卜1 1 T-8 9 Τ—9 9 CI-12 T-8 9 T-1 4 1 C I - 1 3 T-9 5 Τ_9 5 C I - 1 4 T-9 S T-8 8 C I ~ 1 5 T —9 5 Τ— 1 1 2 C I 一 1 6 T-9 5 T-1 5 C卜1 7 T-9 5 Τ一 1 1 4 C I -1 8 T-9 5 T-1 34 C I - 1 9 τ-9 5 Τ- 1 4 1 CI-20 T-9 6 Τ-θ 6 C I 一 2 1 Τ-96 Τ™* 8 8 C I -2 2 T-9 6 T-9 9 C I -2 3 Τ-96 Τ-1 1 2 C I - 2 4 T-9 6 T-1 3 4 C Ϊ 一 2 5 Τ- 9 β Τ一 1 3 5 CI-26 T-9 6 T-1 4 1 C I -2 7 Τ-9 7 Τ-9 7 CI-28 T- 9 7 T-1 5 C I -2 9 Τ-97 Τ—8 8 CI-30 T-9 7 T-9 9 C I - 3 1 Τ-9 7 Τ-1 1 2 C I -3 2 T-9 7 T-1 20 C I —3 3 Τ-9 7 τ-1 3 4 Cl 一 34 T-9 7 T-1 4 1 C I - 3 5 Τ — 1 1 5 τ-1 1 5 C 1-36 T-1 1 5 T- 112 C I -3 7 Τ- 1 1 5 Τ - 1 1 8 C I - 3 8 T- 1 1 5 T- 13 4 C I -3 9 Τ — 1 1 5 τ-1 4 1 C I -40 T- 1 1 6 T- 1 1 6 C I -4 1 Τ— 1 1 6 τ-1 1 2 Cl —42 T- 1 1 6 T- 1 3 4 C I -4 3 Τ- 1 1 6 Τ - 1 4 1 CI-44 T»1 30 T-1 30 C I 一4 5 Τ- 1 3 0 Τ— 1 3 4 C I - 4 6 T- 1 3 0 Τ- I 4 1 <合成例> 其次,就上述通式(A)或(B)所表示之色素的合成例,以 上述的例示化合物CI-29的合成爲一例參照下述流程圖 (scheme)D來進行詳述。 -5 5 - 201006895 <反應流程八> 50£-(εΗρ^0^3 S0Clz SO-CCH^^SO^CI rnrcH SO-CCH^SOjNHtCH^OC^ ίΧΐ 中離。 以c« 中雕A 中間Μ* ♦中間me * cc + W示色素c 1-29 (中間體A的合成) 在 3-硝基酞菁(25g、0.144mol)、DMSO(200ml)、3-氫硫基丙磺酸鈉鹽(32g、0.18mol)的混合物中加入碳酸鈉 Θ (16.5g、0.156mol),於60°C加熱並攪拌3小時。將反應 混合物注入於 10%食鹽水(30 Og)中,過濾萃取析出之固 體,以異丙醇/水(3/1)混合液加以洗淨。在這裡所取得之 固體中加入水(200ml)、乙酸(3ml)、Na2W〇4(2g),且添加 31%過氧化氫水(50ml)之後,於60°C加熱、攪拌。攪拌4 小時之後,過濾萃取反應混合物注入異丙醇(500 ml)中所析 出之固體後,以異丙醇/水(3/1)混合液洗淨。乾燥於此所 得到的固體’以得到中間體A24g(來自3-硝基酞菁的產率 ® 4 9%) » (中間體B的合成) 在中間體A67.3g(0.2mol)中加入乙腈200ml,於70 °C~75°C中進行加熱、攪拌。於該分散液中滴下三氯氧化磷 3 7 m卜滴下終了後,在70〇C ~75。。進行攪拌4小時後結束 反應。反應終了後,將反應液冷卻至室溫後,在水2〇〇 〇mi 中邊攪拌邊注入,使結晶析出。過濾、水洗該結晶後,使 ] -56 201006895 其分散於2-丙醇300ml中。攪拌該分散液1小時之後,進 行過濾、乾燥。得到中間體B爲63.0 g(產率:94.5%卜 ' (中間體C的合成) 在以上述方法所得之中間體B50.0g(〇. i5mol)中加入. 乙腈250ml,冷卻至5°C且攪拌。於該溶液中滴下3-乙氧 基丙基胺31.0g。滴下終了後,回復至室溫後進行攪拌2 小時,結束反應。將該反應液一邊攪拌、一邊注入至水 1500ml中,使結晶析出。過濾、水洗該結晶之後,使其分 ® 散於2-丙醇500ml中。在室溫下進行攪拌2小時後,過濾、 乾燥。以得到中間體C爲52.6 g(產率:87.7%)。 (CI_29的合成) 在以上述方法所得之中間體C7.99g(0.02mol)、〇 -酞 腈 1.28g(0.01mol)、與中間體 A3.36g(0.01mol)中,加入 二甘醇30ml、2-甲氧基丙醇100 ml,於100 °C中加熱、攪 拌。於該溶液添加安息香酸銨3.87g與乙酸銅1.2 6g。添 加終了後,在95°C ~ 100°C進行攪拌6小時,結束反應。冷 ®卻該反應液至室溫後添加甲醇60ml之後,一邊攪拌、一邊 注入至用水800ml稀釋鹽酸75ml之水溶液中。過濾析出 之結晶,且進行水洗、乾燥。將該結晶在甲醇2 5 0ml中進 行加熱溶解、過濾,以去除不溶物。在減壓下濃縮該過濾 液,於殘渣中添加乙酸乙酯250ml後攪拌。過濾分散之結 晶後乾燥。得到例示化合物CI-29爲24.7g(產率:92.9%)。 在氯仿中CI-29的最大吸收波長及莫耳吸光係數係分別爲 入 max = 6 6 5.6 n m、及 ε =84600。 201006895 所得到色素在乙酸乙酯中的極大吸收波長(λ max)及 莫耳吸光係數(ε )經分光光度計UV-2400PC(島津製作所 _ 公司製)進行測定時,最大吸收波長;I max、莫耳吸光係數 (εΗ系分另?!爲 623.4nm、 47000。 另外,就上述的色素CI-29以外之其他例示化合物, 亦可藉由與上述同様的方法來合成。 本發明中的特定色素-B之最大吸收波長λ max係從色 純度提昇的觀點來看,以 580nm~700nm爲佳,以 600nm~680nm爲更佳。此外,最大吸收波長係利用分光 © 光度計UV-2400PC(島津製作所公司製}來測定。 含有上述特定色素-A、或特定色素-B之情形中噴墨用 印墨中的含量係因各自的莫耳吸光係數、所求得的分光特 性、膜厚等而不同,相對於本發明中噴墨用印墨的全固體 成分’以1質量。/。~ 8 0質量%爲佳,1 〇質量% ~ 7 0質量%爲 較佳。 特定色素-A、及特定色素-B係在本發明的噴墨用印墨 中’可分別單獨含有、亦可倂用2種以上來使用。 ® 又,爲了製作藍色濾光片陣列,較佳係混合亞甲基二 啦略系金屬錯合物化合物(包含上述特定金屬錯合物化合物 -I〜上述特定金屬錯合物化合物-IV)、與上述特定色素-A及 上述特定色素-B之至少一種來使用》 此時’各自的混合比率係因各自的莫耳吸光係數、所 求得的分光特性、膜厚等而不同,較佳係可以含有比(重量 比)在(亞甲基二吡略系金屬錯合物化合物的總含量特定 IS] 58 - 201006895 色素-A及特定色素-B的總含量)=20:1~1:20的範圍來使 用。較佳係在10:1-1:10的範圍來使用。 ' 上述的亞甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物係耐光性、 耐熱性,同時具有在使用於製造彩色濾光片時的洗淨、配 向膜的修復等中對於鹼性溶劑的耐性(耐鹼性)。又,該化合 物係抑制後述之聚合性單體的聚合反應的作用係非常少, 藉由施加比以往要小的熱、光能量,即可使聚合反應進行。 <溶劑> 本發明的噴墨用印墨係含有溶劑。溶劑若能滿足各成 分的溶解性、後述之溶媒的沸點的話,基本上沒有特別地 限制,特別是考慮到後述之黏結劑的溶解性、塗布性、安 全性而選擇爲佳。溶劑的具體例係可舉例如酯類,例如: 甲酸戊酯、乙酸異戊酯、丙酸丁酯、丁酸異丙酯、丁酸乙 酯、丁酸丁酯、烷基酯類、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯、羥乙酸 甲酯、羥乙酸乙酯、羥乙酸丁酯、甲氧基乙酸甲酯、甲氧 基乙酸乙酯、甲氧基乙酸丁酯、乙氧基乙酸甲酯、乙氧基 ®乙酸乙酯等;3-羥丙酸甲酯、3-羥丙酸乙酯等的3-羥丙酸 烷基酯類,例如:3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、3-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、 3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯等;2-羥丙酸甲酯、 2-羥丙酸乙酯、2-羥丙酸丙酯等的2-羥丙酸烷基酯類,例 如:2 -甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2 -甲氧基丙酸乙酯、2 -甲氧基丙 酸丙酯、2-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、2-氧基- 2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯、2-甲氧基-2-甲基 丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯等;丙酮酸甲酯、丙 -59 - 201006895 酮酸乙酯、丙酮酸丙酯、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乙醯乙酸乙酯、 2 -羥丁酸甲酯、2 -羥丁酸乙酯等;醚類,例如:二甘醇二 甲基醚、乙二醇單甲基醚、乙二醇單乙基醚、甲基溶纖劑 乙酸酯、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、二甘醇單甲基醚、二甘醇單 乙基醚、二甘醇單丁基醚、丙二醇甲基醚、丙二醇甲基醚 乙酸酯、丙二醇乙基醚乙酸酯、丙二醇丙基醚乙酸酯等; 酮類,例如:環己酮、2 -庚酮、3 -庚酮等;芳香族烴類, 例如:二甲苯等;二環己基甲基胺等係爲適宜。此等係可1 種或倂用2種以上使用也沒有關係。 © 本發明噴墨用印墨中的該溶劑之含量係相對於印墨全 量,以30-90質量%爲佳,50~90質量。/〇爲更佳。30質量 %以上時,打滴在1畫素内的印墨量係受到保持,且在畫素 内的印墨濕潤擴散係爲良好。又,在9 0質量%以下時,印 墨中形成機能膜(例如畫素等)用的溶劑以外之成分量係能 保持在規定量以上。據此,在形成彩色濾光片之情形中, 每1畫素的印墨必要量不會變得過多,例如在利用噴墨法 將印墨供給至以隔壁所區隔劃分的凹部之情形中,能抑制 Θ 從凹部的印墨溢出、或與鄰近畫素的混色發生。 本發明的噴墨用印墨係在印墨對於噴嘴的吐出性及對 於基板的濕潤性之點,上述的溶劑之中含有沸點高的溶劑 爲佳。低沸點的溶劑係由於即使在噴墨頭上亦迅速地蒸 發,所以容易引起在噴頭上的印墨黏度上升、固體含量的 析出等,且所伴隨的吐出性惡化情形增多。又,印墨彈著 於基板面而濕潤擴散基板面上之情形,於濕潤擴散邊緣的 1 -60 201006895 部分會因溶劑蒸發而引起印墨的黏度上升,且由於所謂閉 合(PINNING)的現象而會有濕潤擴散受到抑制之情形。 ' 本發明中所使用之溶媒的沸點係以130~280°C爲佳。 比130 °C低時,從面内的畫素形狀的均一性之點而言會有 不佳的情形。比280°C高時,從藉由預烘烤而去除溶媒之 點而言會有不佳的情形。此外,溶媒的沸點係意味著在壓 力latm下的沸點,可由化合物辭典(Chapman & Hall公 司)等的物性値表得知。此等係可1種或倂用2種以上使用。 〇 此外,上述的噴墨用印墨不含有後述之聚合性單體等 的情形下,由於去除印墨中所含有的溶劑所得到之印墨殘 餘部分(色畫素)的厚度變薄,可減低以防止混色等爲目的形 成於基板上之隔壁的高度,從成本·生產性之面而言爲佳。 <聚合性單體> 本發明的噴墨用印墨亦可含有聚合性單體。添加聚合 性單體係可提昇印墨液滴與基板的黏附性。此外,能期待 上述各通式所示之化合物在印墨中的分散均一性的提昇、 ®或耐候性、耐熱性等的堅牢性的提昇。該聚合性單體係沒 有特別地限制,從各種取代基的變化(variation)多、容易 入手之點而言,較佳係含有由(甲基)丙烯酸系單體、乙氧基 系單體、及氧雜環丁烷基系單體所選擇之1種以上》 聚合性單體較佳係具有2個以上聚合性基之單體(以 下’亦稱爲「2官能以上的單體」)。聚合性單體若可藉由 活性能量線及/或熱而進行聚合反應的話,沒有特別地限 制’從膜的強度、耐溶劑性等的點而言,較佳係具有3個 201006895 以上聚合性基之單體(以下,亦稱爲「3官能以上的單體」)。 上述之聚合性基的種類係沒有特別地限制,如上所 - 述,特佳爲丙烯醯氧基、甲基丙烯醯氧基、環氧基、氧雜 環丁烷基。聚合性單體的具體例係可舉例如特開 200卜350012號公報的段落號碼[0061]~[0065】中記載的 含有環氧基之單體、特開2002-371216號公報的段落號碼 [〇〇1 6]中記載的丙烯酸酯單體及甲基丙烯酸酯單體、特開 2001-220526號公報、特開2 0 0 1 - 3 1 0 9 3 7號公報、特開 2003- 341217號公報的段落號碼[0 0 2 1卜[0 0 8 4】及特開 _ 2004- 91556號公報的段落號碼[0022卜[0058]等中記載的 氧雜環丁烷基含有單體、以及CMC出版「反應性單體的市 場展望」中記載的單體等。 又,(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之丙烯酸酯單體及甲基丙烯酸 酯單體係可舉例如聚乙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇單 (甲基)丙烯酸酯、苯氧基乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的單官能之 丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯、或聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、 三羥甲基乙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸 〇 酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙 烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基) 丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、己二醇(甲基}丙 烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯基羥丙基)醚、三(丙烯醯 氧基乙基)異三聚氰酸酯等的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯、或 丙三醇或三羥甲基乙烷等的多官能醇上附加環氧乙烷或環 氧丙烷之後進行(甲基)丙烯酸酯化所得到的三羥甲基丙烷 IS 1 -62 - 201006895 p〇 (環氧丙烷)變性三(甲基)丙烯酸酯或三羥甲基丙烷 EO (環氧乙烷)變性三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、己內酯變性二季戊四 ’ 醇六丙烯酸酯、特公昭48-41708號、特公昭50-6034號、 特開昭51-37193號的各公報中記載的胺基甲酸酯丙烯酸 酯類、特開昭48-64183號、特公昭49-43 1 9 1號、特公 昭52-30490號的各公報中記載的聚酯丙烯酸酯類、環氧 樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸的反應生成物之環氧丙烯酸酯類等的 多官能丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯、及此等之混合物。再者, ©又可舉例如日本黏著協會期刊Vol.20、No.7、第300~308 頁中介紹做爲光硬化性單體及低聚物者。較佳係適當組合 單管能單體、2官能單體、3官能以上的多官能單體、低聚 物以調整黏度。倂用單官能單體與2官能單體時,能得到 印墨的黏度下降、能防止噴嘴堵塞之效果。爲了補強膜的 強度、賦予與基板的黏合之故,亦可少量倂用於25°C的黏 度爲700mPa.s以上之高黏度的多官能單體或胺基甲酸酯 丙烯酸酯等的高極性單體、低聚物等也沒有關係。 又,氧雜環丁烷基系單體之氧雜環丁烷基含有單體係 可適當使用特開 2003-341217 號公報的段落號碼 [002 1]~ [0084]中記載的化合物。再者,亦可使用特開 2004-91556號公報的段落號碼[0022]~[0058]中記載的化 合物。 上述之聚合性單體的含量係在噴墨用印墨之固體成分 中爲30 ~ 80質量。/。爲佳,40 ~ 80質量。/。爲更佳。單體的使 用量若在上述範圍内,由於畫素部的聚合變得充分,所以 201006895 起因於畫素部的膜強度不足所致的傷痕發生係變得難以引 起。進而能得到於賦予透明導電膜之際裂紋或網狀結構係 變得難以發生,設置配向膜之際的耐溶劑性係爲提昇,且 電壓保持率不會降低等的效果。此處,所謂用以界定噴墨 用印墨之摻混比例的固體成分,係包含除了溶劑之全部成 分,液狀的聚合性單體等亦包含於固體成分內。 <黏結劑樹脂> 本發明的噴墨用印墨中以調整黏度或調整印墨硬度等 爲目的,亦可加入黏結劑用樹脂。黏結劑用樹脂係可使用 © 其本身僅由沒有聚合反應性之樹脂所構成的、只能進行乾 燥固化之黏結劑用樹脂。然而,爲了賦予塗工膜充分的強 度、耐久性、黏附性,較佳係使用利用噴墨法於基板上形 成畫素的圖案之後,藉由聚合反應該畫素而能硬化之黏結 劑用樹脂,例如可使用如藉由可見光線、紫外線、電子束 等能聚合硬化的光硬化性之黏結劑用樹脂,或藉由加熱能 聚合硬化的熱硬化性之黏結劑用樹脂般可聚合硬化之黏結 劑用樹脂。 Θ <聚合引發劑> 本發明的噴墨用印墨以促進聚合性單體及黏結劑用樹 脂的聚合反應爲目的話,亦可倂用聚合引發劑。聚合引發 劑係可配合噴墨用印墨中所使用的聚合性單體及黏結劑的 種類、聚合路徑來選擇。利用活性能量線進行聚合反應之 情形中使用光聚合引發劑,利用熱進行聚合反應之情形中 使用熱聚合引發劑。光聚合引發劑係可舉例如由鹵甲基噚 64 - 201006895 二唑系化合物及鹵甲基-S-三哄系化合物所選出之至少一個 活性鹵素化合物、3-芳基取代香豆素化合物、洛芬碱聚 ' 物、二苯基酮化合物、苯乙酮化合物及其衍生物、環戊二 烯-苯-鐵錯合物及其鹽、肟系化合物等。 又,熱聚合引發劑係可使用一般已知的有機過氧化物 系化合物、偶氮系的化合物。 上述之聚合引發劑的含量係相對於噴墨用印墨中的全 固體成分,以0.0 1~50質量%爲佳,更佳爲1~30質量。/。。 β含量在上述的範圍内,則可形成更良好的感度與堅固的硬 化部。又,上述使酸發生的化合物係可1種或混合2種以 上使用。 <硬化劑> 乙氧基系單體(乙氧基含有單體)、熱硬化性黏結劑用樹 脂中,通常亦可組合摻混硬化劑。硬化劑係可適當使用乙 氧基樹脂技術協會發行的「總說乙氧基樹脂基礎編I」2003 年11月19日發行、第3章中所記載之硬化劑、促進劑, ®例如可使用多元羧酸酐或多元羧酸。 <熱潜在性觸媒> 又,在本發明,於使用含有環氧基之單體、熱硬化性 黏結劑樹脂之情形中,爲了提昇印墨的硬度及耐熱性,亦 可添加能促進酸-環氧間之熱硬化反應的觸媒。該觸媒係可 使用於加熱硬化時顯示活性之熱潜在性觸媒。 <界面活性劑> 本發明的噴墨用印墨中係可更使用界面活性劑。界面 -65 201006895 活性劑的例子係可舉例如特開平7-2 16276號公報的段落 號碼[002 1]、或特開 2003-337424號公報、特開平 11-133600號公報中所揭示之界面活性劑爲適宜者。界面 - 活性劑的含量係相對於著色組成物全量爲5質量%以下爲 佳。 其他的添加劑係可舉例如特開2000-3 10706號公報 的段落號碼[0058卜[0 071]中所記載之其他的添加劑。 爲了調整本發明的噴墨用印墨之色調,亦可同時倂用 上述的亞甲基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物以及其他的著色 ® 劑。 本發明的噴墨用印墨之各成分的含量係以上述的亞甲 基二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物的含量爲1~ 20質量%爲佳, 5~15質量%爲更佳,溶媒的含量爲30-90質量%爲佳, 50~85質量%爲更佳,聚合性單體的含量爲5~50質量%爲 佳,7~30質量%爲更佳,界面活性劑的含量爲5質量%以 下爲佳,0.1 ~5質量%爲較佳。 <噴墨用印墨的製造方法> ¥ 本發明噴墨用印墨的製造中,係可應用眾所周知的噴 墨用印墨之製造方法。例如可在溶劑中溶解亞甲基二吡咯 系金屬錯合物化合物之後,使噴墨用印墨中必要的各成分 (例如,聚合性單體、黏結劑等)溶解以調製噴墨用印墨。 在製作單體液之際,所使用的原料對於溶劑的溶解性 爲低之情形中,在單體液不會引起聚合反應之範圍内,可 適宜進行加熱或超音波處理等的處理。 66 201006895 <噴墨用印墨的物性値> 本發明噴墨用印墨的物性値若爲在噴墨頭可吐出的範 ' 圍內的話,沒有特別地限制’惟吐出時的黏度從安定吐出 之觀點而言,以2~30mPa_s爲佳,2~20mPa’s爲更佳。 又,於裝置吐出之際’噴墨印墨的溫度係在20~80°C範圍 保持大致一定的溫度爲佳。將裝置的溫度設定爲高溫時, 印墨的黏度下降,且可能吐出更高黏度的印墨,且由於溫 度提髙之故,因熱所引起的印墨改質或熱聚合反應係在噴 ©頭内發生,且溶劑容易在吐出印墨之噴嘴表面蒸發,爲了 使得噴嘴堵塞難以發生,裝置的溫度較佳係在20 ~80°C的 範圍。 此外,黏度係在25 °C保持噴墨用印墨之狀態下,藉由 利用一般所使用的E型黏度計(例如,東機產業(股)製E型 黏度計(RE-80L)而測定之値。 又,噴墨用印墨在25°C的表面張力(靜態表面張力), 從提昇對於非浸透性之基板的濕潤性、吐出安定性之點而 言,以20~40mN/m爲佳,.20~35mN/m爲較佳。又,於 裝置吐出之際,噴墨用印墨的溫度係在20~80°C的範圍保 持約略一定的溫度爲佳,此時的表面張力較佳爲 20~4 0mN/m。爲了在規定的精度下保持噴墨用印墨於固定 的溫度,較佳係具備能根據印墨溫度檢測手段、印墨加熱 或冷却手段、檢測的印墨溫度來控制加熱或冷却之控制手 段。或者,較佳係亦可具有根據印墨溫度藉由控制對於吐 出印墨手段的施加能量,以減輕對於印墨物性變化的影響 -67 - 201006895 之手段》 上述的表面張力係利用一般所使用的表面張力計(例如, 協和界面科學(股)製、表面張力計 FACE SURFACE TENSIOMETERCBVB-A3 等},以威廉密(Wilhelmy)法在液 溫2 5°C、60%RH中所測定之値。 又,爲了在噴墨用印墨彈著於基板後能適當地保持濕 潤暈開的形狀,將彈著於基板後的噴墨用印墨之液體物性 保持在固定爲佳。爲此,基板及/或基板的附近保持在規定 溫度範圍内爲佳。或者,藉由將支持基板的台的熱容量增 © 大等,亦能有效地減低溫度變化的影響。 <彩色濾光片及其製法> 接著,參照圖面所示之較佳實施形態,就使用本發明 噴墨用印墨之彩色濾光片及其製法來詳細地說明。 本發明的彩色濾光片係以具備使用本發明的噴墨用印 墨且依照噴墨法而形成的色畫素來做爲特徴,亦即,係以 使用本發明的噴墨用印墨且依照噴墨法而製造來做爲特 徴。又,本發明的彩色濾光片之製法係以具有依照噴墨法 〇 將本發明的噴墨用印墨,供給至利用形成於基板上之隔壁 所圍繞的凹部內,以形成畫素之製程(以下,稱爲「畫素形 成製程」)爲特徴。較佳係畫素形成製程具有:依照噴墨法 將印墨做成液滴供給至藉由基板上的隔壁所區隔劃分之凹 部內的描繪製程;以及含有藉由對經描繪之至少1色的畫 素(凹部内的印墨)照射活性能量線使其硬化,以形成色畫素 的照射製程、或在形成所希望色相的全部畫素(凹部内的印 -68 - 201006895 墨)之後藉由熱使其硬化以形成色畫素之加熱製程的硬化製 程,且可按照需要設計烘乾處理等的其他製程而構成。 圖1係顯示本發明彩色濾光片之製法的一實施形態中 的製造製程之流程圖(flow chart),圖2(a)~(f)係顯示本發 明彩色濾光片之製法中依序從基板到彩色減光片的製造製 程之基板及彩色濾光片的模式剖面圖。 如圖1及圖2(a) ~(f)所示,本發明的彩色濾光片10的 製造方法係含有:將成爲黑底(BM)之隔壁(bank,堆積膠)14 β形成於基板12上之隔壁形成製程S 102 (參照圖2(b));對 隔壁14供給撥液性(撥墨性)之撥液處理製程S104;依照 噴墨法對於湘鄰接之隔壁14間的凹部16,供給本發明的 噴墨用印墨18以形成色畫素20之畫素形成製程S106(參 照圖2(c)~(e));及形成保護所形成之色畫素20的保護膜 22,以製造彩色濾光片10之保護膜形成製程S108(參照圖 2(f))。 又,畫素形成製程S106係如上所述具有:依照噴墨法 ®將印墨18吐出成爲液滴供給至隔壁14間的凹部16之描 繪製程S110(參照圖2(c));使供給至凹部16之印墨18乾 燥且去除印墨18内的溶劑,以成爲印墨殘餘部分18a之預 處理製程S112(參照圖2(d));及藉由對於基板12上的凹 部16内的印墨殘餘部分18a照射活性能量線之照射製程及 /或加熱印墨殘餘部分18a之加熱製程,來聚合印墨殘餘部 分18a使其硬化,以形成色畫素20之硬化製程S114(參照 圖 2(e))。 201006895 此外,隔壁14係在畫素形成製程SI 06之前的隔壁形 成製程S102中,預先形成於基板12.上者,關於隔壁14 的隔壁形成製程S1 02及其形成方法的詳細內容係如後所 述,首先開始說明畫素形成製程S106。 <畫素形成製程> 如圖2(c)~(e)所示,所謂的畫素形成製程S106係在描 繪製程S110中,以噴墨法將本發明的噴墨用印墨18的液 滴供給至隔壁(色離隔壁)1 4間的凹部1 6內,且硬化以硬化 製程S114所供給之印墨18,以形成畫素20。該畫素20 係形成構成彩色濾光片1〇之紅色(R)、綠色(G)、藍色(B) 等的色畫素者。關於本發明中所使用之噴墨法及描繪製程 S110的詳細內容係如後所述。藉由使用本發明的噴墨用印 墨,可形成具有紅色(R)、綠色(G)、藍色(B)的色畫素之彩 色濾光片1〇。此外,彩色濾光片的基板12係沒有特別地 限制,可使用玻璃板、或聚碳酸酯、聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯、 聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯等的樹脂板。 使用本發明的噴墨用印墨而製造的彩色濾光片,係可 舉例如不僅爲單色的彩色濾光片,而且爲具有能形成黃色(Y) 與洋紅色(M)之紅色(R)色畫素、能形成黃色(Y)與藍綠色(C) 之綠色(G)色畫素、能形成洋紅色(M)與藍綠色(C)之藍色(B) 色畫素之3色彩色濾光片’或更含有黃色(Y)、洋紅色(M)、 藍綠色(C)色畫素之4-6色的色畫素之彩色濾光片等。 藍色(B)的噴墨用印墨係可適當使用含有上述的亞甲基 二吡咯系金屬錯合物化合物、與通式(A)所表示之四氮卟吩 201006895 系氰基色素之噴墨用印墨。又,做爲其他顏色(紅色(R)、綠 色(G))的噴墨用印墨所使用的色素係沒有特別地限制,亦可 ' 使用例如專利出願 2007-303595 號說明書的 [0156]~[0288]中所記載之色素。 用以形成具有洋紅色(M)與其以外的其他顏色色畫素 之彩色濾光片用的各個著色用印墨,係可使用眾所周知 者。例如,洋紅色調印墨之情形中,偶合用成分(以下,稱 爲偶合成分)係爲具有如酚類、萘酚類、苯胺類、吡阱的雜 ® 環類、開鏈型活性亞甲基化合物類等之芳基或雜偶氮基 (heteryl azo)染料;可舉例如含有具有做爲偶合成分之開 鏈型活性亞甲基化合物類等的甲亞胺染料;蒽吡啶酮染料 (例如US2004/0239739A1說明書記載之Table 1中的 No.20的化合物、或國際公開第04/104108號手冊記載的 化合物(13)等)等的印墨。 黃色色調用印墨係可舉例如含有:具有做爲偶合成分 之酚類、萘酚類、苯胺類、吡唑啉酮或吡啶酮等的雜環類、 ®開鏈型活性亞甲基化合物類等的芳基或雜偶氮基染料;例 如,具有做爲偶合成分之開鏈型活性亞甲基化合物類等的 甲亞胺染料;例如,苯亞甲基染料或單次甲基氧雜菁染料 等的次甲基染料;例如,萘醌染料、蒽醌染料等的醌系染 料等,及做爲其以外的染料來源之喹啉黃染料、硝基亞硝 基染料、吖啶染料、吖啶酮染料等的印墨。 藍綠色色調用染料係可舉例如含有:具有做爲偶合成 分之酚類、萘酚類、苯胺類等的芳基或雜偶氮基染料;例 如,具有做爲偶合成分之酚類、萘酚類、吡咯并三唑的雜 -71 - 201006895 環類等的甲亞胺染料;如花青染料、氧雜菁染料、部花青 染料等的聚次甲基染料;二苯基甲烷染料、三苯基甲烷染 料、灿嗶染料等的碳鎗染料;酞菁染料;蒽醌染料;靛藍、 硫館藍染料等的印墨。 關於彩色濾光片圖案的形狀係沒有特別地限制,可爲 黑底形狀之一般的條紋狀、格子狀、以及可爲三角形(△)配 列狀。 在本發明,如圖2(c)所示,於描繪製程S110中將印墨 18的液滴供給至基板12上的凹部16內以形成印墨18的 層之後’如圖2(d)所示,在以預處理製程S112乾燥、去 除印墨18内含有的有機溶劑以成爲印墨殘餘部分18a之 後,如圖2(e)所示,藉由對於該印墨殘餘部分18a照射活 性能量線的照射製程(以下,亦稱爲第1硬化製程)及/或加 熱印墨殘餘部分的加熱製程(以下,亦稱爲第2硬化製程) 所構成之硬化製程S114來聚合印墨殘餘部分18a,亦可形 成畫素20。又,開始印墨殘餘部分的熱聚合之溫度設爲T 乞時,在預處理製程S112中,於低於T°C的溫度進行預加 熱(以下,亦稱爲預加熱製程),強制地乾燥、去除印墨18 内所含有的有機溶劑以形成印墨殘餘部分18a之後,藉由 對於印墨殘餘部分18a照射活性能量線之照射製程及/或 於T°C以上的溫度加熱印墨殘餘部分18a之加熱製程來聚 合印墨殘餘部分18a且使其硬化,亦可形成畫素20。 <第1硬化製程> 亦可設置對於描繪製程S110中所形成之至少1色的畫 素形成用的凹部16内的印墨殘餘部分(以下,稱爲未硬化 201006895 畫素印墨)1 8a,照射活性能量線之硬化製程(第1硬化製 ' 程)。在第1硬化製程方面係可藉由使含有紅色(R)、綠色 • (G)、及藍色(B)的各色印墨予以硬化,以形成硬化的畫素 20。硬化係可在每形成1色的未硬化畫素印墨18a時進行、 亦可在形成複數色或全部色的未硬化畫素印墨18a之後進 行。 第1硬化製程中,使每1色或複數色於凹部16内的印 墨、亦即使未硬化畫素印墨1 8a硬化之情形中,硬化的順 φ 序係沒有特別地限制,怎樣的順序均可。 又,R、G、B等的印墨硬化係可藉由使用能發射對應 於具有印墨之感光波長的波長領域中的活性能量線之能量 源,以實施促進聚合硬化之曝光處理而進行。 能量源係可適當選擇例如在400 ~200nm的紫外線、遠 紫外線、g線、h線、i線、KrF準分子雷射光、ArF準分 子雷射光、電子束、X射線、分子射線、或離子束等、前述 的聚合引發劑能感應者來使用。具體而言,能發射屬於 _ 250~450nm、較佳係屬於365±20nm波長領域之活性光線 的光源,例如可使用 LD、LED(發光二極體)、螢光燈、低 壓水銀燈、高壓水銀燈、金屬鹵化物燈、碳弧燈、氙氣燈、 化學燈等而適宜地進行。較佳的光源係可舉例如LED、高 壓水銀燈、金屬鹵化物燈。 活性能量線的照射時間係可依照單體與聚合引發劑的 組合而適當設定,例如可爲1 ~ 3 0秒。 <第2硬化製程> 在本發明的彩色濾光片之製法中,紅色(R)、綠色(G卜 201006895 及藍色(B)等所希望色相的未硬化畫素印墨18a係可設置藉 由熱而硬化之製程(第2硬化製程)。如上所述,藉由同時設 置第1硬化製程以及第2硬化製程,可兼具彩色濾光片1〇 的製造效率與顯示特性。又,亦可只以第2硬化製程來予 以硬化。 在本第2硬化製程中,於形成由隔壁及所希望的色相 所構成之未硬化畫素印墨,且進行第1硬化製程之後,可 進而實施加熱處理(所謂的烘烤處理),並藉由熱實施硬化。 亦即,可將形成有隔壁及藉由光照射而光聚合之畫素的基 板放入電氣爐、乾燥器等進行加熱、或者照射紅外線燈而 進行加熱。 此時的加熱溫度及加熱時間係取決於噴墨用印墨的組 成或畫素的厚度,一般從確保充分的耐溶劑性、耐鹸性、 及紫外線吸光度之観點而言,在約1201~約250°C中加熱 約10分〜約120分鐘爲佳。 又,在使用本發明噴墨用印墨的彩色濾光片之製法 中,在進行活性能量線的曝光及/或藉由熱處理使畫素形成 用凹部(未硬化畫素)内的印墨聚合之前,亦可設置預加熱製 程做爲預處理製程S112。預加熱製程中的加熱溫度係沒有 特別地限制,在把開始未硬化畫素印墨的熱聚合之溫度設 爲T°C之情形下,以低於T°C且未硬化畫素印墨之聚合不會 發生的溫度爲佳,50~l〇〇°C爲較佳' 60~90°C爲更佳。加 入本預加熱製程的話,在能促進依照噴墨法而供給之印墨 中的有機溶劑的蒸發、且有效率地製作彩色濾光片上’由 於印墨殘餘部分的黏度因熱而降低’所以能得到更高的流 -74 - 201006895 動性,而且得到具有高平坦性之畫素的彩色濾光片係爲可 能。 ‘ 如本發明的印墨殘餘部分若爲具有流動性之印墨的 話’上述預加熱製程係不僅對於畫素内藉由熱而聚合之印 墨有效,而且對於藉由光而聚合之印墨亦爲有效。藉由光 而聚合之印墨的情形中,開始上述的印墨熱聚合之溫度T 係意味著藉由熱而分解光聚合引發劑等並開始聚合反應之 溫度、或單體本身因熱而分解並開始聚合反應之溫度。預 φ加熱製程的時間係沒有特別地限制,較佳爲進行1 ~ 5分鐘。 溫度T係可依照以下所述而求得。加熱印墨、藉由加 熱而開始印墨的聚合,且將觀察到印墨的凝膠化等的溫度 設爲T。更具體而言,相對於加熱前的印墨黏度,加熱後印 墨黏度的上升爲5mPa · s以上之情形的加熱溫度設爲T。 在使用本發明印墨的彩色濾光片之製法中,從描繪製 程S110開始到由預加熱製程(S112)及第1硬化製程與第2 硬化製程所構成之硬化製程(S1 14)爲止的畫素形成製程 @ S 1 06,係在24小時以内進行者爲佳,在1 2小時以内進行 者爲較佳,在6小時以内進行者爲更佳。藉由在24小時以 内進行從描繪製程S110開始到最終的硬化製程(第2的硬 化製程)S114爲止的畫素形成,可使得畫素的面狀予以提 昇。 此外,在本發明的彩色濾光片之製法中,畫素形成製 程 S106、亦即從描繪製程 S110開始到預加熱製程 (S112)、第1硬化製程及第2硬化製程(S114)爲止係可每 此1色進行、亦可每次複數色進行,或可在描繪製程S110 -75 201006895 就全色進行描繪,且預加熱製程(s 11 2)之預加熱、硬化製 程S114之硬化亦可就全色來進行。又,畫素形成製程S1 06 ' 係在每次1色或複數色進行之情形中,所形成之畫素的顏 - 色順序係沒有特別地限制,無論是怎樣的顏色順序均可p <隔壁形成製程> 在本發明的彩色濾光片之製法,於上述的畫素形成製 程S106中,如圖2(c)~(e)所示,依照噴墨法將本發明的噴 墨用印墨18的液滴供給至藉由形成於基板12上之隔壁14 所圍繞的凹部16內,以形成畫素20。 g 該隔壁1 4係沒有特別地限制,可使用眾所周知的隔 壁,無論是怎樣的均可,惟在製作彩色濾光片之情形下, 較佳係具有黑底機能之遮光性的隔壁。 爲此,在圖1所示之例子,於隔壁形成製程S102中, 如圖2(b)所示,係在圖2(a)所示之基板12上形成具有如此 黑底機能之遮光性的隔壁14。 此外,該隔壁14係可藉由使用與眾所周知的彩色濾光 片用黑底同樣的原料、相同的眾所周知之方法而製作。可Mixture compound number Ra Rb Compound number Ra Rb CI - 1 T-1 4 Τ-1 4 CI -2 T-1 4 T- 1 SC 1-3 T-1 4 Τ-8 8 CI «4 T_1 4 T-9 9 CI~5 T-1 4 Τ_1 4 1 CI -6 T-4 6 T-4 6 CI -7 T-46 Τ_4 9 CI -8 T-4 6 T-5 6 C1 —9 T —89 Τ One 89 CI -1 0 T-8 9 T-8 8 C Bu 1 1 T-8 9 Τ—9 9 CI-12 T-8 9 T-1 4 1 CI - 1 3 T-9 5 Τ_9 5 CI - 1 4 T-9 S T-8 8 CI ~ 1 5 T —9 5 Τ— 1 1 2 CI 1-6 T-9 5 T-1 5 C 卜 1 7 T-9 5 Τ1 1 4 CI -1 8 T-9 5 T-1 34 CI - 1 9 τ-9 5 Τ- 1 4 1 CI-20 T-9 6 Τ-θ 6 CI A 2 1 Τ-96 ΤTM* 8 8 CI -2 2 T- 9 6 T-9 9 CI -2 3 Τ-96 Τ-1 1 2 CI - 2 4 T-9 6 T-1 3 4 C Ϊ 1 2 5 Τ - 9 β Τ 1 1 5 5 CI-26 T- 9 6 T-1 4 1 CI -2 7 Τ-9 7 Τ-9 7 CI-28 T- 9 7 T-1 5 CI -2 9 Τ-97 Τ—8 8 CI-30 T-9 7 T- 9 9 CI - 3 1 Τ-9 7 Τ-1 1 2 CI -3 2 T-9 7 T-1 20 CI —3 3 Τ-9 7 τ-1 3 4 Cl a 34 T-9 7 T-1 4 1 CI - 3 5 Τ — 1 1 5 τ-1 1 5 C 1-36 T-1 1 5 T- 112 CI -3 7 Τ- 1 1 5 Τ - 1 1 8 CI - 3 8 T- 1 1 5 T- 13 4 CI -3 9 Τ — 1 1 5 τ-1 4 1 CI -40 T- 1 1 6 T- 1 1 6 CI -4 1 Τ— 1 1 6 τ-1 1 2 Cl —42 T- 1 1 6 T- 1 3 4 CI - 4 3 Τ- 1 1 6 Τ - 1 4 1 CI-44 T»1 30 T-1 30 CI a 4 5 Τ- 1 3 0 Τ— 1 3 4 CI - 4 6 T- 1 3 0 Τ- I 4 1 <Synthesis Example> Next, a synthesis example of the dye represented by the above formula (A) or (B) is carried out by referring to the following scheme (scheme) D as an example of the synthesis of the above-described exemplary compound CI-29. Detailed. -5 5 - 201006895 <Reaction flow eight> 50£-(εΗρ^0^3 S0Clz SO-CCH^^SO^CI rnrcH SO-CCH^SOjNHtCH^OC^ ίΧΐ 中离. With c« 中雕A Middle Μ* ♦ middle me * cc + W shows pigment c 1-29 (synthesis of intermediate A) in 3-nitrophthalocyanine (25 g, 0.144 mol), DMSO (200 ml), sodium 3-hydrothiopropanesulfonate (32 g, 0.18) To the mixture of mol), sodium carbonate sodium carbonate (16.5 g, 0.156 mol) was added, and the mixture was heated and stirred at 60 ° C for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% saline (30 Og), and the precipitated solid was separated by filtration. The mixture of propanol/water (3/1) was washed. Water (200 ml), acetic acid (3 ml), Na2W〇4 (2 g) were added to the solid obtained here, and 31% hydrogen peroxide water (50 ml) was added. After that, it was heated and stirred at 60 ° C. After stirring for 4 hours, the extraction reaction mixture was filtered and poured into a solid precipitated in isopropyl alcohol (500 ml), and then washed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol/water (3/1). Drying the solid obtained here to give intermediate A24g (yield from 3-nitrophthalocyanine® 4 9%) » (synthesis of intermediate B) was added to intermediate A67.3 g (0.2 mol) Acetonitrile 200ml at 70 °C ~ 75 °C Heating and stirring were carried out. Phosphorus oxychloride was added to the dispersion for 3 7 m. After the completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out at 70 ° C to 75 ° C. After stirring for 4 hours, the reaction was terminated. After the reaction was completed, the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature. Thereafter, the mixture was poured while stirring in water at 2 〇〇〇mi to precipitate crystals. After filtration and washing with water, the mixture was dispersed in 300 ml of 2-propanol by -56 201006895. After stirring the dispersion for 1 hour, it was carried out. Filtration and drying. Intermediate B was obtained as 63.0 g (yield: 94.5%) (synthesis of intermediate C). In the intermediate B50.0 g (〇.i5 mol) obtained by the above method, 250 ml of acetonitrile was added and cooled to The mixture was stirred at 5 ° C. 31.0 g of 3-ethoxypropylamine was added dropwise to the solution. After the completion of the dropwise addition, the mixture was returned to room temperature and stirred for 2 hours to complete the reaction. The reaction solution was poured into water while stirring. The crystals were precipitated in 1500 ml, filtered, and washed with water, and then dispersed in 500 ml of 2-propanol. After stirring at room temperature for 2 hours, it was filtered and dried to give Intermediate C as 52.6 g ( Yield: 87.7%). (Synthesis of CI_29) obtained by the above method Intermediate C7.99g (0.02mol), hydrazine-phthalonitrile 1.28g (0.01mol), and intermediate A3.36g (0.01mol), add diethylene glycol 30ml, 2-methoxypropanol 100ml, Heat and stir at 100 °C. To the solution were added 3.87 g of ammonium benzoate and 1.26 g of copper acetate. After the addition was completed, the mixture was stirred at 95 ° C to 100 ° C for 6 hours to complete the reaction. After cooling the reaction solution to room temperature and adding 60 ml of methanol, it was poured into an aqueous solution of 75 ml of hydrochloric acid diluted with 800 ml of water while stirring. The precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with water, and dried. The crystals were dissolved by heating in methanol 250 ml, and filtered to remove insolubles. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, and ethyl acetate (250 ml) was added to the residue and stirred. The dispersed crystals are filtered and dried. The exemplified compound CI-29 was obtained in an amount of 24.7 g (yield: 92.9%). The maximum absorption wavelength and Mohr absorption coefficient of CI-29 in chloroform were respectively max = 6 6 5.6 n m and ε = 84600. 201006895 The maximum absorption wavelength (λ max) and the molar absorptivity (ε) of the dye obtained in ethyl acetate are measured by a spectrophotometer UV-2400PC (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), the maximum absorption wavelength; I max, The molar absorption coefficient (ε Η is further divided into 623.4 nm and 47,000. Further, other exemplary compounds other than the above-mentioned dye CI-29 can be synthesized by the same method as described above. The maximum absorption wavelength λ max of -B is preferably 580 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 600 nm to 680 nm from the viewpoint of color purity improvement. Further, the maximum absorption wavelength is obtained by using a spectrophotometer UV-2400PC (Shimadzu Corporation) The content of the inkjet ink in the case where the specific dye-A or the specific dye-B is contained is different depending on the Mohr absorption coefficient, the obtained spectral characteristics, and the film thickness. The total solid content 'in the inkjet ink of the present invention is preferably 1 mass% to 80% by mass, and preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass. Specific pigment-A, and specific pigment- B is in the invention In the ink ink, it may be used alone or in combination of two or more. ® In addition, in order to produce a blue filter array, it is preferable to mix a methylene bislocene metal complex compound (including The specific metal complex compound -I to the specific metal complex compound -IV) and at least one of the specific dye-A and the specific dye-B described above are used. The molar absorption coefficient, the obtained spectral characteristics, the film thickness, and the like are different, and preferably, the ratio (weight ratio) may be contained in the total content of the (methylene dipyridyl metal complex compound). 201006895 The total content of the pigment-A and the specific pigment-B is in the range of 20:1 to 1:20. It is preferably used in the range of 10:1 to 1:10. 'The above-mentioned methylene dipyrrole The metal complex compound is light-resistant and heat-resistant, and has resistance to alkali solvents (alkali resistance) in washing and repair of an alignment film used in the production of a color filter. It is intended to inhibit the polymerization of a polymerizable monomer described later. The use of the system is very small, and the polymerization reaction can be carried out by applying heat and light energy smaller than in the past. <Solvent> The inkjet ink of the present invention contains a solvent. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the boiling point of the solvent to be described later, and is particularly preferably selected in consideration of solubility, coatability and safety of a binder to be described later. Specific examples of the solvent include, for example, esters such as: amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, alkyl esters, and lactate. Ester, ethyl lactate, methyl glycolate, ethyl hydroxyacetate, butyl glycolate, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, B Oxyl® ethyl acetate or the like; alkyl 3-hydroxypropionate such as methyl 3-hydroxypropionate or ethyl 3-hydroxypropionate, for example: methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 3-methyl Ethyl oxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.; methyl 2-hydroxypropionate, ethyl 2-hydroxypropionate, sodium 2-hydroxypropionate Alkyl 2-hydroxypropionates such as esters, for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-ethoxyl Methyl propionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate, methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropanoate, ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate, 2-methoxy-2 -methyl methacrylate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.; methyl pyruvate, propyl-59 - 201006895 ethyl ketoate, pyruvic acid Ester, methyl acetate methyl acetate, ethyl acetate ethyl acetate, methyl 2-hydroxybutyrate, ethyl 2-hydroxybutyrate, etc.; ethers, for example: diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, ethylene glycol monomethyl Ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl Ether, propylene glycol methyl ether, propylene glycol methyl ether acetate, propylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol propyl ether acetate, etc.; ketones, for example: cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone Etc.; aromatic hydrocarbons such as xylene; dicyclohexylmethylamine or the like is suitable. It does not matter whether one type or two types can be used. The content of the solvent in the inkjet ink of the present invention is preferably 30 to 90% by mass, and 50 to 90% by mass based on the total amount of the ink. /〇 is better. When the amount is 30% by mass or more, the amount of ink that is dropped in one pixel is maintained, and the ink diffusion in the pixel is good. In addition, when the amount is 90% by mass or less, the amount of components other than the solvent for forming a functional film (e.g., a pixel) in the ink can be maintained at a predetermined amount or more. According to this, in the case of forming the color filter, the necessary amount of ink per one pixel does not become excessive, for example, in the case where the ink is supplied to the concave portion divided by the partition walls by the ink jet method. It can suppress the ink from overflowing from the concave portion or the color mixture with adjacent pixels. The inkjet ink of the present invention is preferably a solvent having a high boiling point among the above solvents in terms of the discharge property of the ink to the nozzle and the wettability to the substrate. Since the solvent having a low boiling point is rapidly evaporated even on the ink jet head, the ink viscosity on the head is likely to increase, the solid content is precipitated, and the like, and the discharge property is accompanied by an increase in the deterioration. Moreover, when the ink is bombarded on the surface of the substrate and wets the surface of the diffusion substrate, the viscosity of the ink is increased due to evaporation of the solvent in the portion of the wet diffusion edge of 1 - 60 201006895, and due to the phenomenon of PINNING. There is a case where the diffusion of moisture is suppressed. The solvent used in the present invention preferably has a boiling point of 130 to 280 °C. When it is lower than 130 °C, there is a poor condition from the point of uniformity of the pixel shape in the plane. When it is higher than 280 ° C, there is a poor condition from the point of removing the solvent by prebaking. Further, the boiling point of the solvent means the boiling point at the pressure lamat, and can be known from the physical properties such as the compound dictionary (Chapman & Hall Co., Ltd.). These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the case where the above-described inkjet ink does not contain a polymerizable monomer or the like to be described later, the thickness of the ink remaining portion (color pixel) obtained by removing the solvent contained in the ink is reduced, and the thickness can be reduced. The height of the partition wall formed on the substrate for the purpose of preventing color mixing or the like is preferable from the viewpoint of cost and productivity. <Polymerizable monomer> The inkjet ink of the present invention may contain a polymerizable monomer. The addition of a polymerizable single system enhances the adhesion of ink droplets to the substrate. Further, it is expected that the compound represented by each of the above formulas can be improved in dispersion uniformity in the ink, and the fastness of ® or weather resistance and heat resistance can be improved. The polymerizable single system is not particularly limited, and is preferably a (meth)acrylic monomer or an ethoxylated monomer from the viewpoint that the variation of various substituents is large and easy to start. One or more selected from the group consisting of oxetane-based monomers. The polymerizable monomer is preferably a monomer having two or more polymerizable groups (hereinafter referred to as "a monomer having two or more functional groups"). When the polymerizable monomer is polymerized by the active energy ray and/or heat, it is not particularly limited to the viewpoint of the strength of the film, the solvent resistance, etc., and it is preferable to have three polymerities of 201006895 or more. A monomer (hereinafter also referred to as "a monomer having three or more functional groups"). The type of the above-mentioned polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and as described above, it is particularly preferably an acryloxy group, a methacryloxy group, an epoxy group or an oxacyclobutane group. Specific examples of the polymerizable monomer include, for example, the epoxy group-containing monomer described in paragraphs [0061] to [0065] of JP-A-200-350012, and the paragraph number of JP-A-2002-371216. The acrylate monomer and the methacrylate monomer described in 〇〇1 6], JP-A-2001-220526, JP-A-2000-301, and JP-A-2003-341217 The sulfobutane-containing monomer described in the paragraph number of the bulletin [0 0 2 1 Bu [0 0 8 4] and JP-A-2004-91556 [0022] [0058], etc., and CMC The monomers and the like described in "Market Prospects for Reactive Monomers" are published. Further, examples of the acrylate monomer and the methacrylate monoester of the (meth)acrylic monomer include polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, and phenoxylate. Monofunctional acrylate or methacrylate such as ethethyl (meth) acrylate, or polyethylene glycol di(meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth) acrylate, new Ethylene glycol pentane di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(methyl) Acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth) acrylate, hexane diol (methyl acrylate), trimethylolpropane tris(propylene hydroxypropyl) ether, tris(propylene methoxyethyl) iso-tri Acrylate or methacrylate such as polycyanate or polyfunctional alcohol such as glycerol or trimethylolethane, followed by addition of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide, followed by (meth) acrylate The resulting trimethylolpropane IS 1 -62 - 20100689 5 p〇(propylene oxide) denatured tris(meth)acrylate or trimethylolpropane EO (ethylene oxide) denatured tris(meth)acrylate, caprolactone denatured dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate The urethane acrylates described in each of the publications of Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho-48-41, No. Sho. A polyfunctional acrylate such as an epoxy acrylate such as a polyester acrylate or a reaction product of an epoxy resin and (meth)acrylic acid described in each of the publications of the Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-9, No. 52-30490 The acrylate, and a mixture thereof, etc., may be mentioned, for example, as photocurable monomers and oligomers described in Japanese Journal of Adhesives, Vol. 20, No. 7, and pages 300 to 308. Preferably, a single monomer monomer, a bifunctional monomer, a trifunctional or higher polyfunctional monomer, or an oligomer is appropriately combined to adjust the viscosity. When a monofunctional monomer and a bifunctional monomer are used, an ink can be obtained. The viscosity is lowered to prevent the nozzle from clogging. In order to strengthen the strength of the film and impart adhesion to the substrate. It is also possible to use a small amount of a high-viscosity polyfunctional monomer or a urethane acrylate such as a high-viscosity monomer or oligomer having a viscosity of 700 mPa·s or more at 25 ° C. The oxetane group-containing oxetanyl group-containing monomer system can be suitably used as described in paragraphs [0021] to [0084] of JP-A-2003-341217. The compound described in paragraphs [0022] to [0058] of JP-A-2004-91556 can be used. The content of the above polymerizable monomer is 30 to 80% by mass in the solid content of the inkjet ink. For better, 40 ~ 80 quality. /. For better. When the amount of the monomer used is within the above range, the polymerization of the pixel portion is sufficient. Therefore, the damage generation system due to insufficient film strength of the pixel portion in 201006895 is difficult to cause. Further, when the transparent conductive film is provided, the crack or the network structure is less likely to occur, and the solvent resistance at the time of providing the alignment film is improved, and the voltage holding ratio is not lowered. Here, the solid content for defining the blending ratio of the ink for inkjet ink contains all the components other than the solvent, and a liquid polymerizable monomer or the like is also contained in the solid component. <Adhesive Resin> The ink for inkjet ink of the present invention may be added to a resin for a binder for the purpose of adjusting the viscosity or adjusting the hardness of the ink. The resin for the binder can be used as a resin for a binder which is composed only of a resin having no polymerization property and which can be dried and cured only. However, in order to impart sufficient strength, durability, and adhesion to the coating film, it is preferred to use a resin for curing the binder by polymerizing the pixel after the pattern of forming a pixel on the substrate by an inkjet method. For example, a resin for photocurable adhesive which can be polymerized and cured by visible light, ultraviolet light, electron beam or the like, or a resin which is polymerizable and hardenable by heating and hardening, can be polymerized and hardened by a resin. Resin for the agent. Θ <Polymerization Initiator> The inkjet ink of the present invention may be a polymerization initiator for the purpose of promoting polymerization of a polymerizable monomer and a resin for a binder. The polymerization initiator can be selected in accordance with the type and polymerization route of the polymerizable monomer and the binder used in the ink for inkjet. In the case where the polymerization is carried out by the active energy ray, a photopolymerization initiator is used, and in the case where the polymerization is carried out by heat, a thermal polymerization initiator is used. The photopolymerization initiator may, for example, be at least one active halogen compound selected from a halomethyl sulfonium 64 - 201006895 oxadiazole compound and a halomethyl-S-triterpene compound, a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound, Lofin base poly's, diphenyl ketone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, lanthanide compounds and the like. Further, as the thermal polymerization initiator, a generally known organic peroxide compound or an azo compound can be used. The content of the above polymerization initiator is preferably from 0.01 to 50% by mass, more preferably from 1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content in the ink for inkjet. /. . When the β content is within the above range, a more favorable sensitivity and a strong hardened portion can be formed. Further, the above-mentioned compound which causes the acid to be produced may be used alone or in combination of two or more. <Hardening Agent> The ethoxy group-based monomer (ethoxy group-containing monomer) and the thermosetting binder resin may be usually blended with a curing agent. For the hardener, the "Essence of Ethoxy Resin Basics" issued by the Ethoxy Resin Technology Association, which is issued on November 19, 2003, and the hardeners and accelerators described in Chapter 3, can be used, for example. A polycarboxylic acid anhydride or a polycarboxylic acid. <Thermal latent catalyst> In the case of using an epoxy group-containing monomer or a thermosetting binder resin, in order to improve the hardness and heat resistance of the ink, it is also possible to promote the addition. Catalyst for thermal hardening reaction between acid and epoxy. The catalyst can be used as a thermal latent catalyst which exhibits activity upon heat hardening. <Interactive Agent> In the inkjet ink of the present invention, a surfactant can be further used. </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> <RTIgt; The agent is suitable. Interface - The content of the active agent is preferably 5% by mass or less based on the total amount of the coloring composition. Other additives may be, for example, other additives described in paragraph number [0058] [0 071] of JP-A-2000-3 10706. In order to adjust the color tone of the inkjet ink of the present invention, the above-mentioned methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound and other coloring agents may be simultaneously used. The content of each component of the inkjet ink of the present invention is preferably 1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 5 to 15% by mass, based on the content of the above-mentioned methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound. 30 to 90% by mass is preferred, 50 to 85% by mass is more preferably, the content of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, 7 to 30% by mass is more preferably, and the surfactant is 5 mass%. % or less is preferred, and 0.1 to 5% by mass is preferred. <Manufacturing Method of Inkjet Inkjet> ¥ In the production of the inkjet ink of the present invention, a well-known method of producing an ink for inkjet printing can be applied. For example, after dissolving the methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound in a solvent, each component (for example, a polymerizable monomer, a binder, or the like) necessary for inkjet ink is dissolved to prepare an inkjet ink. When the monomer solution is used, when the solubility of the raw material to be used is low in the solvent, the treatment such as heating or ultrasonic treatment can be suitably performed within a range in which the polymerization reaction does not occur in the monomer liquid. 66 201006895 <Physical properties of the ink for inkjet ink> The physical properties of the inkjet ink according to the present invention are not particularly limited to the viewpoint of the discharge of the inkjet ink when the inkjet head can be discharged. In terms of 2~30mPa_s, 2~20mPa's is better. Further, when the apparatus is ejected, the temperature of the ink jet ink is preferably maintained at a constant temperature in the range of 20 to 80 °C. When the temperature of the device is set to a high temperature, the viscosity of the ink is lowered, and the ink of higher viscosity may be ejected, and the ink modification or thermal polymerization caused by heat is caused by the heat. Occurs in the head, and the solvent easily evaporates on the surface of the nozzle that ejects the ink. In order to prevent nozzle clogging from occurring, the temperature of the device is preferably in the range of 20 to 80 °C. In addition, the viscosity is measured by using an E-type viscometer (for example, an E-type viscometer (RE-80L) manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.) in a state where the ink for inkjet is held at 25 ° C. Further, the surface tension (static surface tension) of the inkjet ink at 25 ° C is preferably 20 to 40 mN/m from the viewpoint of improving the wettability and discharge stability of the substrate for non-permeability. .20~35mN/m is preferable. Further, when the device is ejected, the temperature of the ink for inkjet printing is preferably maintained at a temperature of about 20 to 80 ° C, and the surface tension is preferably 20 at this time. ~40 mN/m. In order to maintain the inkjet ink at a fixed temperature with a specified precision, it is preferred to be able to control the heating according to the ink temperature detecting means, the ink heating or cooling means, the detected ink temperature or The cooling control means or, preferably, the application of energy to the ink discharge means according to the ink temperature to reduce the influence on the ink property change - 67 - 201006895 "The surface tension system described above" Use a surface tension meter that is generally used ( For example, the Concord Interface Science (stock) system, the surface tension meter FACE SURFACE TENSIOMETERCBVB-A3, etc., measured by the Wilhelmy method at a liquid temperature of 25 ° C, 60% RH. After the ink is imprinted on the substrate, the shape of the wet smear can be appropriately maintained, and the liquid property of the inkjet ink that is played on the substrate is preferably fixed. Therefore, the vicinity of the substrate and/or the substrate is maintained. It is preferable to set the temperature range. Alternatively, the influence of the temperature change can be effectively reduced by increasing the heat capacity of the stage supporting the substrate. <Color Filter and Method of Producing Same> Next, a preferred embodiment of the ink jet ink of the present invention and a method for producing the same will be described in detail with reference to preferred embodiments shown in the drawings. The color filter of the present invention is characterized in that it includes a color photographic element formed by the inkjet method using the inkjet ink of the present invention, that is, the inkjet ink of the present invention is used and inkjet is used. Made by law to be a special feature. Further, the color filter of the present invention is produced by supplying the inkjet ink of the present invention to a concave portion surrounded by a partition wall formed on a substrate in accordance with an ink jet method to form a pixel process ( Hereinafter, the "pixel forming process" is a feature. Preferably, the pixel forming process has a process of supplying ink to the recessed portion defined by the partition wall on the substrate according to an inkjet method; and containing at least one color by drawing The pixel (ink in the recess) illuminates the active energy line to harden it to form a process for the color pixel, or after forming all the pixels of the desired hue (printed in the recess - 68 - 201006895 ink) It is a hardening process which is hardened by heat to form a coloring process, and can be configured by other processes such as drying treatment as needed. 1 is a flow chart showing a manufacturing process in an embodiment of a method for producing a color filter of the present invention, and FIGS. 2(a) to (f) are diagrams showing the method of manufacturing the color filter of the present invention. A schematic cross-sectional view of a substrate and a color filter of a manufacturing process from a substrate to a color reduction sheet. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2(a) to (f), the method of manufacturing the color filter 10 of the present invention includes forming a partition (bank) of a black matrix (BM) 14β on a substrate. The partition forming process S102 on the upper side of 12 (see FIG. 2(b)); the liquid-repellent processing process S104 for supplying the liquid-repellent property (ink-repellent property) to the partition wall 14; and the concave portion 16 between the partition walls 14 adjacent to the east according to the ink-jet method The inkjet ink 18 of the present invention is supplied to form a pixel forming process S106 of the color pixel 20 (see FIGS. 2(c) to (e)); and a protective film 22 for protecting the formed color pixel 20 is formed. The protective film forming process S108 for manufacturing the color filter 10 (refer to FIG. 2(f)). Further, the pixel forming process S106 has a drawing process S110 for discharging the ink 18 into the concave portion 16 between the partition walls 14 in accordance with the inkjet method® (see FIG. 2(c)); The ink 18 of the recess 16 is dried and the solvent in the ink 18 is removed to become the pretreatment process S112 of the ink remaining portion 18a (refer to FIG. 2(d)); and by the printing in the recess 16 on the substrate 12. The ink residual portion 18a irradiates the irradiation process of the active energy ray and/or the heating process for heating the ink residual portion 18a to polymerize the ink residual portion 18a to be hardened to form a hardening process S114 of the color chromin 20 (refer to FIG. 2 (refer to FIG. 2 e)). 201006895 Further, the partition wall 14 is formed in the partition forming process S102 before the pixel forming process SI 06, and is formed in advance on the substrate 12. The partition forming process S102 of the partition wall 14 and the method of forming the same are as follows. As described above, the pixel forming process S106 will first be described. <Pixel forming process> As shown in Figs. 2(c) to (e), the pixel forming process S106 is in the drawing process S110, and the ink of the inkjet ink 18 of the present invention is inkjet. The droplets are supplied into the recesses 16 of the partition walls (color-separating partition walls) 14 and are hardened to harden the ink 18 supplied from the process S114 to form the pixels 20. The pixel 20 forms a color tex of red (R), green (G), blue (B), and the like constituting the color filter 1〇. The details of the ink jet method and the drawing process S110 used in the present invention will be described later. By using the ink for inkjet of the present invention, a color filter 1B having color chromatic elements of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) can be formed. Further, the substrate 12 of the color filter is not particularly limited, and a glass plate or a resin plate such as polycarbonate, polymethyl methacrylate or polyethylene terephthalate can be used. The color filter manufactured by using the inkjet ink of the present invention is, for example, a color filter which is not only a single color, but also has a red color (Y) capable of forming yellow (Y) and magenta (M). Color pixels, green (G) color pixels capable of forming yellow (Y) and blue-green (C), 3 colors capable of forming magenta (M) and blue-green (C) blue (B) color pixels The color filter 'or a color filter containing 4-6 colors of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) color pixels, and the like. In the inkjet ink of the blue (B), an inkjet containing the above-described methylene dipyrrole metal complex compound and the nitrousin 201006895 cyano pigment represented by the general formula (A) can be suitably used. Use ink. Further, the coloring matter used for the inkjet ink of the other colors (red (R), green (G)) is not particularly limited, and it is also possible to use [0156] of the specification of Patent Application No. 2007-303595. The pigment described in 0288]. A known coloring ink for forming a color filter having magenta (M) and other color chromatic elements other than the color can be used. For example, in the case of a magenta ink, the coupling component (hereinafter referred to as a coupling component) is a heterocyclic ring such as a phenol, a naphthol, an aniline or a pyridene, and an open-chain active methylene group. An aryl or heteroyl azo dye such as a compound; for example, a methylimine dye containing an open-chain active methylene compound or the like as an even-synthesis component; an anthrapyridone dye (for example, US2004) Ink of the compound No. 20 in Table 1 or the compound (13) described in the handbook of International Publication No. 04/104108, etc., as described in the specification of 02, 397, 39 A1. The ink for yellow color tone may include, for example, a heterocyclic compound such as a phenol, a naphthol, an aniline, a pyrazolone or a pyridone as an even component, or an open-chain active methylene compound. An aryl or a heteroazo dye; for example, a methylimine dye having an open-chain active methylene compound or the like as an even component; for example, a benzylidene dye or a monomethine dye a methine dye; for example, an anthraquinone dye such as a naphthoquinone dye or an anthraquinone dye, and a quinoline yellow dye, a nitrosina dye, an acridine dye, or an acridine which are other dye sources. Ink for ketone dyes, etc. The dye for the cyan color tone may, for example, be an aryl or a heteroazo dye having a phenol, a naphthol or an aniline as an even component; for example, a phenol or naphthol having an even component a pyrimidotriazole-like-71 - 201006895 ring-like imine dye; a polymethine dye such as a cyanine dye, an oxonol dye, a merocyanine dye; a diphenylmethane dye, a triphenylene Carbon gun dyes such as methane dyes and candidate dyes; phthalocyanine dyes; anthraquinone dyes; inks of indigo, sulfur-blue dyes, and the like. The shape of the color filter pattern is not particularly limited, and may be a general stripe shape, a lattice shape, or a triangular (?) arrangement of a black matrix shape. In the present invention, as shown in Fig. 2(c), after the droplets of the ink 18 are supplied into the recess 16 on the substrate 12 in the drawing process S110 to form a layer of the ink 18, as shown in Fig. 2(d) It is shown that after the organic solvent contained in the ink 18 is dried by the pretreatment process S112 to become the ink residual portion 18a, as shown in Fig. 2(e), the active energy ray is irradiated to the ink residual portion 18a. a polishing process (hereinafter, also referred to as a first hardening process) and/or a curing process S114 of a heating process for heating the remaining portion of the ink (hereinafter also referred to as a second hardening process) to polymerize the ink residual portion 18a, A pixel 20 can also be formed. Further, when the temperature at which the thermal polymerization of the remaining portion of the ink is started is T 乞, in the pretreatment process S112, preheating (hereinafter, also referred to as a preheating process) is performed at a temperature lower than T ° C, and forced drying is performed. After removing the organic solvent contained in the ink 18 to form the ink residual portion 18a, the ink residue is heated by irradiating the ink residue portion 18a with the active energy ray and/or at a temperature above T ° C. The heating process of 18a polymerizes the ink residual portion 18a and hardens it, and also forms the pixel 20. <First Hardening Process> An ink residue in the concave portion 16 for forming a pixel of at least one color formed in the drawing process S110 (hereinafter referred to as an unhardened 201006895 pixel ink) 1 may be provided. 8a, a curing process for irradiating the active energy ray (the first curing process). In the first hardening process, the ink of each color containing red (R), green (G), and blue (B) can be hardened to form a hardened pixel 20. The hardening may be performed every time the uncured photographic ink 18a of one color is formed, or after the uncured photographic ink 18a of a plurality of colors or all of the colors is formed. In the first hardening process, in the case where the ink in each of the one or more colors in the concave portion 16 and the unhardened pixel ink 18 8 are hardened, the hardened cis-order is not particularly limited, and the order is not particularly limited. Yes. Further, the ink hardening of R, G, B or the like can be carried out by performing an exposure treatment for promoting polymerization hardening by using an energy source capable of emitting an active energy ray corresponding to a wavelength region having a photosensitive wavelength of ink. The energy source may suitably select, for example, ultraviolet light of 400 to 200 nm, far ultraviolet rays, g line, h line, i line, KrF excimer laser light, ArF excimer laser light, electron beam, X-ray, molecular ray, or ion beam. The above-mentioned polymerization initiator can be used by a sensor. Specifically, it can emit a light source belonging to _250-450 nm, preferably belonging to the active light of 365±20 nm, for example, LD, LED (Light Emitting Diode), fluorescent lamp, low-pressure mercury lamp, high-pressure mercury lamp, Metal halide lamps, carbon arc lamps, xenon lamps, chemical lamps, and the like are suitably carried out. Preferred light sources are, for example, LEDs, high pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps. The irradiation time of the active energy ray may be appropriately set depending on the combination of the monomer and the polymerization initiator, and may be, for example, 1 to 30 seconds. <Second Hardening Process> In the method of producing a color filter of the present invention, the unhardened pixel ink 18a of a desired hue such as red (R) or green (G Bu 201006895 and blue (B) can be used. The process of hardening by heat (second hardening process) is provided. As described above, by simultaneously providing the first hardening process and the second hardening process, the manufacturing efficiency and display characteristics of the color filter 1 can be achieved. It is also possible to harden only by the second hardening process. In the second hardening process, an unhardened pixel ink composed of a partition wall and a desired hue is formed, and after the first hardening process is performed, the second hardening process may be further performed. The heat treatment (so-called baking treatment) is performed, and the curing is performed by heat. In other words, the substrate on which the partition walls and the pixels photopolymerized by light irradiation are formed can be placed in an electric furnace, a dryer, or the like, and heated. Or heating with an infrared lamp. The heating temperature and heating time at this time depend on the composition of the ink for inkjet or the thickness of the pixel, and generally ensure sufficient solvent resistance, smash resistance, and ultraviolet absorbance. In terms of It is preferably heated from about 120 minutes to about 250 ° C for about 10 minutes to about 120 minutes. Further, in the method of producing a color filter using the inkjet ink of the present invention, exposure and/or borrowing of the active energy ray is performed. Before the ink in the concave portion for forming the pixel formation (unhardened pixel) is polymerized by heat treatment, a preheating process may be provided as the pretreatment process S112. The heating temperature in the preheating process is not particularly limited, and is started. In the case where the temperature of the thermal polymerization of the uncured pixel ink is set to T ° C, it is preferable that the temperature at which the polymerization of the uncured pixel ink does not occur below T ° C is 50 to 10 ° C. It is more preferable to use '60 to 90 ° C. When this preheating process is added, the evaporation of the organic solvent in the ink supplied by the ink jet method can be promoted, and the color filter can be efficiently produced. Since the viscosity of the remaining portion of the ink is lowered by heat', it is possible to obtain a higher flow-74 - 201006895 motility, and it is possible to obtain a color filter having a high flatness. "Printing according to the present invention If the ink residue is a liquid ink, the above pre- The thermal process is effective not only for inks that are polymerized by heat in the pixels, but also for inks that are polymerized by light. In the case of inks that are polymerized by light, the above-described ink heat is started. The temperature T of the polymerization means a temperature at which the photopolymerization initiator or the like is decomposed by heat and the temperature at which the polymerization reaction starts, or the temperature at which the monomer itself decomposes due to heat and starts the polymerization reaction. The time of the pre-φ heating process is not particularly limited. Preferably, it is carried out for 1 to 5 minutes. The temperature T can be obtained by heating the ink, starting the polymerization of the ink by heating, and observing the temperature of the ink, such as gelation. More specifically, the heating temperature in the case where the viscosity of the ink after heating is 5 mPa·s or more is set to T with respect to the viscosity of the ink before heating. In the method of producing a color filter using the ink of the present invention, the drawing from the drawing process S110 to the hardening process (S1 14) consisting of the preheating process (S112) and the first hardening process and the second hardening process (S1 14) The formation process @S 1 06 is preferably carried out within 24 hours, preferably within 12 hours, and preferably within 6 hours. By performing pixel formation from the drawing process S110 to the final hardening process (second hardening process) S114 within 24 hours, the planar shape of the pixel can be improved. Further, in the method of manufacturing the color filter of the present invention, the pixel forming process S106, that is, from the drawing process S110 to the preheating process (S112), the first hardening process, and the second hardening process (S114), Each of the colors may be performed in one color, or may be performed in a plurality of colors, or may be depicted in full color in the drawing process S110-75 201006895, and the preheating process of the preheating process (s 11 2) and the hardening process S114 may be performed. Full color to carry out. Further, in the case where the pixel forming process S1 06 ' is performed every time one color or a plurality of colors are performed, the color-color order of the formed pixels is not particularly limited, regardless of the color order. <Partition Wall Forming Process> In the color filter forming method of the present invention, in the above-described pixel forming process S106, as shown in Figs. 2(c) to (e), the jet of the present invention is applied in accordance with the ink jet method. The liquid droplets of the ink ink 18 are supplied into the concave portion 16 surrounded by the partition walls 14 formed on the substrate 12 to form the pixels 20. g The partition wall 14 is not particularly limited, and a well-known partition wall can be used, and any of them can be used. However, in the case of producing a color filter, it is preferable to have a partition wall having a blackout function. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 1, in the partition forming process S102, as shown in FIG. 2(b), the light-shielding property of the black matrix function is formed on the substrate 12 shown in FIG. 2(a). Next wall 14. Further, the partition wall 14 can be produced by using the same raw material and the same well-known method as the well-known black color filter for a color filter. can
Q 舉例如在特開 2007- 193090 號公報的段落號碼 [0108卜[0126]、或特開 2005-3861號公報的段落號碼 [0021卜[0074卜或特開2004-240039號公報的段落號碼 [0012卜[0021]中所記載之黑底(所謂的樹脂黑底)、或特開 2006- 17980號公報的段落號碼[0015卜[0020]、或特開 2006-10875號公報的段落號碼[0009卜[0044]中所記載之 噴墨用黑底等。又,隔壁14係可爲由分別具有黑底機能與 隔壁機能之層所構成之 2層結構。例如,由在特開 201006895 2004-361491號公報的段落號碼[Ο Ο 5 4卜[0 0 5 7】、或特開 '2004-295039號公報的段落號碼[0 0 6 7 ] ~ [ 0 0 6 9 ]、或特開 -2006-86128號公報的段落號碼[0068卜[0069]、[0103】、 [0109]~[0110]中所記載之金屬遮光膜,及於其上所形成之 樹脂製的隔壁層、較佳係由撥液性之樹脂製的隔壁(堆積膠) 層所構成之2層結構。 在本發明法,上述眾所周知的製作方法之中,從削減 成本之觀點而言,使用感光性樹脂轉印材料爲佳。感光性 @樹脂轉印材料係在暫時支持體上設置具有至少遮光性之樹 脂層者,且可壓延基板而將具有遮光性之樹脂層轉印至基 板。 感光性樹脂轉印材料係使用特開平5-72724號公報中 記載所的感光性樹脂轉印材料、亦即使用一體成型之薄膜 來形成爲佳。該一體成型薄膜之構成的例子,係可舉例如 依序積層暫時支持體/熱可塑性樹脂層/中間層/感光性樹 脂層(本發明中,所謂的「感光性樹脂層」係以藉由光照射 _而硬化之樹脂爲宜,其係在具有遮光性時亦稱爲「具有遮 光性之樹脂層」,以著色成目的之顏色時亦稱爲「著色樹脂 層」)/保護薄膜而成之構成。關於構成感光性樹脂轉印材料 之暫時支持體、熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層、保護薄膜、或 轉印材料之製作方法’係可舉例如特開2005-3861號公報 的段落號碼[0023卜[0066]或特開2007-193090號公報的 段落號碼[0108]~[0126】中所記載者爲適宜者。 又’這樣的隔壁14係爲了防止噴墨用印墨的混色,亦 可施行撥印墨處理。 -77 - 201006895 爲此,在圖1所示之例中,於隔壁形成製程S102之後, 撥液處理製程S104中,對於圖2(b)所示之基板12上的隔 壁14施行撥液處理、亦即撥印墨處理。 此外,這樣的撥印墨處理係有例如特開2007-187884 號公報的段落號碼[0086]~[0087]中記載的撥印墨處理方 法,具體而言,可舉例如(1)將撥墨性物質摻混入隔壁之方 法(例如,參照特開2005-36160號公報)、(2)新設置撥印 墨層之方法(例如,參照特開平5-241011號公報>、(3)藉 由電漿處理賦予撥墨性之方法(例如,參照特開 2002-62420號公報}、(4)將撥印墨材料塗布至隔壁的壁上 面之方法(例如,參照特開平10-123500號公報)等,特別 是(3)對於在基板上所形成之隔壁施行藉由電漿之撥印墨化 處理之方法爲佳。 除此之外,可適用於本發明法的撥印墨處理方法,係 可舉例如特開2004-361491號公報的段落號碼[0058]中 所記載的撥印墨處理方法(例如,參照特開平9-203803號 公報、特開平9-230129號公報及特開平9-230 127號公 報)、或特開 2006-86128 號公報的段落號碼 [0074 卜[0075]' [0111卜[0118]、[0130]中所記載的撥印 墨處理方法等。 此外,上述之例中係對於基板12上的隔壁14施行撥 印墨處理,惟本發明係不受限於此,亦可同時對於基板12 上的凹部16内施行親印墨處理。 此外,在隔壁14具備撥墨性之情形中係不需要撥液處 理製程S104,且即使在此情形中,亦可對於基板12上的 201006895 凹部16内施行親印墨處理。 ' 如圖2(e)所示,在基板12上形成隔壁14及畫素20 • 且製作彩色濾光片1〇之後,以提昇耐性爲目的,如圖2(f) 所示,可形成覆蓋畫素20及隔壁14全部以做爲保護層之 保護塗層(overcoat layer)22。保護塗層22係能保護R、 G、B等的畫素20及隔壁14,且同時使得表面爲平坦的。 但是,從製程數增加之點而言,以不設置爲佳。保護塗層 22係可使用樹脂(OC劑)來構成,而樹脂(OC劑)係可舉例 0如丙烯酸系樹脂組成物、環氧基樹脂組成物、聚醯亞胺樹 脂組成物等。其中,尤以在可見光領域的透明性優異,噴 墨用印墨的樹脂成分係通常以丙烯酸系樹脂爲主成分,且 黏附性優異而言,以丙烯酸系樹脂組成物爲所期望的。保 護塗層的例子係可舉例如特開2003-287618號公報的段 落號碼[0018卜[0028]中所記載者,或做爲保護塗劑的市售 品、JSR 公司製的 OPTOMER SS6699G。 本發明的彩色濾光片亦可更含有做爲透明導電膜之氧 化銦錫(ITO)層。ITO層的形成方法係可舉例如:串聯低溫 噴濺法、或串聯高溫噴濺法、分批式低溫噴濺法、分批式 高溫噴濺法、真空蒸鍍法、及電漿CVD法等,特別是爲了 減少對於彩色濾光片的損傷,較佳爲使用低溫噴濺法。 本發明的彩色濾光片係可適當使用於例如液晶顯示 器、電視、個人電腦、液晶投影機、遊戲機、行動電話等 的攜帶式終端設備、數位相機、汽車導航機等的影像顯示, 特別是可適當使用於彩色影像顯示的用途’而沒有特別地 限制。 -79 201006895 又,本發明的彩色濾光片係亦可適當使用於電子報或 有機EL元件裝置等的影像顯示裝置、特別是可適當使用於 彩色影像顯示裝置。 接著,就本發明彩色濾光片之製法的描繪製程、使用 於彼之噴墨描繪方法、實施彼之噴墨描繪裝置、及使用於 彼之噴墨頭來加以說明。 圖3係顯示在本發明的彩色濾光片之製法中,用以實 施描繪製程之噴墨描繪裝置的一實施形態之一部分的斜視 圖,圖4係圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝置的部分剖面圖,圖5 係顯示在圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝置中的印墨循環系之一實 施形態的槪略構成模式圖。 圖3及圖4所示之噴墨描繪裝置(以下,亦可僅稱爲描 繪裝置)30係具有:載置支持基板12的壓板32、具備於基 板12吐出彩色濾光片製造用印墨之噴墨頭34的滑動架 (carriage type)之噴頭單元36、在壓板32上所支持的基 板12上使噴頭單元36往主掃瞄方向(圖3中箭號X所示之 方向)移動的噴頭移動機構38、將載置於壓板32之基板12 往與主掃瞄方向(X方向)大致正交之副掃瞄方向(圖3及圖4 中箭號Y所示之方向)搬送的基板搬送機構40、對噴頭單元 36的噴墨頭34供給印墨的印墨供給系統50(參照圖5}、 透過基板搬送機構40對於壓板32供給基板12的沒有圖 示之基板供給手段。此外’基板供給手段只要是使基板搬 送機構40能夠將基板12搬送至壓板32的方式,可將基 板12供給至基板搬送機構4〇即可’無論是那一種基板供 給手段均可,例如,可爲眾所周知的基板供給手段、或可 80 201006895 爲透過基板搬送機構40將基板12自動地供給至壓板32 之自動給版裝置。 • 此處,壓板32係具有平板形狀,且在其表面上載置支 持來自基板供給手段所供給之基板12者。此處,壓板32的 表面係在設置空氣吸引孔且藉由噴頭單元36之描繪中,亦 即藉由噴頭單元36的噴墨頭34之描繪中,能夠吸附基板12 者爲佳。藉此,能夠適當地維持基板12的平面性。又,藉 由基板搬送機構40將基板12往副掃瞄方向(Y方向)搬送之 φ 際,壓板32的表面與基板12背面的摩擦小者爲佳。此外, 壓板32係安裝於描繪裝置30的外殼(沒有圖示)。 噴頭單元36係具有噴墨頭34且與壓板32成對向而 配置的,藉由後述之噴頭移動機構38,在與壓板32的表 面成平行且可移動之狀態下而受到支持。又,噴頭單元36 中,印墨供給系統50的印墨槽52 (參照圖5)内的印墨係連 接用以供給噴墨頭34之印墨供給管54。 噴墨頭34係依照彩色濾光片形成用的規定色之印墨吐 @出信號,吐出用以製造上述之本發明彩色濾光片的噴墨用 印墨18,且在基板12上描繪畫素(未硬化畫素18 a),以形 成硬化畫素20(參照圖2(e)及圖2(f))者。此處’所謂的吐 出信號係基於影像信號,以選擇性將印墨塗布至彩色濾光 片的形成畫素之部分的方式,來使得液滴吐出的吐出信號。 噴墨頭係可使用連續型或請求(〇n demand)型的壓電 方式、熱壓(thermal)方式、固體(solid)方式、靜電吸引方 式等的各種方式的噴墨頭(吐出噴頭),較佳爲使用請求型的 各種方式的噴墨頭,特佳是使用請求型的壓電方式的噴墨 -81 201006895 頭。又,噴墨頭的吐出部(噴嘴)係不限置於單列配置,亦可 配置爲複數列或交錯格子狀。此外,關於噴墨頭的噴嘴配 置及根據其之描繪方法係如後所述。 此外,在圖3及圖4所示之描繪裝置30係使用1色、 例如使用洋紅色的印墨以形成彩色濾光片的R畫素者,但 爲了形成彩色濾光片的2色以上、例如3色的RGB畫素, 可藉由1台的描繪裝置30依序交換不不同顏色的印墨,以 形成其他顏色的畫素,亦可藉由使用分別不同顏色之印墨 的3台描繪裝置30,來形成分別不同顏色的畫素,或者亦 可在圖3及圖4所示之描繪裝置30中,具備可以往2次元 方向移動的2個以上之噴頭單元來做爲構成。 又,在圖示例中,噴頭單元36係具備吐出1色印墨的 1種噴墨頭34者,惟本發明係不受限於此,亦可具備能分 別吐出2色以上、例如3色或4色的全彩顏色印墨之2種 以上、例如具備3種或4種的噴墨頭34者。該情形下,相 對於3種或4種之各噴墨頭34,各個印墨供給系統50、 亦即分別供給3色或4色的全彩顏色印墨之3種或4種的 印墨供給系統50係爲必要的,且按照彼等的每個來使3根 或4根的印墨供給管54與噴頭單元36相連接。 噴頭移動機構38係使噴頭單元36往主掃瞄方向(圖3 中箭號 X方向)掃瞄移動者,且具有驅動旋桿(drive screw)42、導軌(gu i d e r ail) 4 3、驅動支持部4 4、與支持 部45 »驅動旋桿42及導軌43係互相以規定的間隔來隔 開,且同時以與基板12的搬送方向(圖3中Y方向)成正交、 與主掃瞄方向(圖3中X方向)成平行的方式來配置,又可使 201006895 用的最大(主掃瞄方向的長度爲最長)基板12係以從其左端 往右端橫跨的方式來配置。 • 驅動旋桿42係由在噴頭單元36所形成之雌螺紋部(沒 有圖示)與具有螺合之公螺紋部的滾珠螺桿(ball screw)(沒 有圖示)等所構成,並藉由迴轉來使噴頭單元3 6移動。導軌 4 3係插入通過於噴頭單元36所形成之貫通孔,且以藉由驅 動旋桿42的迴轉而移動之噴墨頭34的姿勢爲不變的方式來 進行引導之導向。 φ 又,驅動支持部44係設置於驅動旋桿42及導軌43的其 中一方的端部,支持部4 5則設置於彼等之另一方端部,並 以可正逆迴轉的狀態支持驅動旋桿42,且以不移動的方式 來支持導軌43。驅動支持部44係具備可驅動驅動旋桿42之 馬達等的驅動源(沒有圖示)。此外,驅動支持部44及支持部 45係一起被支持於上述沒有圖示之描繪裝置30的外殼。 噴頭單元36係藉由驅動旋桿42及導軌43而可移動支 持,並藉由驅動支持部44使得驅動旋桿42可正逆迴轉,而 @使其可一面於導軌43引導,一面朝主掃瞄方向(X方向)往返 移動(掃瞄)。此外,爲了保持噴頭單元36的姿勢,噴頭移動 機構38係可具備複數個導軌,也可以具有其他的姿勢保持 手段。此外,噴頭單元36係藉由導軌43,以維持印墨液滴 吐出的部分、亦即維持噴墨頭34的印墨液滴吐出面與壓板 32成對向的規定姿勢而移動。 此處,噴頭單元36的移動機構係不限制於上述的噴頭 移動機構38,可使用各種眾所周知的噴頭移動機構。例如, 亦可使用將驅動旋桿做爲導軌等的棒狀構件,分別於噴墨 -83 - 201006895 頭的χ方向的端部兩側形成繫上導繩之構成,且卷取移動方 向的導繩,使其沿著導軌移動之構成。又,亦可以同步帶 (timing belt)來取代導繩而使其移動。該情形下,亦可使 用同步帶用鏈輪(sprocket)來取代鋼絲卷筒(wire reel)。 又,亦可使用齒條齒輪傳動機構。又,亦可爲自走式的。 再者,亦可使用直線電動機(liner motor}。 基板搬送機構40係相對於噴頭單元36,將載置於壓板 32之基板12朝副掃瞄方向(Y方向)搬送,其具有:朝副掃瞄 方向(Y方向)以所規定之間隔、例如僅比可使用之最小(副掃 瞄方向的長度爲最短)基板12的長度短少之間隔來隔開、且 與沿著主掃瞄方向(X方向)存在配置的沒有圖示之驅動源相 連接的1對輸送軋輥46,及被配置於分別夾著載置於各輸送 軋輥46上之基板12的主掃瞄(X)方向之兩端部的位置、且跟 著各輸送軋輥46之1組窄幅的壓延軋輥48,且在輸送軋輥 46與壓延軋輥48之間夾持基板12朝副掃瞄(Y)方向進行搬 送。1對的輸送軋輥46係以比可使用的最大(於主掃瞄方向 爲最長)的基板12之主掃瞄方向的長度要長的2個長條狀驅 動軋輥所構成的,且該2個驅動軋輥的驅動軸係藉由驅動皮 帶等同步驅動手段來互相連結並同步驅動的。另一方面, 壓延軋輥48係以相對於各輸送軋輥46爲2個、合計設置4個 而成之窄幅短條狀的從動軋輥所構成的,其係可在從於可 使用的主掃瞄方向爲最長的基板12的兩端之位置到於可使 用的主掃瞄方向爲最短的基板12的兩端之位®之間往主掃 瞄方向來進行移動,且可在所使用之基板12的兩端位置做 適當調整爲佳。 84 - 201006895 1個輸送軋輥46與2個壓延軋輥48係以上下夾持基板 '12的搬送路徑而配置的。從自動給版裝置所供給的基板12 • 係在輸送軋輥46與壓延軋輥48之間以規定的夾輥壓力而夾 持的,且藉由驅動源(沒有圖示)使輸送軋輥46往規定的方向 (在圖4中爲逆時針方向)迴轉,藉以往副掃瞄(Y)方向來進行 搬送。 此處,在藉由噴頭單元36之描繪中,於基板12被吸附 於壓板32表面之情形下,全部的輸送軋輥46及壓延軋輥48 φ係停止迴轉,且在藉由噴頭單元36之描繪沒有進行之間, 以輸送軋輥48係由沒有圖示之驅動源而迴轉驅動的’且將 在壓延軋輥48之間所夾持的基板12往副掃瞄(Y)方向進行 搬送的方式所構成者爲佳。亦即,基板搬送機構4 0係以可 間歇地副掃瞄搬送基板1 2者爲佳。此外’輸送軋輥46及壓 延軋輥48係可在沒有圖示之描繪裝置30的外殻一起迴轉支 持。此外,本發明中所使用的基板搬送機構40若爲可將基 板12往副掃瞄方向搬送者的話,無論是那種形式均可,可 @適當使用眾所周知的全部副掃瞄搬送機構。 如此一來,基板搬送機構40係藉由將基板12往副掃瞄 方向搬送,而相對於基板12可使噴頭單元3 6往副掃瞄方向 來相對地移動。 如以上所述,噴頭移動機構38及基板搬送機構40係可 使噴頭單元36以相對於基板12而言往主掃瞄方向及副掃瞄 方向來相對地移動,且可實現以噴頭單元36的噴墨頭34對 基板12進行2次元掃瞄(XY掃瞄)。此外,在本發明中,噴頭 移動機構38及基板搬送機構40的驅動源若爲可使在製造彩 -85 201006895 色濾光片等的描繪爲正確的話,沒有特別地限制,惟較佳 爲步進式電動機。 此外,噴頭移動機構38係使噴頭單元36在噴墨頭34不 使用時移動至規定的噴頭退避(saved)位置,而在維護時移 動至規定的維護(maintenance)位置。又,規定的噴頭退避 位置、或規定的維護位置係爲壓板32上的基板12以外的位 置、或者爲壓板32以外的位置,更佳係規定的噴頭退避位 置爲壓板32上的基板12以外的位置爲宜,而規定的維護位 置係在壓板32以外的位置爲宜。 此外,所謂的圖示例係藉由噴頭移動機構38之噴頭單 元36往主掃瞄方向的移動及基板搬送機構40之基板12往 副掃瞄方向的搬送,而實現噴頭單元36的噴墨頭34對於基 板12的2次元掃瞄(XY掃瞄),惟本發明係不受限於此,在將 基板12載置固定於做爲支持台的壓板32上時,亦可藉由噴 頭單元掃瞄手段等使噴頭單元36往主掃瞄(X)方向及副掃 瞄(Y)方向移動掃瞄,並對於被固定的基板12進行2次元掃 瞄(XY掃瞄)亦佳。 關於由噴頭單元36之基板的2次元掃瞄,係與用於製造 本發明的彩色濾光片之噴墨描繪方法,一同於後面來詳細 說明。 圖5中係表示在噴墨描繪裝置30中的印墨供給系統50 的槪略構成。 印墨供給系統50係具有:儲存供給至噴墨頭34之印墨 的印墨槽52、連接噴墨頭34與印墨槽52的印墨供給管54、 設置於印墨供給管54途中的過濾器56、覆蓋噴墨頭34之噴 201006895 嘴領域的管底蓋(cap )58、對噴墨頭34的噴嘴面34 a進行清 潔的清潔刮板(cleaning blade)60、連接管底蓋58且對噴 ' 墨頭34進行噴嘴吸引的吸引栗62、回收以吸引泵62吸引之 印墨的回收槽64、透過吸引泵62連接管底蓋58與回收槽64 的印墨回收管66、分枝設置於印墨供給管54且加壓噴墨頭 34的噴嘴壓力室(沒有圖示)用以進行強制吐出的噴頭加壓 栗68、及對印墨槽52補充印墨的印墨補充系統70。 此外,管底蓋58、清潔刮板60、吸引栗62及噴頭加壓 φ泵68係構成噴墨頭34的維護系統,管底蓋58、回收槽64、 印墨回收管66以及後述之印墨補充系統70的回收印墨補充 管82、過濾器84及濃度檢測部86係構成印墨回收系統。 這裡的印墨供給系統5 0係不僅狹義的指從印墨槽5 2供 給印墨至噴墨頭34的狹義的供給系統,亦包含噴墨頭34的 維護系統、印墨回收系統及印墨補充系統7 0者。 印墨槽52係用以將印墨供給至噴墨頭34的主儲槽,從 製造上述彩色濾光片用的本發明噴墨用印墨開始,用以儲 φ存各種印墨者。此外,在圖示例中,印墨槽52的形態係具 備印墨補充系統70,且在印墨槽52内的印墨殘量變少之情 形中,係採用從印墨補充系統70的補充口(沒有圖示)補充印 墨之方式,惟本發明係不受限於此,亦可採用將印墨槽52 與做爲印墨匣之印墨槽交換之筒匣(cartridge)方式。 在大量生產彩色濾光片之情形等、具備各色、各種類 所有的噴墨頭34及印墨供給系統50、且消耗大量印墨之情 形中,從印墨交換或成本之點而言,印墨補充方式係爲適 宜,但是在少量的印墨消耗、按照使用用途來替換印墨種 -87 - 201006895 類之情形中,以筒匣方式爲適宜。在該筒匣方式之情形中 ,印墨的種類資訊係以條碼(bar code)等來辨識,並按照印 墨種類來進行吐出控制爲佳。 如圖5所示,在聯繫印墨槽52與噴墨頭34之印墨供給管 54的途中,設置有爲了除去異物或氣泡用的過濾器56。過 濾器56的篩網尺寸係與噴墨頭34的噴嘴徑相同、或爲噴嘴 徑以下(一般的話,約20 v m)爲佳。此外,詳細係如後述, 惟可進而在印墨供給管54的途中分枝而設置,且在噴墨頭 34發生印墨的吐出不良之情形中,可設置強制地加壓噴墨 頭34的噴嘴壓力室(沒有圖示)以進行強制吐出用的噴頭加 壓泵68。又,爲了使連接噴墨頭34的部分、例如從噴頭加 壓泵68靠近噴墨頭34側的部分,往噴頭單元36的二次元 (XY方向)移動之際能實現平穩的移動之故,印墨供給管54 係較佳爲軟管。 此外,雖然圖5沒有圖示,亦可以形成設置於噴墨頭34 的附近、或與噴墨頭34成一體的副儲槽之構成。副儲槽係 具有防止噴頭的内壓變動之阻尼(damper)效果及改善再塡 充(refill)之機能。 又,在圖示例的噴墨描繪裝置30中,係具備了含有爲 了能從噴墨頭34的各噴嘴適當地吐出印墨用的、爲了使噴 墨頭34維持適當的吐出狀態用的管底蓋58及清潔刮板60 等之維護單元。此等的維護單元係可藉由沒有圖示之移動 機構而對於噴墨頭34做相對移動,且可按照需要從其規定 的退避位置,移動至有維護位置之噴墨頭34的下方。圖3所 示之噴墨描繪裝置30的情形中,其係在維護單元的退避位 201006895 置、維護位置、或壓板32上之基板12以外的位置,較佳係 在壓板32以外的位置爲適宜。 ' 管底蓋58係以涵蓋噴墨頭34的噴嘴面34a之噴嘴領域 而貼附的,且以做爲噴墨頭34不使用時防止噴嘴的乾燥、 或防止在噴嘴附近的印墨黏度上升之手段而設置的。又, 管底蓋58係爲了回收在噴墨頭34之噴嘴(沒有圖示)的吐出 狀態之檢査及/或爲了解除吐出不良的預備吐出(以下,亦稱 爲模擬吐出)、或回收來自噴頭加壓泵68之噴嘴的強制性吐 φ出、或回收在由吸引泵62之噴墨頭34進行噴嘴吸引之際所 吐出之印墨之故,又爲了使吸引泵62之噴嘴吸引爲可能的 、且回收所吸引之印墨之故,管底蓋58係以涵蓋噴嘴面34a 的方式貼附於噴墨頭34而使用。 該管底蓋58係在維護位置,藉由沒有圖示之昇降機構 ,對於噴墨頭34進行相對地昇降變位。昇降機構係在電源 關閉(OFF)時或描繪待機時,將管底蓋58上升至規定的上升 位置,且藉由使其與噴墨頭34密合,就可以使得噴嘴面34a @的噴嘴領域變得爲管底蓋58所涵蓋。 清潔刮板60係做爲噴墨頭34之噴嘴面34a的清掃手段 而設置的,且以橡膠等的彈性構件所構成,在維護位置中 ,藉由沒有圖示之刮板移動機構而可在噴墨頭34的印墨吐 出面(噴嘴面34 a)滑動。在噴嘴面34a附著了印墨液滴或異 物之情形中,藉由使清潔刮板60滑動噴嘴面34 a來擦拭噴嘴 面34a,就可以使噴嘴面34a變得清淨。 吸引泵62係藉由印墨回收管66而相連管底蓋58。該吸 引泵62係在初期將印墨往噴墨頭34之各噴嘴進行裝塡時、 -89 201006895 或者在長時間停止後的開始使用時,爲了使管底蓋5 8抵接 噴墨頭34的噴嘴面34a以進行吸引動作(噴嘴吸引動作),及 爲了吸出除去因黏度上升而固化之變質印墨而使用的。此 外,吸引泵62係將吸出除去之變質印墨往回收槽64送液而 回收。 又,在印字中或待機中,於特定噴嘴的使用頻度變低 ,且該噴嘴附近的印墨黏度係爲上升之情形下,爲了排出 黏度上升而變質的印墨,而對著管底蓋5 8進行預備吐出。 然而,即使從噴墨頭34的各噴嘴進行預備吐出,各噴嘴的 吐出狀態之檢査結果,亦有吐出不良的噴嘴係爲存在之情 形。 像這樣即使預備吐出而吐出不良噴嘴無法回復至可容 易吐出之情形、亦即容易吐出不良沒有解除之情形下,例 如即使在噴墨頭34内(壓力室内)的印墨混入氣泡之情形、或 於噴嘴内印墨變爲高黏度或者固化而成爲變質印墨之情形 下,使管底蓋58抵接噴墨頭34,而吸引泵62係藉由吸弓丨( 噴嘴吸弓丨)以除去壓力室内的(混入氣泡)印墨、或高黏度的 或者被固化的變質印墨所使用的。當然,在該情形下,吸 引泵62亦會將吸引除去的氣泡混入印墨或變質印墨往回收 槽64送液而回收。 噴頭加壓泵68係與連接至噴墨頭34之印墨供給管54 分枝而設置的。該噴頭加壓泵6 8係與上述之吸引泵62同樣 地,在初期裝塡印墨時、或者長時間停止後的開始使用時 ,在即使預備吐出也不容易解除吐出不良之情形等中,是 爲了加壓噴墨頭34之噴嘴的壓力室,而將壓力室内的氣泡 201006895 混入印墨、或含有噴嘴内的變質印墨之印墨,從各噴嘴強 ' 制性地吐出(進行強制吐出)》在該情形下,亦可將管底蓋58 • 抵接噴墨頭34,且藉由噴頭加壓栗68來接受強制吐出之氣 泡混入印墨或含有變質印墨之印墨,並透過吸引泵62及印 墨回收管66來送液至回收槽64而進行回收。 此外,吸引泵62與噴頭加壓泵68由於具有同樣的機能 ,可僅具備任何一方,亦可如圖示例般具有兩者。 回收槽64是爲了回收預備吐出的印墨、藉由吸引泵62 φ 而吸引除去的印墨或變質印墨、藉由噴頭加壓泵68而強制 性地吐出的氣泡混入印墨或含有噴嘴内的變質印墨之印墨 ,來保管爲回收印墨。 此外,於該回收槽64所回收、保管且成爲規定量之回 收印墨係可以廢棄,但是如後所述,在送至印墨補充系統 7 〇且檢測、評價印墨濃度、導電度等的印墨特性之後,可 按照其評價結果,爲了製造彩色濾光片來將其再調液成可 再可使用的印墨之後,而被補充至印墨槽52爲佳。 q 可是,當噴墨頭34在連續某段時間以上沒有吐出之狀 態時,噴嘴附近的印墨溶媒蒸發而使得噴嘴附近的印墨黏 度變高,即使吐出驅動用的壓力發生手段(沒有圖示)動作了 ,也變得不能從噴嘴吐出印墨。因此,在這樣的狀態之前( 藉由壓力發生手段的動作可將印墨吐出之黏度的範圍内中) ,可對著成爲接受印墨的管底蓋58來使壓力發生手段動作 ,以進行使黏度上升之噴嘴附近的印墨吐出的「預備吐出 」。又,在藉由做爲噴嘴面3 4 a的清掃手段所設置之清潔刮 板60等的擦拭器(wiper)來清掃噴嘴面34a的污垢之後,爲 201006895 了防止藉由該擦拭器滑動擦拭動作而使異物混入噴嘴内, 亦可進行預備吐出。此外,預備吐出亦有稱爲「模擬吐出 」、「空吐出」、「沖洗」、「唾吐」等之情形。 又,於噴墨頭34的噴嘴或壓力室内混入了氣泡、噴嘴 内的印墨之黏度上升超過某水準時,在上述預備吐出中爲 了使印墨能夠吐出,係如上所述進行由吸引泵62之吸引動 作或由噴頭加壓泵68之噴頭加壓動作。 亦即,在噴墨頭34的噴嘴或壓力室的印墨内混入氣泡 之情形、或者噴嘴内的印墨黏度上升至某水準以上之情形 中,即使動作了壓力發生手段,亦變得無法從噴嘴來吐出 印墨。在這樣的情形中,可使管底蓋58與噴墨頭34的噴嘴 面34 a抵接,來進行以吸引泵62吸引於壓力室内混入氣泡之 印墨、或吸引增黏印墨或固化印墨的動作,或者利用噴頭 加壓泵68來進行強制性地加壓壓力室内而從噴嘴使其強制 性地吐出之動作。 但是,上述的吸引動作或噴頭加壓之強制吐出動作由 於係對於壓力室内的印墨全體進行,所以印墨消耗量很大 。因此,黏度上升較少之情形儘可能進行預備吐出爲佳。 此外,圖5中所說明之管底蓋5 8具有能做爲吸引手段之機能 的同時,當然也能夠做爲預備吐出的接受印墨之機能。 又,管底蓋58的内側係藉由間隔壁而分割成對應噴嘴 列的複數個區域時,此等被隔開的各個區域係可利用選擇 器(selector)等而形成能選擇性吸引之構成爲佳。 接著,印墨補充系統70係如圖5所示,具有:儲存濃縮 印墨之濃縮印墨補充槽72、儲存稀釋液之稀釋液補充槽74 201006895 、檢測印墨槽52的印墨濃度之濃度檢測部76、檢測印墨槽 '52的印墨儲存量之水平檢測部78,以及接受來自濃度檢測 • 部76的檢測濃度及來自水平檢測部78的印墨儲存量的資訊 ,以控制來自濃縮印墨補充槽72的濃縮印墨之補充量及來 自稀釋液補充槽74的稀釋液之補充量的補充控制部80。 又,在圖5所示之印墨補充系統70中,印墨槽52與回收 槽64係利用回收印墨補充管82而相連接的。在該回收印墨 補充管82的途中,設置了用以將被回收至回收槽64内之回 φ收印墨中所含有的固化印墨等的變質印墨去除用的過濾器 84,而在回收印墨補充管82接近印墨槽52那一側設置了濃 度檢測部86。此處,補充控制部80亦可接受來自濃度檢測 部86的回收印墨之檢測濃度的資訊,而加入濃縮印墨的補 充量及稀釋液的補充量,以控制來自回收槽64的回收印墨 補充量。 濃縮印墨補充槽72係塡充濃縮印墨(高濃度印墨)的儲 槽,且具備將濃縮印墨補充槽72内的濃縮印墨供給至印墨 _槽52的泵(沒有圖示)等,並根據來自補充控制部80的指示 ,將濃縮印墨補充至印墨槽5 2內。 另一方面,稀釋液補充槽74係具有塡充補充印墨之際 做爲印墨稀釋液使用之溶媒的儲槽,及將稀釋液供給至印 墨槽52的泵等,並根據來自補充控制部80的指示,將稀釋 液補充至印墨槽52內。 此處,在本發明中,於濃縮印墨的濃度係沒有特別地 限制,若爲比印墨的目標濃度要高的高濃度爲佳。較佳的 色材量係在1.5倍~5倍的濃度範圍、更佳係2倍~4倍的濃度 -93 - 201006895 範圍。亦即,補充用的規定濃度的印墨係可使用比印墨的 目標濃度要高的高濃度印墨。又,稀釋液亦沒有特別地限 制,亦可使用比印墨的目標濃度要低的低濃度印墨。亦即 ,在本發明中,濃縮印墨及稀釋液係可使用含有與印墨的 目標濃度相比爲高濃度之印墨及相比爲低濃度之印墨,且 彼此濃度不同的複數個規定濃度之印墨來進行補充。 濃度檢測部76係使用光學的檢測手段來檢測印墨的濃 度,以供給至補充控制部80。 例如,在噴墨描繪裝置30的印墨供給系統50中,印墨 供給管54係具有一部份以玻璃等的光透過性構件所形成之 透過部,而濃度檢測部76係以受光元件測定來自發光元件 所射出之測定光入射至光透過部,並透過光透過部之透過 光的光量。濃度檢測部76係具有以實驗等預先作成的且顯 示透過光的測定結果與印墨濃度之關係的檢查表(LUT),並 使用該LUT,以求得來自透過光的測定結果之印墨濃度。或 者,改變LUT,利用以透過光的測定結果爲參數之演算式, 以求得印墨的濃度。 此外,在本發明,濃度檢測部7 6中的印墨濃度之檢測 方法或手段係不限制於光學的方法或手段,可利用各種的 方法或手段,例如亦可檢測印墨槽52内的印墨導電度等的 印墨特性,而求得印墨濃度。此外,在本發明中,印墨的 濃度係從可直接地且能檢測到高精度等之點而言,使用如 此的光學濃度檢測方法或手段爲佳。 水平檢測部78係檢測印墨槽52内的印墨水平(印墨的 液面高度、亦即印墨的量),以供給至補充控制部80。亦即 201006895 ,在圖示例中,藉由檢測印墨槽5 2内的印墨水平,來檢測 印墨供給系統50内的印墨量。 • 在本發明中,印墨水平的檢測手段或方法係沒有特別 地限制,可利用使用電極棒等之電氣的水平檢測手段、使 用浮標的水平檢測手段、超音波式的水平檢測手段、靜電 容量式的水平檢測手段、或使用此等手段之檢測方法等、 眾所周知的各種手段或方法。又,不檢測印墨水平,亦可 藉由印墨槽内的印墨重量的測定等,直接地檢測在印墨槽 @ 52内的印墨量。 補充控制部80係在對印墨槽52進行印墨補充之際,接 受來自濃度檢測部76及8 6的印墨及回收印墨的濃度之資訊 、以及來自水平檢測部78的印墨槽52内的印墨量資訊,以 決定濃縮印墨及稀釋液的補充量、或回收印墨、濃縮印墨 及稀釋液的補充量,並用以分別指示濃縮印墨對於濃縮印 墨補充槽72的補充量、稀釋液對於稀釋液補充槽74的補充 量、回收印墨對於回收槽64的補充量。 φ 此外,在使用本發明之記錄裝置10中,印墨補充的時 機係沒有特別地限制,例如可在規定的時間、各個期間、 或每次對規定片數的基板進行描繪等自動地進行,可依照 以水平檢測部78所檢測之印墨槽52内的印墨量來自動地進 行、可依照觀察所描繪之畫素的操作者等的判斷而輸入的 指示來進行,其係具有多數的時機決定手段,並可選擇性 地進行。 圖3~圖5所示之噴墨描繪裝置係基本上如以上所述而 構成的,以下係說明該噴墨描繪裝置的作用及藉由噴墨描 -9 5 - 201006895 繪裝置用以製造彩色濾光片的噴墨描繪方法。 圖6係爲表示在圖3~圖5所示之噴墨描繪裝置中,做爲 用以製造彩色濾光片之描繪製程所實施的噴墨描繪方法中 ,於描繪開始前的一實施形態之流程的流程圖。 首先,如圖6所示,在步驟S 1 2 0中,係利用圖3所示之 噴墨描繪裝置30,藉由沒有圖示之基板供給手段,透過基 板搬送機構40以供給於壓板32上形成有隔壁14之基板12 。接著,在步驟S122中,所供給之基板12係藉由基板搬送 機構40的輸送軋輥46及壓延軋輥48搬送至壓板32上,使其 定位於其規定的位置後停止,並藉由例如吸附等將基板12 安裝、固定於壓板32上。其次,在步驟S124中,係使用基 板12上的對準標記來採取基板校準(alignment),並設定描 繪起始位置。 另一方面,在步驟S130中,如圖3所示,藉由噴頭移動 機構38驅動驅動旋桿42並使噴頭單元36沿著導軌43移動 ,並使噴頭單元36移動至基板12的領域或壓板32的領域以 外、用以進行檢査噴墨頭34的吐出狀態用之維護位置(吐出 檢査位置;沒有圖示),且如圖5所示,使噴墨頭34的噴嘴 面34a與管底蓋58成對向。此時,噴頭單元36係被移動至 與管底蓋58成對向之規定位置。 接著,在步驟S132中,使管底蓋58上升與噴墨頭34的 噴嘴面34 a抵接,並從各噴嘴吐出印墨以進行印墨的吐出檢 測。該印墨的吐出檢測、亦即吐出狀態的檢査,係可對於 在管底蓋58内於噴墨頭34的各噴嘴所設置的光感測器、例 如發光受光元件,檢測吐出印墨液滴的有無而進行爲佳。 -96 - 201006895 或者,亦可在噴墨頭34的各噴嘴計測吐出印墨液滴的量, ' 並根據該量是否在預先設定的規格、亦即規定範圍内,就 • 可以檢査各噴嘴的吐出狀態。此外,吐出檢測之際的吐出 印墨係透過印墨回收管66而回收至回收槽64。 其次,在步驟S134中,判斷噴墨頭34的全部噴嘴是否 有在預先設定之規格内、亦即判斷是否有在適當的吐出狀 熊。 在該步驟S134的判斷中,噴墨頭34的全部噴嘴是有在 φ 上述設定規格内(適當的吐出狀態)之情形(Y)則移至步驟 S126,將管底蓋58從噴墨頭34的噴嘴面34a卸下,如圖3 所示,藉由噴頭移動機構38驅動驅動旋桿42並使噴頭單元 36沿著導軌43移動,而使噴頭單元3 6移動至由基板校準之 基板12上所規定之描繪起始位置。 '其次,在步驟S128中,對於基板12上進行描繪。 另一方面,在上述步驟S1 34的判斷中,在即使噴墨頭 34的1個噴嘴是在上述設定規格(適當的吐出狀態)以外的情 φ形(N)中,則移至步驟S136,從噴墨頭34的各噴嘴進行模擬 吐出(預備吐出)。 接著,在步驟S138中,與步驟S132同様地進行在噴墨 頭34的各噴嘴中的印墨吐出檢測,且檢查各噴嘴的吐出狀 態。此外,模擬吐出及吐出檢測之際的吐出印墨係透過印 墨回收管66而回收至回收槽64內(參照圖5J。 其次,在步驟S140中,與步驟S134同樣地進行噴墨頭 34的全部噴嘴是否有在上述設定規格内的判斷,有在上述 設定規格内之情形(Y)中,則移至步驟S 1 2 6,如上所述,將 -97 - 201006895 管底蓋58從噴墨頭34的噴嘴面34 a卸下,藉由噴頭移動機 構38驅動驅動旋桿42並使噴頭單元36沿著導軌43移動(參 照圖3),並使噴頭單元36移動至由基板校準之基板12上所 規定的描繪起始位置。 其次,在步驟S128,對於基板12上進行描繪。 另一方面,在上述步驟S140的判斷中,即使噴墨頭34 的1個噴嘴是在上述設定規格以外的情形(N)中,則移至步驟 S142,噴墨頭34的各噴嘴係藉由吸引泵62來吸引各噴嘴内 的印墨,或藉由噴頭加壓泵68來對於各噴嘴進行噴頭加壓 ,以使得各噴嘴内的印墨被強制性地吐出(參照圖5)。此外 ,亦可進行藉由吸引泵62之噴嘴吸引動作及藉由噴頭加壓 栗68之強制吐出動作兩者。 接著,在步驟S144中,將管底蓋58從噴墨頭34的噴嘴 面3 4a卸下,利用清潔刮板60進行噴嘴面34a的擦拭,擦取 附著於噴嘴面34a之固化印墨或高黏度印墨等的變質印墨 ,以清潔噴嘴面34a(參照圖5)。 然後,在步驟S146中,與步驟S136同樣地從噴墨頭34 的各噴嘴進行模擬吐出。 接著,在步驟S148中,與步驟S138同様地進行在噴墨 頭34的各噴嘴中的印墨吐出檢測,並檢查各噴嘴的吐出狀 態。此外,噴嘴吸引動作及/或強制吐出動作、模擬吐出及 •吐出檢測之際的吐出印墨係透過印墨回收管66而回收至回 收槽64內(參照圖5)。 其次,在步驟S150中,與步驟S140同樣地進行噴墨頭 34的全部噴嘴是否有在上述設定規格内的判斷’有在上述 201006895 設定規格内之情形(Y)則移至步驟SI 26,如上所述,將管底 蓋58從噴墨頭34的噴嘴面34a卸下,藉由噴頭移動機構38 • 驅動驅動旋桿42並使噴頭單元3 6沿著導軌43移動,並使噴 頭單元36移動至由基板校準之基板12上的描繪起始位置( 參照圖3)。 其次,在步驟S128中,對於基板12上進行描繪。 另一方面,在上述步驟S150的判斷中,即使噴墨頭34 的1個噴嘴是在上述設定規格以外的情形(N)下,則又再回到 U 步驟S142,進行上述藉由吸引泵62之噴嘴吸引動作及/或 藉由噴頭加壓泵68之強制吐出動作,並依序進行步驟S 144 中藉由清潔刮板60的噴嘴擦拭、步驟S1 46中的模擬吐出、 步驟S1 48中的吐出檢測、及步驟S1 50中的全部噴嘴是否在 上述設定規格内的判斷。 在步驟S150中,全部噴嘴是在上述設定規格内之情形 (Y)則移至步驟S126,同樣地使噴頭單元36移動至由基板校 準之基板12上的描繪起始位置(參照圖3),在步驟S128中, _係對於基板12上進行描繪,且在即使噴墨頭34的1個噴嘴是 在上述設定規格以外的情形(N)下,則再回到上述的步驟 S 1 42 > 重複進行步驟 S142、S144、S146、S 148¾ S 150 的各動作,直至全部噴嘴爲在上述設定規格内(Y)。此外, 其重複次數超過預先設定之規定次數的情形係設爲錯誤, 停止該描繪方法的實施爲佳。 此外,在步驟S12 8的描繪步驟,如圖3所示之噴墨描繪 裝置30中,藉由噴頭移動機構3 8—面使噴頭單元3 6往主掃 瞄(X)方向移動(掃瞄),一面從噴墨頭3 4吐出印墨18的液滴 201006895 至基板12的規定位置、亦即基板12上的隔壁14間的規定凹 部16來進行描繪,以形成彩色濾光片的畫素(未硬化畫素印 墨 1 8a) ° 如此使噴頭單元36在基板12的描繪領域(隔壁14形 成的領域)主掃瞄(X)方向從始端至終端及/或從終端至始端 進行移動掃瞄,並完成主掃瞄方向的畫素形成。 之後,解除基板12對壓板32的吸附固定,且藉由基 板移動機構40使輸送軋輥46迴轉,並使基板12僅往副 掃瞄方向搬送移動規定距離(例如,描繪領域部分的長度 △ Y(彩色濾光片中畫素盒的1節距(單程 >或2節距(往返))>, 而停止在壓板32上,且又使基板12吸附固定於壓板32 上。藉此,到達基板12的主掃瞄方向之始端或終端的噴頭 單元36係爲往副掃瞄方向移動一定量(描繪領域部分的長 度ΔΥ)之狀態。 繼續,在如此吸附固定於壓板32上之基板12,從主 掃瞄方向的描繪起始位置開始,如上所述,又藉由噴頭移 動機構38使噴頭單元36往主掃瞄(X)方向移動,且藉由噴 墨頭34進行描繪,並結束在基板12的主掃瞄方向的描繪。 然後,又重複解除基板12對壓板32的吸附、往基板 12的副掃瞄方向僅規定距離ΔΥ的搬送、基板12對壓板 32的吸附固定、藉由噴墨頭34往基板12之主掃瞄方向的 描繪,且一邊使基板12從副掃瞄方向的始端至終端在描繪 領域部分每長度AY移動、一邊使噴頭單元36往主掃瞄(X) 方向移動,根據來自噴墨頭噴嘴的吐出信號吐出印墨,且 對於基板12的全面以每次1色進行描繪,以形成彩色濾光 100- 201006895 片的畫素(未硬化畫素印墨18a)。 ' 如此一來,關於彩色濾光片的其他顔色,亦可重複在 - 基板12上一邊使噴頭單元36往主掃瞄方向移動、一邊進 行印墨的吐出,然後使基板12往副掃瞄方向移動一定距離 移動,而依序在基板12上描繪其他顏色來形成彩色濾光片 的畫素(未硬化畫素印墨18a),而可就彩色濾光片的全色來 形成全畫素(未硬化畫素印墨18a}。 此外,在本發明,噴頭單元36的噴墨頭34之噴嘴配 φ 列係沒有特別地限制,可爲單列、亦可爲複數列,且各噴 嘴列的噴嘴數以沒有特別地限制,可爲1個、亦可爲複數 個。又,藉由具有這樣的噴嘴配列之噴墨頭34來描繪彩色 濾光片的畫素盒或畫素的描繪形式係沒有特別地限制,無 論是怎樣的形式均可。 例如,如圖9 (a)所示,使用於噴嘴部具有4列噴嘴列 且吐出R印墨之噴墨頭34R、於噴嘴部具有4列噴嘴列且 吐出G印墨之噴墨頭34G、與於噴嘴部具有4列噴嘴列且 _吐出G印墨之噴墨頭34B,相對於其各噴墨頭34R、34G、 34B的各噴嘴列之噴嘴間隔,如圖9(b)所示,於彩色濾光 片中各色的1個畫素盒(畫素)20R、20G、20B内所應該描 繪的圓點間隔小的情形中,噴墨頭34R、34G、34B係以 其主掃瞄(X)方向與彩色濾光片中畫素盒的長邊方向成正交 的方式來進行掃瞄,從1個噴墨頭開始對於彩色濾光片的1 個畫素盒,使用4列每列2個噴嘴、合計共8個噴嘴開始 吐出印墨液滴,而在彩色濾光片的1個畫素盒中形成8個 圓點,亦可形成各色的各個畫素盒(亦即畫素盒20R、20G、 201006895 20B)。又,如圖9(c)所示,使用具有於噴嘴部配置吐出R 印墨之噴嘴的噴嘴列35R、配置吐出G印墨之噴嘴的噴嘴 列3 5G、吐出B印墨之噴嘴的噴嘴列3 5B共3列的噴嘴列 之噴墨頭34’,噴墨頭34’係以其主掃瞄(X)方向與彩色濾光 片中畫素盒的長邊方向成一致的方式進行掃瞄’相對於彩 色濾光片的1個畫素盒,使用1列噴嘴列(亦即噴嘴列35R、 35G、35B中的任一列噴嘴列)中的1個噴嘴,從1個噴嘴 開始共合計8個來吐出印墨液滴,亦可在圖9(d)所示之彩 色濾光片的1個畫素盒、亦即在圖9(d)中與畫素盒20R、 20G、20B、20R’之中對應的1個畫素盒中形成8個圓點。 圖9(d)所示之例子中,係表示於彩色濾光片的4個畫素盒 内,3個畫素盒(具體而言,畫素盒20R、20G、20B)係由 分別不同的3種印墨形成每8個的圓點,而圖9(d)的最上 與最下的2個畫素盒(具體而言,畫素盒20R與畫素盒20 R'’) 係表示是利用與圖9(c)所示之噴墨頭34’的噴嘴列35R不 同的噴嘴所形成的,且藉由分別相同種的印墨來形成每8 個的圓點。 此處,使用圖3~圖5所示之噴墨描繪裝置30,藉由圖 6所示之噴墨描繪方法所形成的彩色濾光片之畫素配列(畫 素圖案)的形狀係可形成如圖7(a)所示之條紋狀、圖7(b)所 示之格子狀、或者圖7(c)所示之三角形配列狀來做爲黑底 形狀,本發明係沒有特別地限制。 又,在描繪、硬化、形成圖7(a) ~圖7(c)所示之彩色濾 光片的色畫素配列(色畫素圖案)之情形中,係形成1色、例 如首先描繪、硬化R的色畫素圖案並形成色畫素20,依順 102 - 201006895 序以每次1色來形成其他顏色,例如以先G、接著B的順 序來描繪硬化形成色畫素圖案,亦可形成全色的色畫素20 ' 的色畫素圖案,最初爲2色以上、例如在依序或同時或每 複數色來描繪RGB 3色的色畫素圖案之後,使被描繪的2 色以上、例如使RGB 3色的色畫素圖案之未硬化畫素18a 硬化,複數色或全色的色畫素圖案之硬化色畫素20者亦可 形成。 如此,在彩色濾光片的製造中,例如因RGB等的3原 φ 色的畫素配列、亦即由於畫素圖案爲規則的,與利用噴墨 頭描繪之情形相比,或與此等不同,由無規的色畫素圖案 所構成的一般影像係由噴墨頭中所使用的噴嘴來決定的, 所以在噴墨頭的全部噴嘴之中會發生有長時間沒有使用的 噴嘴。爲此,在本發明彩色濾光片之製法中的噴墨描繪方 法,如圖6所示,檢查噴墨頭的各噴嘴的吐出狀態,且一 面確認吐出、一面實施噴墨描繪爲佳。 此外,上述之實施形態中,係使噴頭單元往主掃瞄方 @向及副掃瞄方向移動而形成畫素的,但是不受限於此,例 如亦可使噴頭單元僅往主掃瞄方向移動,而基板則以各一 定距離往副掃瞄方向移動。 又,噴墨頭係爲全行(full line)噴頭,且以噴頭單元進 行一次掃瞄,可在印刷版原版的全面形成畫素。此處,噴 墨頭爲全行噴頭之情形,係可掃瞄噴墨頭、亦可掃瞄基板。 圖5所示之例子中,印墨槽52係藉由印墨供給管54 與直接噴墨頭34相接而構成的,惟本發明係不受限於此, 爲了賦予防止噴頭的内壓變動之阻尼效果及改善再塡充之 -103 - 201006895 機能,亦可形成在印墨槽52與噴墨頭34之間設置有供給 副儲槽之構成。 圖8中係槪略地表示適用於圖3及圖4所示噴墨插繪 裝置之印墨供給系統的其他實施形態之槪略構成,以取代 圖5所示之印墨供給系統。 如圖8所示,噴墨描繪裝置31及於其中所使用的印墨 供給系統90係基本上具有:噴墨頭(吐出噴頭)12、管底蓋 58、印墨槽52、供給副儲槽92、回收槽64、補充槽94。 圖8所示之噴墨描繪裝置31及印墨供給系統90係具 有圖3~圖5所示之噴墨描繪裝置30及印墨供給系統50、 與供給副儲槽92,除了回收槽64與印墨槽52係以溢流管 98相接之點爲不同以外,由於具有相同的構成,所以相同 的構成要素係賦予相同的參照符號,且省略其詳細的說 明。此外,圖8中沒有表示的噴墨描繪裝置31之掃瞄系統 係可爲適用於圖3及圖4所示之噴墨描繪裝置30的掃瞄系 統者,亦可應用以往眾所周知的掃瞄系統。 印墨供給系統90係主要是由:將印墨槽52的印墨供 給至噴墨頭34的狹義印墨供給系統,與回收、再利用於管 底蓋58沖洗之印墨用的印墨回收系統而構成的。印墨供給 系統則是由主要是印墨泵9 6、供給副儲槽9 2、連接印墨杲 96與供給副儲槽92之第1印墨供給管54a、連接供給副 儲槽92與噴墨頭34之第2印墨供給管54b,及具有做爲 使供給副儲槽92内的印墨溢流且送液回收至印墨槽52之 第3印墨回收管(流路)98的機能、且在供給副儲槽92的内 部中開口之溢流管98a而構成的。又,印墨回收系統係主 104 - 201006895 要是由回收槽64、連接管底蓋58與回收槽64之第1印墨 回收管66,及具有做爲使回收槽64内的印墨溢流且送液 ' 回收至印墨槽52之第2印墨回收管1〇〇的機能、且在回 收槽64的内部中開口之溢流管100a而構成的。此外,第 2印墨回收管100(溢流管100a)中係爲了檢測於内部流動 的回收印墨之濃度,而安裝了計測回收印墨穿透率之濃度 檢測部86。又’在供給副儲槽92中安裝了大氣開放閥1〇2 與壓力調整閥104。成爲印墨供給流路之印墨供給管或成 φ爲印墨回收流路之印墨回收管,係可由例如導管或具有可 撓性之管子等所構成。 此外,圖8係主要顯示本發明的特徴部位,除了噴墨 描繪裝置31及印墨供給系統90爲圖示以外,當然還具有 例如驅動噴墨頭34使印墨液滴吐出之驅動器、噴墨頭34 的掃瞄手段、或在與噴墨頭34成對面之規定路徑上、往與 後述之噴嘴列方向(行方向)成正交之方向來搬送(掃瞄搬送) 記錄媒體P之掃瞄搬送手段等眾所周知的噴墨描繪裝置所 @具有的各種構成要素。 管底蓋58係在印墨的循環停止時、長時間沒有進行描 繪之間,安裝於噴墨頭34的噴嘴側,於噴墨頭34的全部 噴嘴中斷與外氣連通之狀態下,可防止因爲殘存於噴嘴之 印墨的蒸發所致的乾燥黏著。這樣的管底蓋58係可使用於 各種的噴墨記錄裝置通常使用的各式各樣者。 印墨槽52係混合了來自補充槽94的溶媒、濃縮印墨、 來自回收槽64所回收的印墨,且具有使液體物性、光學特 性爲固定的機能及保管印墨的機能。印墨槽52較佳係具有 105 201006895 防止染料析出用的攪拌手段、提昇印墨吐出安定性用的溫 度調節手段。 第1印墨供給管54a上係配置了從印墨槽52送液印墨 至供給副儲槽92用的印墨泵96。印墨泵96的送液量係設 定成比從供給副儲槽92往噴墨頭34的印墨供給量要多。 供給副儲槽92係第1印墨供給管54a及第2印墨供 給管54b爲相連接的密閉型印墨槽,且配置成在鉛直方向 比噴墨頭34更下方的位置。與供給副儲槽92相接的第2 印墨供給管54b之另一他端則連接了噴墨頭34。 供給副儲槽92中係儲存了藉由第1印墨供給管54a 從印墨槽52所供給的印墨,且使所儲存的印墨透過第2印 墨供給管54b供給至噴墨頭34。 又,供給副儲槽92内係配置了成爲第3印墨回收管 98之溢流管98a,且第2印墨供給管54b係在比溢流管 9 8a的上端爲更下方的位置相連接。圖示例中,與第2印 墨供給管54 b的連接部係爲設置在供給副儲槽92的底面之 構成。 供給副儲槽92中所儲存的印墨係藉由於噴嘴彎液面的 表面張力、或供給副儲槽壓力調整機構來加壓供給副儲槽 92,並從第2印墨供給管54b供給至噴墨頭34。 又,供給副儲槽92係由於從印墨泵96所供給的印墨 即使超過了溢流管9 8a的高度,亦會從溢流管98a溢流排 出,所以儲槽内的液面的高度能保持一定。其結果,供給 副儲槽92若在大氣開放下,能使供給副儲槽92的壓力保 持一定。 10 6 201006895 此外,從溢流管98溢流排出的印墨係經過第3印墨回 收管98,回到印墨槽52內,並再次供應循環。 • 回收槽64係與管底蓋58連接之密閉型的印墨槽,且 配置在比噴墨頭34在鉛直方向要更下方的位置。如前所 述,分別使第1印墨回收管66的另一端連接至管底蓋58, 而使第2印墨回收管100的另一端連接至印墨槽52。 回收槽64係儲存藉由沖洗、模擬吐出而排出管底蓋 58之印墨。儲存於回收槽64的印墨係從第2印墨回收管 φ 100返回到印墨槽52。 印墨的補充槽94係將消耗的印墨補充至印墨槽52之 密閉型的儲槽,且藉由印墨補充管106與印墨槽52連接。 補充槽94係以印墨槽52内的印墨爲規定濃度且形成 規定量的方式,補充印墨至印墨槽52內。補充槽94的構 成係沒有特別地限制,例如具有如圖5所示之印墨補充系 統70般的儲存濃縮印墨(高濃度印墨)之濃縮儲槽、與儲存 印墨稀釋液之稀釋液儲槽,亦可以規定濃度且形成規定量 @的方式,將規定量的濃縮印墨及稀釋液補充至印墨槽內。 此外,稀釋液若使用溶媒爲佳。 在噴墨描繪裝置31及印墨供給系統90,印墨的補充 時機方面係沒有特別地限制。具有例如可在每次描繪規定 片數等時自動進行、可在檢測印墨槽52内的印墨量持來進 行、可依照觀察所描繪畫素的操作者等的判斷所輸入之指 示來進行的複數個時機決定手段,亦可選擇性地進行。 又,即使是濃縮印墨及稀釋液的補充量的決定方法係 沒有特別地限制。例如,除了印墨預料蒸發量之外,利用 201006895 從畫素資訊等所檢測之總印墨吐出次數、進行循環之印墨 的濃度測定結果、印墨槽5 2内的印墨量等,來預測印墨的 消耗量,亦可以印墨槽52内的印墨Q規定濃度爲規定量的 方式,來決定印墨的補充量。 稀釋液、濃縮印墨、回收印墨的混合方法係可用以下 的方法來進行。在形成從回收槽64至印墨槽52的流路之 第3印墨回收管100的途中設定做爲印墨濃度測定區域的 透明部分,且在該部分配置濃度檢測部86。在濃度檢測部 86中,藉由測定測定區域内的印墨光穿透率,來計算回收 至印墨槽之印墨的溶媒蒸發量。光穿透率與溶媒蒸發量的 關係係可預先從事前測定染料濃度不同的印墨與光穿透率 的關係、或光穿透率exp(-a ·ί)(α :吸收係數(於染料濃度 的比例)、t:厚度)而算出。爲測定穿透率,在印墨濃度測 定區域係具備了光源、受光感測器及玻璃等的透明構件之 流路。流路係針對測定光透過的部分而言,以平面爲所期 望的,且表面爲AR塗層、對於光軸從垂直到傾斜數度係爲 所期望的。以防止因反射光所引起的測定精度惡化。 根據所回收印墨的濃度來決定稀釋液、濃縮印墨、回 收印墨的混合比。 圖8所示之噴墨描繪裝置31及印墨供給系統90,基 本上係如上述般而構成的。 如以上所述製造的彩色濾光片係能適合做爲液晶顯示 器、電子報或有機EL·等的彩色影像顯示裝置之彩色濾光片 使用。 以上,關於本發明的噴墨用印墨、彩色濾光片及其製 108 201006895 法、以及使用它之液晶顯示器與影像顯示裝置,係列舉各 * 種實施形態或實施例來詳細說明’惟本發明係不受限於上 • 述實施例、實施形態’只要在不脫離本發明要旨之範圍內 ,當然可以進行各種的改良或變更。 實施例 以下係列舉實施例來更具體地說明本發明。以下的實 施例所示之材料、試藥、比例、機器、操作等係可在不脫 出本發明的範圍內做適當的變更。因此,本發明的範圍係 @不受限制於以下所示之具體例。此外,以下的實施例中, 只要沒有特別地限制,「%」及「份」係表示「質量%」及 「質量份」,所謂的分子量係表示重量平均分子量。 (隔壁形成用的濃色組成物的調製> 濃色組成物K1係可藉由首先秤取表1中所記載之量的 κ顔料分散物1、丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸酯,於溫度2 4 °c (±2 °C)下混合且以150rpm攪拌10分鐘,進而一邊攪拌、一 邊稱取添加表1中所記載之量的甲基乙基酮、黏結劑2、氫 _醌單甲基醚、DPHA液、2,4-雙(三氯甲基)-6-[4’-(N,N-雙 二乙氧基羰基甲基)胺基- 3’-溴基苯基]-s -三畊、界面活性劑 1,且依序在溫度25t (±2°C )下添加,並在溫度40°C (±2°C ) 下、以150rpm攪拌30分鐘而得到。此外,表1中所記載 之量係質量份,詳細內容係以下的組成。 <K顔料分散物1>、 •碳黑(德固薩公司製 Nipex35) 13.1% •分散劑(下述化合物1) 0.65% •聚合物(甲基丙烯酸苄酯/甲基丙烯酸酯=72/28莫耳 109 201006895 比的無規共聚物、分子量3.7萬) 6.72% .丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸酯 79.53%For example, the paragraph number of [0108] [0126] or the paragraph number of the special publication No. 2005-3861 [0021 卜 [0074 卜 or the opening paragraph of the special publication 2004-240039 [ The black matrix (so-called resin black matrix) described in 0012 [0021], or the paragraph number [0015] [0020] of the Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-17800, or the paragraph number [0009] of JP-A-2006-10875 A black matrix for inkjet or the like described in [0044]. Further, the partition wall 14 may have a two-layer structure composed of layers each having a black matrix function and a partition function. For example, the paragraph number [0 0 6 7] or [00] of the paragraph number [Ο Ο 5 4 Bu [0 0 5 7], or the special opening '2004-295039] of the Japanese Patent Publication No. 201006895 2004-361491 6 9 or the metal light-shielding film described in paragraph numbers [0068] [0069], [0103], [0109] to [0110] of the Japanese Patent Publication No. 2006-86128, and the resin formed thereon The partition layer to be formed is preferably a two-layer structure composed of a partition (stacking) layer made of a liquid-repellent resin. In the above-described well-known production method of the present invention, it is preferred to use a photosensitive resin transfer material from the viewpoint of cost reduction. The photosensitive resin transfer material is provided with a resin layer having at least a light-shielding property on a temporary support, and the substrate can be rolled to transfer the light-blocking resin layer to the substrate. The photosensitive resin transfer material is preferably formed by using a photosensitive resin transfer material described in JP-A No. 5-72724, that is, using an integrally formed film. In the example of the structure of the integrally formed film, for example, a temporary support/thermoplastic resin layer/intermediate layer/photosensitive resin layer is sequentially laminated (in the present invention, the so-called "photosensitive resin layer" is made of light. It is preferable to use a resin which is hardened and hardened, and it is also called "a resin layer having a light-shielding property when it is light-shielding, and is also called a "colored resin layer" when it is colored into a color). Composition. The temporary support, the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer, the protective film, or the method for producing the transfer material constituting the photosensitive resin transfer material may be, for example, the paragraph number of [0023] [0023] It is suitable for those described in paragraph numbers [0108] to [0126] of JP-A-2007-193090. Further, such a partition wall 14 can perform a process of printing ink in order to prevent color mixing of the ink for inkjet. -77 - 201006895 Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 1, after the partition forming process S102, in the liquid-repellent process S104, the partition 14 on the substrate 12 shown in FIG. 2(b) is subjected to liquid-repellent treatment, That is, the printing ink is processed. Further, such a printing ink processing method is a printing ink processing method described in paragraph numbers [0086] to [0087] of JP-A-2007-187884, and specifically, for example, (1) ink is set. A method of blending a substance into a partition wall (for example, refer to JP-A-2005-36160), and (2) a method of newly providing a dial ink layer (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 5-241011), (3) In the method of applying the plasma treatment to the wall of the partition wall, for example, the method of applying the printing ink material to the wall of the partition wall (for example, refer to Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 10-123500) And (3) preferably, a method of performing ink-jet printing by plasma is applied to the partition formed on the substrate. In addition, the method of treating the printing ink applicable to the method of the present invention is For example, the method of processing the printing ink described in the paragraph No. [0058] of the Japanese Patent Publication No. 2004-361491 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-203803, No. Hei 9-230129, and JP-A No. 9-230 Paragraph No. 127), or paragraph number of the special publication No. 2006-86128 [0074 卜[0110] The method of processing the printing ink described in [0111] [0118], [0130], etc. Further, in the above example, the printing ink is applied to the partition wall 14 on the substrate 12, but the present invention is not In this case, it is also possible to perform the printing ink treatment on the inside of the concave portion 16 on the substrate 12. Further, in the case where the partition wall 14 is provided with the ink repellency, the liquid dispensing process S104 is not required, and even in this case, It is also possible to perform a process of printing the ink in the recess 10 of the 201006895 on the substrate 12. As shown in Fig. 2(e), after the partition 14 and the pixel 20 are formed on the substrate 12, and the color filter 1 is formed, For the purpose of improving the resistance, as shown in Fig. 2(f), an overcoat layer 22 covering all of the pixels 20 and the partition walls 14 as a protective layer can be formed. The protective coating 22 can protect R, G, The pixel 20 and the partition wall 14 of B and the like, and at the same time, the surface is flat. However, it is preferable that the number of processes is increased, and the protective coating layer 22 can be formed by using a resin (OC agent). The resin (OC agent) can be exemplified by, for example, an acrylic resin composition or an epoxy resin composition. A polyimide composition, etc., especially in the visible light field, and the resin component of the inkjet ink is usually composed mainly of an acrylic resin, and is excellent in adhesion, and is composed of an acrylic resin. An example of the protective coating layer is, for example, the one described in paragraph number [0018] [0028] of JP-A-2003-287618, or a commercially available product as a protective coating agent, manufactured by JSR Corporation. OPTOMER SS6699G. The color filter of the present invention may further contain an indium tin oxide (ITO) layer as a transparent conductive film. The formation method of the ITO layer may be, for example, a series low temperature sputtering method, a series high temperature sputtering method, a batch type low temperature sputtering method, a batch type high temperature sputtering method, a vacuum evaporation method, a plasma CVD method, or the like. In particular, in order to reduce damage to the color filter, it is preferred to use a low temperature sputtering method. The color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for image display of a portable terminal device such as a liquid crystal display, a television, a personal computer, a liquid crystal projector, a game machine, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a car navigation machine, etc., in particular, It can be suitably used for the use of color image display' without particular limitation. Further, the color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for an image display device such as an electronic newspaper or an organic EL device, and can be suitably used for a color image display device. Next, a description will be given of a drawing process for a color filter of the present invention, an ink jet drawing method for the same, an ink jet drawing device for carrying it, and an ink jet head for use therefor. 3 is a perspective view showing a part of an embodiment of an ink jet drawing device for performing a drawing process in the method of manufacturing a color filter of the present invention, and FIG. 4 is a portion of the ink jet drawing device shown in FIG. Fig. 5 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of an ink circulation system in the ink jet drawing device shown in Fig. 3. The inkjet drawing device (hereinafter may be referred to simply as the drawing device) 30 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 includes a platen 32 on which the support substrate 12 is placed, and a spray that is provided on the substrate 12 to discharge the ink for manufacturing the color filter. The head unit 36 of the carriage type of the ink head 34 moves on the head plate 12 supported on the pressure plate 32 to move the head unit 36 toward the main scanning direction (the direction indicated by the arrow X in Fig. 3). The mechanism 38 is a substrate transport mechanism that transports the substrate 12 placed on the platen 32 in a sub-scanning direction (direction indicated by an arrow Y in FIGS. 3 and 4) that is substantially orthogonal to the main scanning direction (X direction). 40. An ink supply system 50 for supplying ink to the inkjet head 34 of the head unit 36 (see FIG. 5), and a substrate supply means (not shown) for supplying the substrate 12 to the platen 32 via the substrate transfer mechanism 40. The means can be such that the substrate transfer mechanism 40 can transport the substrate 12 to the platen 32, and the substrate 12 can be supplied to the substrate transfer mechanism 4, whichever is the substrate supply means, and can be, for example, a well-known substrate. Supply means, or 8 0 201006895 is an automatic plate feeding device that automatically supplies the substrate 12 to the platen 32 through the substrate transfer mechanism 40. Here, the platen 32 has a flat plate shape, and the substrate 12 supplied from the substrate supply means is supported on the surface thereof. Here, the surface of the pressure plate 32 is preferably provided by the head unit 36 in the drawing of the air suction hole 36, that is, in the drawing of the ink jet head 34 of the head unit 36, it is preferable to adsorb the substrate 12. Therefore, the planarity of the substrate 12 can be appropriately maintained. Further, when the substrate 12 is transported to the sub-scanning direction (Y direction) by the substrate transport mechanism 40, the friction between the surface of the pressure plate 32 and the back surface of the substrate 12 is small. Further, the pressure plate 32 is attached to a casing (not shown) of the drawing device 30. The head unit 36 is provided with the ink jet head 34 and opposed to the pressure plate 32, and is attached to the head moving mechanism 38, which will be described later. It is supported in a state parallel to and movable from the surface of the platen 32. Further, in the head unit 36, the ink-injection in the ink tank 52 (refer to Fig. 5) of the ink supply system 50 is used to supply the ink-jet. Head 34 The ink supply tube 54. The inkjet head 34 discharges the inkjet ink 18 for manufacturing the above-described color filter of the present invention in accordance with the ink discharge/exit signal of a predetermined color for color filter formation, and is on the substrate. 12 is depicted on the pixel (unhardened pixel 18 a) to form a hardened pixel 20 (see Fig. 2(e) and Fig. 2(f)). Here, the so-called spitting signal is based on the image signal to select The ink is applied to the pixel-forming portion of the color filter to make the discharge signal of the liquid droplets. The inkjet head can use a continuous type or a request for piezoelectric type and heat. In various types of ink jet heads (discharge nozzles) such as a thermal method, a solid method, and an electrostatic attraction method, it is preferable to use a desired type of ink jet head, and it is preferable to use a request type pressure. Electric way inkjet -81 201006895 head. Further, the discharge portions (nozzles) of the ink jet head are not limited to being arranged in a single row, and may be arranged in a plurality of columns or a staggered lattice shape. Further, the nozzle configuration with respect to the ink jet head and the drawing method according to the same are as described later. In addition, the drawing device 30 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 uses one color, for example, a magenta ink to form an R pixel of a color filter, but two or more colors of the color filter are formed. For example, three-color RGB pixels can be sequentially exchanged with ink of different colors by one drawing device 30 to form pixels of other colors, or by using three sets of inks of different colors. The device 30 forms pixels of different colors, or the drawing device 30 shown in FIGS. 3 and 4 may have two or more head units that are movable in the second dimension. Further, in the illustrated example, the head unit 36 is provided with one type of ink jet head 34 that discharges one-color ink, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is also possible to provide two or more colors, for example, three colors. Two or more types of full-color inks of four colors, for example, three or four types of inkjet heads 34 are provided. In this case, for each of the three or four types of inkjet heads 34, each of the ink supply systems 50, that is, three or four ink supplies of three or four colors of full-color ink are respectively supplied. System 50 is necessary and three or four ink supply tubes 54 are coupled to the head unit 36 in accordance with each of them. The head moving mechanism 38 causes the head unit 36 to scan the mover in the main scanning direction (the arrow X direction in FIG. 3), and has a drive screw 42, a guide ail 4 3, and a drive support. The portion 44 and the support portion 45 » the drive screw 42 and the guide rail 43 are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and are orthogonal to the transport direction of the substrate 12 (Y direction in FIG. 3) and the main scan. The direction (X direction in Fig. 3) is arranged in a parallel manner, and the maximum used for 201006895 (the length of the main scanning direction is the longest) is configured such that the substrate 12 is traversed from the left end to the right end thereof. • The drive screw 42 is composed of a female screw portion (not shown) formed in the head unit 36 and a ball screw (not shown) having a male screw portion that is screwed, and is rotated by To move the head unit 36. The guide rails 4 3 are inserted through the through holes formed in the head unit 36, and guide the guide heads so that the posture of the ink jet heads 34 moved by the rotation of the driving rotary lever 42 is constant. φ Further, the drive support portion 44 is provided at one end of the drive screw 42 and the guide rail 43, and the support portion 45 is provided at the other end portion thereof, and the drive rotation is supported in a state of being able to rotate in a forward and reverse direction. The rod 42 supports the guide rail 43 in a non-moving manner. The drive support unit 44 is provided with a drive source (not shown) that can drive a motor or the like that drives the rotary lever 42. Further, the drive support portion 44 and the support portion 45 are supported together with the outer casing of the drawing device 30 (not shown). The head unit 36 is movably supported by driving the rotary lever 42 and the guide rail 43, and the drive shaft 44 is driven to rotate forward and backward by the drive support portion 44, so that it can be guided on the guide rail 43 while facing the main The scanning direction (X direction) moves back and forth (scanning). Further, in order to maintain the posture of the head unit 36, the head moving mechanism 38 may include a plurality of guide rails, and may have other posture maintaining means. Further, the head unit 36 is moved by the guide rail 43 in a predetermined posture in which the ink droplet discharge surface is maintained and the ink droplet discharge surface of the ink jet head 34 is opposed to the pressure plate 32. Here, the moving mechanism of the head unit 36 is not limited to the above-described head moving mechanism 38, and various well-known head moving mechanisms can be used. For example, a rod-shaped member that uses a driving screw as a guide rail or the like may be used, and a guide rope is formed on both sides of the end portion of the head of the ink jet-83 - 201006895, and the guide direction of the winding direction is taken. The rope is configured to move along the rail. Further, a timing belt may be used instead of the guide rope to move it. In this case, a timing belt sprocket can also be used instead of a wire reel. Also, a rack and pinion transmission mechanism can be used. Also, it can be self-propelled. Further, a linear motor (liner motor) may be used. The substrate transfer mechanism 40 transports the substrate 12 placed on the platen 32 in the sub-scanning direction (Y direction) with respect to the head unit 36, and has a side scan The aiming direction (Y direction) is spaced apart at a predetermined interval, for example, only at a minimum interval (the length of the sub-scanning direction is the shortest), the length of the substrate 12 is short, and is along the main scanning direction (X) In the direction), a pair of transport rolls 46 connected to a drive source (not shown) are disposed, and are disposed at both ends of the main scan (X) direction of the substrate 12 placed on each of the transport rolls 46. The position is followed by a set of narrow rolling rolls 48 of the respective conveying rolls 46, and the substrate 12 is held between the conveying rolls 46 and the rolling rolls 48 in the sub-scanning (Y) direction. The pair of conveying rolls The 46 series is composed of two long-length driving rolls longer than the length of the main scanning direction of the substrate 12 which is the largest (the main scanning direction is the longest), and the driving axes of the two driving rolls Drive each other by means of a synchronous drive such as a drive belt On the other hand, the rolling roll 48 is formed by a narrow strip-shaped driven roll which is formed by arranging four in total for each of the transport rolls 46. The position of both ends of the longest substrate 12 that can be used in the main scanning direction is moved to the main scanning direction between the positions of the two ends of the substrate 12 in which the main scanning direction is the shortest, and It is preferable to appropriately adjust the positions of both ends of the substrate 12 to be used. 84 - 201006895 One conveying roller 46 and two rolling rolls 48 are arranged to sandwich the conveying path of the substrate '12. The substrate 12 supplied by the apparatus is sandwiched between the transfer roll 46 and the rolling roll 48 by a predetermined nip pressure, and the transfer roll 46 is moved in a predetermined direction by a drive source (not shown) (in the figure) In the case of 4 in the counterclockwise direction, the transfer is performed in the direction of the sub-scan (Y). Here, in the drawing by the head unit 36, when the substrate 12 is adsorbed on the surface of the platen 32, all of them are The conveying roller 46 and the rolling roller 48 φ stop rotating, In the case where the drawing by the head unit 36 is not performed, the conveying roller 48 is rotatably driven by a driving source (not shown) and the substrate 12 held between the rolling rolls 48 is scanned by the sub-head ( It is preferable that the substrate transport mechanism 40 is configured to intermittently scan the substrate 1 in an intermittent manner. Further, the "transfer roller 46 and the calender roll 48 may be omitted. The outer casing of the drawing device 30 shown in the figure is rotatably supported. In addition, the substrate transfer mechanism 40 used in the present invention can be transported in the sub-scanning direction, regardless of the form. All of the well-known sub-scanning transport mechanisms are used as appropriate. In this manner, the substrate transport mechanism 40 transports the substrate 12 in the sub-scanning direction, and the head unit 36 can be moved in the sub-scanning direction with respect to the substrate 12. Move on the ground. As described above, the head moving mechanism 38 and the substrate transport mechanism 40 can relatively move the head unit 36 in the main scanning direction and the sub-scanning direction with respect to the substrate 12, and can realize the head unit 36. The inkjet head 34 performs a 2-dimensional scan (XY scan) on the substrate 12. Further, in the present invention, the driving source of the head moving mechanism 38 and the substrate transporting mechanism 40 is not particularly limited as long as it can accurately describe the color filter of the color-85 201006895 color filter or the like, but is preferably a step. Induction motor. Further, the head moving mechanism 38 moves the head unit 36 to a predetermined head retracted position when the head 34 is not in use, and moves to a predetermined maintenance position during maintenance. Further, the predetermined head retracting position or the predetermined maintenance position is a position other than the substrate 12 on the pressure plate 32 or a position other than the pressure plate 32. More preferably, the predetermined nozzle retreat position is other than the substrate 12 on the pressure plate 32. The position is preferably and the specified maintenance position is preferably at a position other than the pressure plate 32. Further, the example of the drawing is realized by the movement of the head unit 36 of the head moving mechanism 38 in the main scanning direction and the substrate 12 of the substrate conveying mechanism 40 in the sub-scanning direction, thereby realizing the head of the head unit 36. For the 2-dimensional scanning (XY scanning) of the substrate 12, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when the substrate 12 is placed and fixed on the pressing plate 32 as a supporting table, it can also be scanned by the head unit. The aiming means or the like moves the head unit 36 to the main scanning (X) direction and the sub-scanning (Y) direction, and performs a 2-dimensional scanning (XY scanning) on the fixed substrate 12. The 2-dimensional scanning of the substrate by the head unit 36 is described in detail later with the ink-jet drawing method for manufacturing the color filter of the present invention. FIG. 5 shows a schematic configuration of the ink supply system 50 in the inkjet drawing device 30. The ink supply system 50 has an ink tank 52 that stores ink supplied to the inkjet head 34, an ink supply tube 54 that connects the inkjet head 34 and the ink tank 52, and is disposed on the way of the ink supply tube 54. A filter 56, a cap 58 covering the nozzle area of the ink jet head 34, a cleaning blade 60 for cleaning the nozzle face 34a of the ink jet head 34, and a connecting tube bottom cover 58 are provided. Further, the suction pump 62 that sucks the nozzle of the ink head 34, the recovery tank 64 that collects the ink sucked by the suction pump 62, and the ink recovery tube 66 that connects the tube bottom cover 58 and the recovery tank 64 through the suction pump 62 are divided into points. a nozzle pressure chamber (not shown) provided in the ink supply tube 54 and pressurized by the ink jet head 34 for performing forced discharge, and an ink replenishing system for refilling the ink tank 52 70. Further, the tube bottom cover 58, the cleaning blade 60, the suction pump 62, and the nozzle pressure φ pump 68 constitute a maintenance system of the ink jet head 34, the tube bottom cover 58, the recovery tank 64, the ink recovery tube 66, and the printing described later. The ink refilling tube 82, the filter 84, and the concentration detecting unit 86 of the ink replenishing system 70 constitute an ink retrieving system. Here, the ink supply system 50 is not only narrowly defined as a narrow supply system for supplying ink from the ink tank 52 to the ink jet head 34, but also includes a maintenance system of the ink jet head 34, an ink recovery system, and ink. Supplement system 7 0. The ink tank 52 is for supplying ink to the main tank of the ink jet head 34, and starts from the ink jet ink of the present invention for producing the color filter described above, and stores various inks. Further, in the illustrated example, the ink tank 52 is provided with the ink replenishing system 70, and in the case where the residual amount of ink in the ink tank 52 is reduced, the refilling port from the ink replenishing system 70 is employed. (not shown) the method of replenishing the ink, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a cartridge method in which the ink tank 52 is exchanged with the ink tank as the ink cartridge may be employed. In the case of mass production of color filters, etc., in the case of having various inkjet heads 34 and ink supply systems 50 of various colors, and consuming a large amount of ink, printing is performed from the point of ink exchange or cost. The ink replenishing method is suitable, but in the case where a small amount of ink is consumed and the ink type is replaced by the use type - 87 - 201006895, the tube type is suitable. In the case of the cartridge type, the type information of the ink is recognized by a bar code or the like, and the discharge control is preferably performed in accordance with the type of the ink. As shown in Fig. 5, a filter 56 for removing foreign matter or air bubbles is provided in the middle of contacting the ink tank 52 and the ink supply tube 54 of the ink jet head 34. The screen size of the filter 56 is preferably the same as the nozzle diameter of the ink jet head 34 or less than the nozzle diameter (generally about 20 v m). Further, as will be described later in detail, it may be further provided in the middle of the ink supply tube 54, and in the case where the discharge of the ink is defective in the ink jet head 34, the ink jet head 34 may be forcibly pressurized. A nozzle pressure chamber (not shown) is used to perform the nozzle pressure pump 68 for forced discharge. Further, in order to make the portion to which the ink jet head 34 is connected, for example, from the portion of the head pressure pump 68 close to the head of the ink jet head 34, a smooth movement can be achieved when the secondary element (XY direction) of the head unit 36 is moved. The ink supply tube 54 is preferably a hose. Further, although not shown in FIG. 5, it is also possible to form a sub-tank provided in the vicinity of the ink-jet head 34 or integrated with the ink-jet head 34. The secondary storage tank has a damper effect that prevents internal pressure fluctuation of the nozzle and a function of improving refilling. In addition, the inkjet drawing device 30 of the illustrated example includes a tube for appropriately discharging the ink from the respective nozzles of the inkjet head 34 and for maintaining the inkjet head 34 in an appropriate discharge state. A maintenance unit such as the bottom cover 58 and the cleaning blade 60. These maintenance units are relatively movable to the ink jet head 34 by a moving mechanism (not shown), and can be moved from the predetermined retracted position to the lower side of the ink jet head 34 having the maintenance position as needed. In the case of the inkjet drawing device 30 shown in Fig. 3, it is preferably located at a position other than the substrate 12 on the retracted position 201006895 of the maintenance unit, the maintenance position, or the platen 32, preferably at a position other than the platen 32. . The tube bottom cover 58 is attached to cover the nozzle area of the nozzle face 34a of the ink jet head 34, and prevents the nozzle from drying when the ink jet head 34 is not used, or prevents the ink viscosity from rising near the nozzle. Set by means. Further, the tube bottom cover 58 is for checking the discharge state of the nozzle (not shown) of the ink jet head 34, and/or pre-discharging (hereinafter, also referred to as analog discharge) for releasing the discharge failure, or collecting the nozzle from the nozzle. The forced discharge of the nozzle of the pressurizing pump 68 or the recovery of the ink discharged when the nozzle is sucked by the ink jet head 34 of the suction pump 62 is also possible to attract the nozzle of the suction pump 62. The tube bottom cover 58 is attached to the ink jet head 34 so as to cover the nozzle surface 34a, and is used for recycling the ink to be sucked. The tube bottom cover 58 is attached to the maintenance position, and the ink jet head 34 is relatively moved up and down by an elevating mechanism (not shown). The lifting mechanism raises the tube bottom cover 58 to a predetermined rising position when the power is turned off (OFF) or during drawing standby, and by making it adhere to the ink jet head 34, the nozzle surface of the nozzle surface 34a @ can be made. It becomes covered by the tube bottom cover 58. The cleaning blade 60 is provided as a cleaning means for the nozzle surface 34a of the inkjet head 34, and is formed of an elastic member such as rubber. In the maintenance position, the blade moving mechanism (not shown) can be used. The ink discharge surface (nozzle surface 34a) of the ink jet head 34 slides. In the case where ink droplets or foreign matter adhere to the nozzle surface 34a, the nozzle surface 34a can be cleaned by wiping the nozzle surface 34a by sliding the cleaning blade 60 against the nozzle surface 34a. The suction pump 62 is connected to the tube bottom cover 58 by the ink recovery tube 66. When the suction pump 62 initially mounts the ink to the respective nozzles of the inkjet head 34, -89 201006895 or when it is used after a long time stop, the tube bottom cover 58 abuts against the inkjet head 34. The nozzle surface 34a is used for suction operation (nozzle suction operation) and for removing and removing the deteriorated ink which is solidified by the increase in viscosity. Further, the suction pump 62 collects and removes the deteriorated ink sucked and removed into the recovery tank 64. Further, in the case of printing or standby, when the frequency of use of the specific nozzle is lowered, and the ink viscosity in the vicinity of the nozzle is raised, the ink is deteriorated in order to discharge the ink which is deteriorated in viscosity, and the tube bottom cover 5 is opposed. 8 Prepare to spit out. However, even if the preliminary discharge is performed from each of the nozzles of the ink jet head 34, as a result of the inspection of the discharge state of each nozzle, there is a case where the nozzle having a poor discharge is present. In this case, even if the discharge nozzle is not ready to be discharged, the discharge nozzle can be easily discharged, that is, when the discharge failure is not easily canceled, for example, even if the ink is mixed in the ink jet head 34 (in the pressure chamber), or In the case where the ink in the nozzle becomes high viscosity or solidified to become a deteriorated ink, the tube bottom cover 58 abuts against the ink jet head 34, and the suction pump 62 is removed by suction (nozzle suction). Used in the pressure chamber (mixed with bubbles), or in high-viscosity or cured metamorphic inks. Of course, in this case, the suction pump 62 also collects the bubbles that have been removed and absorbed into the ink or the deteriorated ink to the recovery tank 64 for recovery. The head pressure pump 68 is provided in branching with the ink supply tube 54 connected to the ink jet head 34. In the same manner as the above-described suction pump 62, the head pressure pump 6.8 is not easy to release the discharge failure even when the ink is discharged from the initial stage when the ink is initially charged or when the ink is stopped for a long time. In order to pressurize the pressure chamber of the nozzle of the ink jet head 34, the bubble 201006895 in the pressure chamber is mixed into the ink or the ink containing the deteriorated ink in the nozzle, and is strongly discharged from each nozzle (forcibly discharging) In this case, the tube bottom cover 58 can also be abutted against the ink jet head 34, and the nozzles pressurize the pump 68 to receive the forced discharge of air bubbles into the ink or the ink containing the deteriorated ink, and pass through The pump 62 and the ink recovery tube 66 are sucked and sent to the recovery tank 64 for recovery. Further, the suction pump 62 and the head pressure pump 68 have the same function, and may have only one of them, and may have both of them as shown in the example. The recovery tank 64 is for collecting the ink to be discharged and the ink or the ink that has been sucked and removed by the suction pump 62 φ, and the air bubbles that are forcibly discharged by the head pressure pump 68 are mixed into the ink or contain the nozzle. The ink of the deteriorated ink is stored for recycling ink. In addition, the ink collected and stored in the collection tank 64 and stored in a predetermined amount can be discarded. However, as will be described later, the ink is sent to the ink replenishing system 7 to detect and evaluate the ink density, conductivity, and the like. After the ink characteristics are obtained, it is preferable to replenish the color filter to the ink tank 52 in order to manufacture the color filter in accordance with the evaluation result. q When the inkjet head 34 is not discharged for a certain period of time or longer, the ink solvent in the vicinity of the nozzle evaporates to increase the viscosity of the ink near the nozzle, even if the pressure generating means for driving the discharge is not shown (not shown). When it is moved, it becomes impossible to discharge ink from the nozzle. Therefore, before such a state (within the range in which the ink can be ejected by the action of the pressure generating means), the pressure generating means can be operated against the tube bottom cover 58 that receives the ink to perform the operation. "pre-discharge" of ink discharged near the nozzle with increased viscosity. Further, after the wiper surface 34a is cleaned by a wiper such as the cleaning blade 60 provided as the cleaning means of the nozzle surface 34a, the wiper is prevented from sliding by the wiper in 201006895. When foreign matter is mixed into the nozzle, preliminary discharge can be performed. In addition, pre-spitting is also referred to as "simulation spitting", "empty spitting", "flushing", and "spit". Further, when air bubbles are mixed in the nozzle or the pressure chamber of the ink jet head 34, and the viscosity of the ink in the nozzle rises above a certain level, the ink is discharged in the preliminary discharge during the preliminary discharge, and the suction pump 62 is carried out as described above. The suction action or the nozzle of the nozzle pressurizing pump 68 pressurizes. That is, in the case where air bubbles are mixed in the ink of the nozzle or the pressure chamber of the ink jet head 34, or the ink viscosity in the nozzle rises above a certain level, even if the pressure generating means is operated, it becomes impossible to The nozzle spits out the ink. In such a case, the tube bottom cover 58 can be brought into contact with the nozzle surface 34 a of the ink jet head 34 to perform ink suction by the suction pump 62 to attract air bubbles in the pressure chamber, or to attract a thickened ink or a cured print. The operation of the ink or the operation of forcibly ejecting from the nozzle by the nozzle pressurizing pump 68 is forcibly pressed into the pressure chamber. However, since the above-described suction operation or the forced discharge operation of the head pressurization is performed on the entire ink in the pressure chamber, the amount of ink consumed is large. Therefore, it is preferable to perform preliminary discharge as much as possible in the case where the viscosity rises less. Further, the tube bottom cover 58 illustrated in Fig. 5 has a function as a suction means, and of course, it can also function as a preliminary ink discharge receiving ink. Further, when the inside of the tube bottom cover 58 is divided into a plurality of regions corresponding to the nozzle row by the partition walls, each of the spaced regions can be selectively attracted by a selector or the like. It is better. Next, the ink replenishing system 70 is as shown in FIG. 5, and has a concentrated ink replenishing tank 72 for storing concentrated ink, a diluent replenishing tank 74 for storing the diluent, 201006895, and a concentration of the ink concentration for detecting the ink tank 52. The detecting unit 76, the level detecting unit 78 that detects the ink storage amount of the ink tank '52, and the information of the detected density from the density detecting unit 76 and the ink storage amount from the level detecting unit 78 are controlled to be concentrated. The replenishment control unit 80 of the replenishment ink of the ink replenishing tank 72 and the replenishing amount of the dilute liquid from the dilute replenishing tank 74. Further, in the ink replenishing system 70 shown in Fig. 5, the ink tank 52 and the recovery tank 64 are connected by the ink replenishing pipe 82. In the middle of the ink-replenishing ink replenishing pipe 82, a filter 84 for removing the deteriorated ink contained in the ink to be recovered in the ink-receiving ink collected in the recovery tank 64 is provided, and A concentration detecting portion 86 is provided on the side of the ink refilling tube 82 that is close to the ink tank 52. Here, the supplemental control unit 80 also accepts the information of the detected density of the recovered ink from the density detecting unit 86, and adds the replenishing amount of the concentrated ink and the replenishing amount of the diluted liquid to control the recovered ink from the recovery tank 64. Replenishment amount. The concentrated ink replenishing tank 72 is a tank for concentrating the ink (high-density ink), and is provided with a pump for supplying the concentrated ink in the concentrated ink replenishing tank 72 to the ink tank 52 (not shown). And, in accordance with an instruction from the supplemental control unit 80, the concentrated ink is replenished into the ink tank 52. On the other hand, the diluent replenishing tank 74 is a tank which serves as a solvent for the ink dilution liquid when replenishing the ink, and a pump for supplying the diluent to the ink tank 52, etc., and according to the supplementary control In response to the portion 80, the diluent is replenished into the ink tank 52. Here, in the present invention, the concentration of the concentrated ink is not particularly limited, and it is preferably a high concentration higher than the target concentration of the ink. The preferred amount of color material is 1. 5 to 5 times the concentration range, more preferably 2 to 4 times the concentration -93 - 201006895 range. That is, the ink of the predetermined concentration for replenishment can use a high-concentration ink which is higher than the target concentration of the ink. Further, the diluent is not particularly limited, and a low-concentration ink which is lower than the target concentration of the ink may be used. That is, in the present invention, the concentrated ink and the diluent can use a plurality of inks having a high concentration of ink compared to the target concentration of the ink and a low concentration ink, and different concentrations from each other. The ink of the concentration is added to supplement. The density detecting unit 76 detects the concentration of the ink using an optical detecting means to supply it to the replenishing control unit 80. For example, in the ink supply system 50 of the inkjet drawing device 30, the ink supply tube 54 has a transmissive portion formed of a light-transmitting member such as glass, and the density detecting portion 76 is measured by a light-receiving member. The amount of light transmitted from the light-emitting element to the light-transmitting portion and transmitted through the light-transmitting portion. The concentration detecting unit 76 has a check table (LUT) which is prepared in advance by an experiment or the like and which displays the relationship between the measurement result of the transmitted light and the ink density, and uses the LUT to obtain the ink concentration from the measurement result of the transmitted light. . Alternatively, the LUT is changed, and the concentration of the ink is determined by using the measurement result of the transmitted light as a parameter. Further, in the present invention, the method or means for detecting the ink concentration in the density detecting portion 76 is not limited to the optical method or means, and various methods or means may be used, for example, the printing in the ink tank 52 may be detected. The ink density is determined by the ink characteristics such as the ink conductivity. Further, in the present invention, it is preferable to use the optical density detecting method or means such that the concentration of the ink is from a point where the high precision can be directly detected and the like. The level detecting unit 78 detects the ink level (the liquid level of the ink, that is, the amount of ink) in the ink tank 52, and supplies it to the replenishing control unit 80. That is, 201006895, in the illustrated example, the amount of ink in the ink supply system 50 is detected by detecting the level of ink in the ink tank 52. In the present invention, the means or method for detecting the level of the ink is not particularly limited, and an electric level detecting means using an electrode rod or the like, a level detecting means using a buoy, an ultrasonic level detecting means, and an electrostatic capacity can be used. A well-known various means or method, such as a horizontal detection means, or a detection method using such means. Further, the ink level is not detected, and the amount of ink in the ink tank @ 52 can be directly detected by measuring the ink weight in the ink tank. The replenishing control unit 80 receives information on the density of the ink from the density detecting units 76 and 86 and the ink to be recovered, and the ink tank 52 from the level detecting unit 78 when ink is replenished to the ink tank 52. The amount of ink in the ink to determine the replenishment amount of the concentrated ink and the diluent, or the replenishment amount of the ink, the concentrated ink and the diluent, and to respectively indicate the replenishment of the concentrated ink for the concentrated ink replenishing tank 72 The amount of the diluent, the amount of the diluent added to the diluent replenishing tank 74, and the amount of replenishment of the ink to the recovery tank 64 are recovered. In addition, in the recording apparatus 10 to which the present invention is applied, the timing of ink replenishment is not particularly limited, and for example, it can be automatically performed for a predetermined time, each period, or every time a predetermined number of substrates are drawn, and the like. It can be automatically performed in accordance with the amount of ink in the ink tank 52 detected by the level detecting unit 78, and can be performed in accordance with an instruction input by an operator or the like who observes the pixel to be drawn, and has a large number of The timing determines the means and can be carried out selectively. The inkjet drawing device shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 is basically constructed as described above. The following describes the function of the inkjet drawing device and the coloring device for manufacturing color by inkjet drawing -9 5 - 201006895 A method of inkjet drawing of a filter. Fig. 6 is a view showing an embodiment of the ink jet drawing method which is used in the drawing process for manufacturing a color filter in the ink jet drawing device shown in Figs. 3 to 5, before the drawing starts. Flow chart of the process. First, as shown in FIG. 6, in step S120, the inkjet drawing device 30 shown in FIG. 3 is used to pass through the substrate transfer mechanism 40 to be supplied to the platen 32 by a substrate supply means (not shown). A substrate 12 having a partition wall 14 is formed. Next, in step S122, the supplied substrate 12 is conveyed to the platen 32 by the transfer roll 46 and the rolling roll 48 of the substrate transfer mechanism 40, and is positioned at a predetermined position, and then stopped, for example, by adsorption or the like. The substrate 12 is mounted and fixed to the platen 32. Next, in step S124, the alignment marks on the substrate 12 are used to take the substrate alignment, and the drawing start position is set. On the other hand, in step S130, as shown in FIG. 3, the driving rotary lever 42 is driven by the head moving mechanism 38 to move the head unit 36 along the guide rail 43, and the head unit 36 is moved to the field of the substrate 12 or the platen. A maintenance position (discharge inspection position; not shown) for inspecting the discharge state of the ink jet head 34 other than the field of 32, and as shown in FIG. 5, the nozzle face 34a of the ink jet head 34 and the tube bottom cover are provided. 58 is in the opposite direction. At this time, the head unit 36 is moved to a predetermined position opposed to the tube bottom cover 58. Next, in step S132, the tube bottom cover 58 is raised to abut against the nozzle surface 34a of the ink jet head 34, and the ink is discharged from each nozzle to perform discharge detection of the ink. The discharge detection of the ink, that is, the inspection of the discharge state, can detect the discharge of the ink droplets on the photosensor, for example, the light-emitting and light-receiving element provided in each nozzle of the inkjet head 34 in the tube bottom cover 58. It is better to do it with or without. -96 - 201006895 Alternatively, the amount of ink droplets ejected may be measured in each nozzle of the ink jet head 34, and depending on whether the amount is within a predetermined specification, that is, within a predetermined range, • each nozzle may be inspected. Spit state. Further, the discharge ink at the time of discharge detection is recovered in the recovery tank 64 through the ink recovery tube 66. Next, in step S134, it is determined whether or not all of the nozzles of the ink jet head 34 are within a predetermined specification, i.e., whether or not there is an appropriate discharge spit. In the determination of step S134, in the case where all the nozzles of the ink jet head 34 are within the above-mentioned setting specifications (appropriate discharge state) (Y), the process proceeds to step S126, and the tube bottom cover 58 is removed from the ink jet head 34. The nozzle face 34a is removed. As shown in FIG. 3, the head moving mechanism 38 drives the driving screw 42 and moves the head unit 36 along the rail 43, thereby moving the head unit 36 to the substrate 12 calibrated by the substrate. The specified starting position is specified. Next, in step S128, the drawing is performed on the substrate 12. On the other hand, in the determination of the above-described step S1 34, even if one nozzle of the inkjet head 34 is in the above-described setting specification (appropriate discharge state), the process proceeds to step S136. Simulated discharge (pre-discharge) is performed from each nozzle of the inkjet head 34. Next, in step S138, the ink discharge detection in each of the nozzles of the ink jet head 34 is performed in the same manner as in step S132, and the discharge state of each nozzle is checked. In addition, the ink discharged from the discharge and the discharge detection are collected in the recovery tank 64 through the ink recovery tube 66 (see FIG. 5J. Next, in step S140, the inkjet head 34 is performed in the same manner as in step S134. Whether or not all the nozzles are judged within the above-mentioned setting specifications, and in the case of the above-mentioned setting specifications (Y), the process proceeds to step S1 2, and as described above, the -97 - 201006895 tube bottom cover 58 is ejected from the ink jet. The nozzle face 34a of the head 34 is detached, the driving rotary lever 42 is driven by the head moving mechanism 38, and the head unit 36 is moved along the guide rail 43 (refer to FIG. 3), and the head unit 36 is moved to the substrate 12 calibrated by the substrate. The drawing start position is defined in the above. In the step S128, the drawing is performed on the substrate 12. On the other hand, in the determination of the above step S140, even if one nozzle of the ink jet head 34 is outside the above-described setting specifications. In the case (N), the process proceeds to step S142, and each nozzle of the inkjet head 34 sucks the ink in each nozzle by the suction pump 62, or pressurizes the nozzles by the nozzle pressure pump 68. To make the ink in each nozzle strong The product is discharged (see Fig. 5). Further, both the nozzle suction operation by the suction pump 62 and the forced discharge operation of the pump 68 by the nozzle may be performed. Next, in step S144, the tube bottom cover is used. 58 is detached from the nozzle surface 34a of the inkjet head 34, wipes the nozzle surface 34a by the cleaning blade 60, and wipes the deteriorated ink adhered to the nozzle surface 34a or the high-impact ink to clean the ink. The nozzle surface 34a (see Fig. 5). Then, in step S146, analog discharge is performed from each nozzle of the inkjet head 34 in the same manner as step S136. Next, in step S148, the inkjet head is performed in the same manner as step S138. The ink discharge detection is performed in each of the nozzles of 34, and the discharge state of each nozzle is checked. Further, the discharge operation of the nozzle suction operation and/or the forced discharge operation, the simulation discharge, and the discharge detection are transmitted through the ink recovery tube 66. Then, it is collected in the recovery tank 64 (see Fig. 5). Next, in step S150, whether or not all of the nozzles of the inkjet head 34 have the determination within the above-described setting specifications is performed in the same manner as in step S140. Feelings (Y) then moving to step SI 26, as described above, the tube bottom cover 58 is detached from the nozzle face 34a of the ink jet head 34, by the head moving mechanism 38 • driving the rotary lever 42 and the head unit 3 6 The guide rail 43 is moved, and the head unit 36 is moved to the drawing start position on the substrate 12 calibrated by the substrate (refer to Fig. 3). Next, in step S128, the drawing is performed on the substrate 12. On the other hand, In the determination of step S150, even if one nozzle of the ink jet head 34 is in the case (N) other than the above-described setting specifications, the process returns to U step S142 to perform the nozzle suction operation by the suction pump 62 and/or Or by the forced discharge operation of the nozzle pressurizing pump 68, sequentially performing the wiping by the nozzle of the cleaning blade 60 in step S 144, the simulated discharge in step S1 46, the discharge detection in step S1 48, and the step S1. Whether all of the nozzles in 50 are within the above-mentioned setting specifications. In step S150, when all the nozzles are within the above-described setting specifications (Y), the process proceeds to step S126, and the head unit 36 is similarly moved to the drawing start position on the substrate 12 (see FIG. 3). In step S128, _ is drawn on the substrate 12, and even if one nozzle of the inkjet head 34 is outside the above-described setting specifications (N), the process returns to the above-described step S1 42 > The operations of steps S142, S144, S146, and S 1483⁄4 S 150 are repeated until all the nozzles are within the above-described setting specifications (Y). Further, the case where the number of repetitions exceeds a predetermined number of times set in advance is an error, and it is preferable to stop the implementation of the drawing method. Further, in the drawing step of step S12, in the ink jet drawing device 30 shown in FIG. 3, the head unit 3 is moved to the main scanning (X) direction by the head moving mechanism 38 (scanning) The inkjet head 34 discharges the liquid droplets 201006895 of the ink 18 to a predetermined position of the substrate 12, that is, the predetermined concave portion 16 between the partition walls 14 on the substrate 12, to form a pixel of the color filter ( Unhardened pixel ink 1 8a) ° The head unit 36 is thus moved in the main scanning (X) direction of the substrate 12 (the area formed by the partition 14) from the beginning to the end and/or from the terminal to the beginning. And complete the pixel formation in the main scanning direction. Thereafter, the substrate 12 is released from the adsorption and fixation of the platen 32, and the transfer roller 46 is rotated by the substrate moving mechanism 40, and the substrate 12 is transported by a predetermined distance only in the sub-scanning direction (for example, the length of the field portion ΔY ( The one-pitch (one-way > or two-pitch (reciprocating)) of the color box in the color filter is stopped on the platen 32, and the substrate 12 is adsorbed and fixed on the platen 32. The head end of the main scanning direction of the substrate 12 or the head unit 36 of the terminal is moved to a certain amount in the sub-scanning direction (the length of the field portion ΔΥ). Continuing, the substrate 12 thus adsorbed and fixed to the platen 32 is Starting from the drawing start position in the main scanning direction, as described above, the head unit 36 is moved in the main scanning (X) direction by the head moving mechanism 38, and is drawn by the ink jet head 34, and ends at The main scanning direction of the substrate 12 is drawn. Then, the adsorption of the substrate 12 to the platen 32 is repeated, the transfer to the substrate 12 in the sub-scanning direction is only a predetermined distance ΔΥ, and the substrate 12 is fixed to the platen 32 by spraying. Ink head 34 The main scanning direction of the board 12 is drawn, and the head unit 12 is moved in the main scanning (X) direction while moving the substrate 12 from the beginning of the sub-scanning direction to the terminal in the drawing area portion for each length AY. The discharge signal of the inkjet head nozzle ejects the ink, and the entire substrate 12 is drawn with one color at a time to form a color filter of 100-201006895 (unhardened pixel ink 18a). Further, regarding the other colors of the color filter, the ejection of the ink may be repeated while moving the head unit 36 in the main scanning direction on the substrate 12, and then the substrate 12 is moved by a certain distance in the sub-scanning direction. Moving, and sequentially drawing other colors on the substrate 12 to form a pixel of the color filter (unhardened pixel ink 18a), and forming a full pixel (unhardened) on the full color of the color filter. Further, in the present invention, the nozzle φ column of the ink jet head 34 of the head unit 36 is not particularly limited, and may be a single column or a plurality of columns, and the number of nozzles of each nozzle row is not In particular, it can be 1 Further, the drawing form of the pixel box or the pixel in which the color filter is drawn by the ink jet head 34 having such a nozzle arrangement is not particularly limited, and any form can be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(a), an ink jet head 34R having four nozzle rows in a nozzle portion and discharging R ink, and an ink jet head 34G having four nozzle rows in a nozzle portion and discharging G ink are used. The nozzle spacing of each of the nozzle rows of each of the inkjet heads 34R, 34G, and 34B is as shown in FIG. 9(b), with the nozzle section having four rows of nozzle rows and the inkjet head 34B discharging the G ink. In the case where the dot pitch to be drawn in one of the pixel boxes (pixels) 20R, 20G, and 20B of each color in the color filter is small, the inkjet heads 34R, 34G, and 34B are mainly scanned. The (X) direction is scanned in a manner orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the pixel box in the color filter, and one column of the color filter is used for one pixel box from one ink head. Two nozzles are arranged in total, and a total of eight nozzles start to discharge ink droplets, and eight dots are formed in one pixel box of the color filter. Each cartridge of each color pixel (i.e., pixel box 20R, 20G, 201006895 20B). Further, as shown in Fig. 9(c), a nozzle row 35R having a nozzle for discharging R ink in the nozzle portion, a nozzle row 35G for arranging a nozzle for discharging G ink, and a nozzle row for discharging a nozzle of B ink are used. 3 5B A total of three nozzle rows of the ink jet head 34', the ink jet head 34' is scanned in such a manner that the main scanning (X) direction coincides with the longitudinal direction of the color box in the color filter. 'With respect to one pixel box of the color filter, one nozzle of one nozzle row (that is, one of the nozzle rows 35R, 35G, and 35B) is used, and one nozzle is combined from one nozzle. To eject ink droplets, or in a single color box of the color filter shown in Fig. 9(d), that is, in Fig. 9(d) and the pixel boxes 20R, 20G, 20B, 20R Eight dots are formed in the corresponding one of the pixel boxes. In the example shown in FIG. 9(d), it is shown in the four pixel boxes of the color filter, and the three pixel boxes (specifically, the pixel boxes 20R, 20G, and 20B) are different from each other. The three inks form every eight dots, and the top and bottom two pixel boxes of Fig. 9(d) (specifically, the pixel box 20R and the pixel box 20 R'') indicate Each of the eight dots is formed by a nozzle different from the nozzle row 35R of the ink jet head 34' shown in Fig. 9(c), and by the ink of the same kind. Here, using the inkjet drawing device 30 shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the shape of the pixel arrangement (pixel pattern) of the color filter formed by the inkjet drawing method shown in FIG. 6 can be formed. The present invention is not particularly limited as shown in FIG. 7(a), the striped shape shown in FIG. 7(b), or the triangular arrangement shown in FIG. 7(c) as a black matrix shape. Further, in the case of drawing, hardening, and forming a color pixel arrangement (color pixel pattern) of the color filters shown in FIGS. 7(a) to 7(c), one color is formed, for example, first drawn, The color pixel pattern of the R is hardened and the color pixel 20 is formed, and other colors are formed by one color each time according to the sequence of 102-201006895, for example, the coloring of the color pixel pattern is drawn in the order of G and then B. A color pixel pattern of a full-color color pixel 20' is formed, and two or more colors are first drawn, for example, in a sequential or simultaneous manner or a complex color to draw a color pixel pattern of three colors of RGB. For example, the uncured pixels 18a of the RGB three-color color pixel pattern may be cured, and the hard-colored pixels of the complex color or full-color color pixel pattern may be formed. As described above, in the manufacture of a color filter, for example, a pixel arrangement of three original φ colors such as RGB, that is, a pixel pattern is regular, compared with the case of drawing with an inkjet head, or the like. Unlike the general image composed of the random color pixel pattern, which is determined by the nozzle used in the ink jet head, a nozzle which is not used for a long time occurs in all the nozzles of the ink jet head. For this reason, in the inkjet drawing method in the method of producing a color filter of the present invention, as shown in Fig. 6, it is preferable to check the discharge state of each nozzle of the ink jet head, and to perform inkjet drawing while confirming discharge on one side. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the head unit is moved in the main scanning direction and the sub-scanning direction to form a pixel. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the head unit may be directed only to the main scanning direction. Move, and the substrate moves to the sub-scanning direction at a certain distance. Further, the ink jet head is a full line head and is scanned once by the head unit to form a full picture on the original plate of the printing plate. Here, in the case where the ink jet head is a full-line head, the ink jet head can be scanned and the substrate can be scanned. In the example shown in Fig. 5, the ink tank 52 is formed by the ink supply tube 54 being in contact with the direct ink jet head 34, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the internal pressure change of the head is prevented. The damping effect and the improvement of the refilling-103 - 201006895 function may also be such that a sub-reservoir is provided between the ink tank 52 and the ink jet head 34. In Fig. 8, a schematic configuration of another embodiment of the ink supply system applicable to the ink jet card insertion apparatus shown in Figs. 3 and 4 is schematically shown instead of the ink supply system shown in Fig. 5. As shown in FIG. 8, the inkjet drawing device 31 and the ink supply system 90 used therein basically have an inkjet head (discharge nozzle) 12, a tube bottom cover 58, an ink tank 52, and a supply sub tank. 92. A recovery tank 64 and a supplementary tank 94. The inkjet drawing device 31 and the ink supply system 90 shown in Fig. 8 have the inkjet drawing device 30, the ink supply system 50, and the supply sub-tank 92 shown in Figs. 3 to 5, except for the recovery tank 64. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will not be repeated, except that the ink tanks are provided with the same structure. Further, the scanning system of the inkjet drawing device 31 not shown in FIG. 8 may be a scanning system suitable for the inkjet drawing device 30 shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, and may also be applied to a scanning system known in the art. . The ink supply system 90 is mainly composed of a narrow ink supply system that supplies the ink of the ink tank 52 to the inkjet head 34, and ink recovery for ink that is recovered and reused for flushing the tube bottom cover 58. The system is composed of. The ink supply system is mainly composed of an ink pump 96, a supply sub-tank 9, a first ink supply tube 54a connecting the ink cartridge 96 and the supply sub-tank 92, a connection supply reservoir 92 and a spray. The second ink supply tube 54b of the ink head 34 and the third ink recovery tube (flow path) 98 for overflowing the ink supplied to the sub tank 92 and returning the liquid to the ink tank 52 are provided. The utility model is configured to be provided in the overflow pipe 98a which is opened in the interior of the auxiliary storage tank 92. Further, the ink recovery system is mainly 104 - 201006895, if it is the recovery ink tank 64, the first ink recovery tube 66 connecting the tube bottom cover 58 and the recovery tank 64, and having the ink in the recovery tank 64 overflowing and The liquid supply ' is recovered from the function of the second ink recovery tube 1 of the ink tank 52 and the overflow tube 100a opened in the inside of the recovery tank 64. Further, in the second ink-receiving tube 100 (overflow tube 100a), a concentration detecting portion 86 for measuring the transmittance of the recovered ink is attached in order to detect the concentration of the recovered ink flowing inside. Further, the atmosphere opening valve 1〇2 and the pressure regulating valve 104 are attached to the supply sub-tank 92. The ink supply tube which becomes the ink supply flow path or the ink recovery tube which becomes φ is the ink recovery flow path can be constituted by, for example, a catheter or a flexible tube. Further, Fig. 8 mainly shows a characteristic portion of the present invention, and in addition to the illustration of the ink jet drawing device 31 and the ink supply system 90, of course, there is, for example, a driver for driving the ink jet head 34 to eject ink droplets, and ink jetting. The scanning means of the head 34 or the scanning path of the recording medium P is conveyed in a direction orthogonal to the nozzle row direction (row direction) to be described later on a predetermined path which is opposite to the ink jet head 34 (scanning conveyance) Various components of the well-known inkjet drawing device, such as a transport means. The tube bottom cover 58 is attached to the nozzle side of the ink jet head 34 when the circulation of the ink is stopped, and is not attached to the ink jet head 34, and can be prevented in a state where all the nozzles of the ink jet head 34 are interrupted from the outside air. Dry adhesion due to evaporation of the ink remaining in the nozzle. Such a bottom cover 58 can be used in a wide variety of applications commonly used in various ink jet recording apparatuses. The ink tank 52 mixes the solvent from the replenishing tank 94, the concentrated ink, and the ink recovered from the recovery tank 64, and has a function of fixing liquid physical properties and optical characteristics, and a function of storing ink. The ink tank 52 preferably has 105 201006895 a stirring means for preventing the precipitation of the dye, and a temperature adjusting means for improving the discharge stability of the ink. The first ink supply tube 54a is provided with an ink pump 96 for supplying ink from the ink tank 52 to the secondary storage tank 92. The ink supply amount of the ink pump 96 is set to be larger than the ink supply amount from the supply sub tank 92 to the ink jet head 34. The supply sub-tank 92 is a sealed ink tank that is connected to the first ink supply tube 54a and the second ink supply tube 54b, and is disposed at a position lower than the ink jet head 34 in the vertical direction. The other end of the second ink supply tube 54b that is in contact with the supply sub-tank 92 is connected to the ink-jet head 34. The ink supplied from the ink tank 52 by the first ink supply tube 54a is stored in the supply sub-tank 92, and the stored ink is supplied to the ink-jet head 34 through the second ink supply tube 54b. . Further, the overflow pipe 98a serving as the third ink recovery pipe 98 is disposed in the supply sub-tank 92, and the second ink supply pipe 54b is connected to a position lower than the upper end of the overflow pipe 980a. . In the example of the drawing, the connection portion with the second ink supply tube 54b is provided in the bottom surface of the supply sub-tank 92. The ink stored in the sub-tank 92 is supplied to the sub tank 92 by the surface tension of the nozzle meniscus or by the sub-tank pressure adjusting mechanism, and is supplied from the second ink supply tube 54b. Inkjet head 34. Further, the supply sub-tank 92 is such that the ink supplied from the ink pump 96 overflows from the overflow pipe 98a even if it exceeds the height of the overflow pipe 98a, so the height of the liquid surface in the storage tank Can remain certain. As a result, when the supply sub-tank 92 is opened to the atmosphere, the pressure supplied to the sub-tank 92 can be kept constant. 10 6 201006895 Further, the ink discharged from the overflow pipe 98 overflows through the third ink return pipe 98, returns to the ink tank 52, and is again supplied with the cycle. • The recovery tank 64 is a sealed ink tank that is connected to the tube bottom cover 58 and is disposed at a position lower than the ink jet head 34 in the vertical direction. As described above, the other end of the first ink recovery pipe 66 is connected to the pipe bottom cover 58, and the other end of the second ink recovery pipe 100 is connected to the ink tank 52, respectively. The recovery tank 64 stores the ink discharged from the bottom cover 58 by flushing and simulating discharge. The ink stored in the recovery tank 64 is returned from the second ink recovery tube φ 100 to the ink tank 52. The ink supply replenishing tank 94 replenishes the consumed ink to the sealed type reservoir of the ink tank 52, and is connected to the ink tank 52 by the ink supply tube 106. The replenishing tank 94 replenishes the ink into the ink tank 52 such that the ink in the ink tank 52 has a predetermined concentration and a predetermined amount is formed. The configuration of the replenishing tank 94 is not particularly limited, and for example, a concentrating tank storing a concentrated ink (high-concentration ink) like the ink replenishing system 70 shown in FIG. 5, and a diluent for storing the ink diluate The storage tank may also add a predetermined amount of concentrated ink and diluent to the ink tank by specifying a concentration and forming a predetermined amount @. Further, it is preferred to use a solvent if the diluent is used. In the ink jet drawing device 31 and the ink supply system 90, the timing of replenishing the ink is not particularly limited. For example, it can be automatically performed every time a predetermined number of sheets are drawn, and the amount of ink in the ink tank 52 can be detected, and can be performed in accordance with an instruction input by an operator or the like who observes the pixel to be drawn. The multiple timing decisions can also be made selectively. Further, the method of determining the amount of replenishment of the concentrated ink and the diluent is not particularly limited. For example, in addition to the expected amount of evaporation of the ink, the number of total ink discharges detected from the pixel information, etc., the density measurement result of the ink to be circulated, the ink amount in the ink tank 5, etc., are used. The amount of ink consumed is predicted, and the amount of ink to be replenished may be determined by a predetermined amount of ink Q in the ink tank 52. The mixing method of the diluent, the concentrated ink, and the ink recovery can be carried out by the following method. A transparent portion as an ink concentration measuring region is set in the middle of the third ink collecting tube 100 which forms a flow path from the recovery tank 64 to the ink tank 52, and the density detecting portion 86 is disposed in this portion. The concentration detecting portion 86 calculates the amount of evaporation of the solvent of the ink recovered to the ink tank by measuring the ink transmittance in the measurement region. The relationship between the light transmittance and the amount of solvent evaporation can be determined in advance by measuring the relationship between the ink and the light transmittance of the dye concentration, or the light transmittance exp(-a · ί) (α: absorption coefficient (for the dye) Calculated by the ratio of the concentration) and t: thickness). In order to measure the transmittance, a flow path of a transparent member such as a light source, a light receiving sensor, and glass is provided in the ink concentration measuring area. The flow path is desirable for measuring the portion through which light is transmitted, and the surface is AR coating, and the optical axis is from vertical to oblique. To prevent deterioration of measurement accuracy caused by reflected light. The mixing ratio of the diluent, the concentrated ink, and the recovered ink is determined according to the concentration of the ink to be recovered. The ink jet drawing device 31 and the ink supply system 90 shown in Fig. 8 are basically constructed as described above. The color filter manufactured as described above can be suitably used as a color filter of a color image display device such as a liquid crystal display, an electronic newspaper, or an organic EL. In the above, the inkjet ink, the color filter, and the method for manufacturing the same according to the present invention, the 2010 201095 95 method, and the liquid crystal display and the image display device using the same, are described in detail in various embodiments or examples. It is a matter of course that various modifications and changes can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. EXAMPLES Hereinafter, the present invention will be more specifically described by way of examples. The materials, reagents, ratios, equipment, operations, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the scope of the invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. In the following examples, "%" and "parts" mean "% by mass" and "parts by mass", and the molecular weight is a weight average molecular weight, unless otherwise specified. (Preparation of a dark color composition for forming a partition wall> The rich color composition K1 can be obtained by first weighing the amount of the κ pigment dispersion 1 and the propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate described in Table 1 at a temperature. 2 4 °c (±2 °C) was mixed and stirred at 150 rpm for 10 minutes, and while stirring, the amount of methyl ethyl ketone, binder 2, hydrogen 醌 醌Ether, DPHA solution, 2,4-bis(trichloromethyl)-6-[4'-(N,N-bisdiethoxycarbonylmethyl)amino-3'-bromophenyl]- s - three tillage, surfactant 1, and sequentially added at a temperature of 25t (± 2 ° C), and stirred at a temperature of 40 ° C (± 2 ° C), 150 rpm for 30 minutes. In addition, the table The amount described in 1 is a part by mass, and the details are as follows. <K pigment dispersion 1>, • carbon black (Nipex 35 manufactured by Degussa Co., Ltd.) 13.1% • Dispersant (Compound 1 below) 0.65% • Polymer (benzyl methacrylate/methacrylate = 72/) 28 Moer 109 201006895 random copolymer, molecular weight 37,000) 6.72% . Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 79.53%
<黏結劑2> .聚合物(甲基丙烯酸苄酯/甲基丙烯酸酯=78/22莫耳 比的無規共聚物、分子量3·8萬) 27°/〇 .丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸酯 73〇/0 <DPHA 液 > .二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯 (含有500ppm的聚合抑制劑MEHQ、日本化藥(股) 製、商品名:KAYARAD D PH A) 76% •丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸酯 24% <界面活性劑1 > .下述結構物1 3 〇 % .甲基乙基酮 7 〇 % 構造物1 —(CH2-CH)4〇— 0=C ΟΟΗ2〇Η2〇ηί· 2η+1 —(CH2-CH):o=c 0(Ρ0)7Η<Binder 2>. Polymer (benzyl methacrylate/methacrylate = 78/22 molar ratio random copolymer, molecular weight 38,000) 27 ° / 〇. propylene glycol monomethyl ether B Acid ester 73〇/0 <DPHA liquid>. Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (containing 500 ppm polymerization inhibitor MEHQ, manufactured by Nippon Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: KAYARAD D PH A) 76% • Propylene glycol monomethyl group Ether acetate 24% <activator 1 > The following structure 1 3 〇% .methyl ethyl ketone 7 〇% structure 1 —(CH2-CH)4〇— 0=C ΟΟΗ2〇Η2 〇ηί· 2η+1 —(CH2-CH):o=c 0(Ρ0)7Η
—(CH2-CH)y—o=c 0(EO)7H (n = 6、x = 5 5、y = 5、M w = 3 3 9 4 Ο、M w / Μ n = 2 · 5 5 PO:環氧丙烷、EO:環氧乙烷) 201006895 表1 濃色組成物 K1 K顔料組成物1 (碳黑) 25 丙二醇單甲基醚乙二酯 8 甲基乙基酮 53 黏結劑2 9.1 1醌單甲基醚 0.002 DPHA 液 4.2 2,4-雙(三氯甲基)-6-[4’-(沐:^-雙二乙氧基羰基甲基) 胺基-3 ’ -溴基苯基]-s ·三阱 0.16 界面活性劑1 0.044 (質量份) (隔壁的形成) 無鹼玻璃基板係以UV洗淨裝置洗淨後,使用洗淨劑進 行刷子洗淨,進而以超純水進行超音波洗淨。將基板在120 °〇下熱處理3分鐘以使其表面狀態安定化。 冷卻基板且調溫至2 3 °C後,以具有狹縫狀噴嘴之玻璃 基板用塗布機(FAS亞洲公司製、商品名:MH-1600)塗布 ©如上述所調製的濃色組成物K1。繼續,以VCD(真空乾燥 裝置、東京應化工業公司製)30秒鐘,感造溶媒的一部份使 其塗布層沒有流動性之後,於1 2〇°C下預烘烤3分鐘,以 得到膜厚2 · 3 μ m的濃色組成物層K1。 以具有超高壓水銀燈之鄰近型曝光機(日立高科技電子 工程股份有限公司製),在基板與遮罩(具有影像圖案之石英 曝光遮罩)成垂直豎立之狀態下’將曝光遮罩面與濃色感光 層K1之間的距離設定爲200/zm,並於氮氣環境下,以曝 光量 300mJ/cm2圖案曝光成隔壁寬 2 Ο μ m、間隙寬 111 201006895 1 Ο Ο // m。—(CH2-CH)y—o=c 0(EO)7H (n = 6, x = 5 5, y = 5, M w = 3 3 9 4 Ο, M w / Μ n = 2 · 5 5 PO : propylene oxide, EO: ethylene oxide) 201006895 Table 1 Dark color composition K1 K Pigment composition 1 (carbon black) 25 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether ethylene glycol ester 8 Methyl ethyl ketone 53 Adhesive agent 2 9.1 1醌Monomethyl ether 0.002 DPHA liquid 4.2 2,4-bis(trichloromethyl)-6-[4'-(Mu:^-bisdiethoxycarbonylmethyl)amino-3'-bromobenzene Base]-s ·Triad 0.16 Surfactant 1 0.044 (mass parts) (formation of the partition wall) The alkali-free glass substrate is washed with a UV cleaning device, and then washed with a detergent to purify the ultra-pure water. Ultrasonic cleaning. The substrate was heat-treated at 120 ° C for 3 minutes to stabilize its surface state. After the substrate was cooled and the temperature was adjusted to 23 ° C, the glass substrate coating machine (manufactured by FAS Asia Co., Ltd., trade name: MH-1600) having a slit nozzle was used to apply the color composition K1 prepared as described above. Continuing to use VCD (Vacuum Drying Apparatus, manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.) for 30 seconds, and after sensing a part of the solvent so that the coating layer has no fluidity, it is prebaked at 1 2 ° C for 3 minutes to A rich color composition layer K1 having a film thickness of 2 · 3 μm was obtained. A proximity type exposure machine (manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Co., Ltd.) having an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, in which the substrate and the mask (quartz exposure mask having an image pattern) are vertically erected, the exposure mask surface is The distance between the photosensitive layers K1 of the dark color was set to 200/zm, and the pattern was exposed to a width of 2 μm μm and a gap width of 111 201006895 1 Ο Ο // m under a nitrogen atmosphere at a exposure amount of 300 mJ/cm 2 .
接著,以噴淋噴嘴噴霧純水,使濃色組成物層ΚΙ的表 面均句地濕潤之後,在ΚΟΗ系顯像液(含有非離子界面活性 劑、商品名:CD Κ-1、富士軟片電子材料(股)製稀釋成100 倍者)23°C80秒,並以扁平噴嘴壓力〇.〇4MPa進行噴淋顯 像,以得到圖案化影像。接著,繼續將超純水以超高壓洗 淨噴嘴、9.8MPa的壓力進行噴射來進行殘渣去除,且在大 氣下、曝光量2500mJ/cm2,從基板的濃色組成物層K1 形成之面側進行後曝光,並在烘箱240 °C下加熱50分鐘, 以得到膜厚2.0/zm、光學濃度4.0、具有100/zm寬的開 口部之條紋狀的隔壁。 (撥印墨化電漿處理) 使用陰極偶合方式平行平板型電漿處理裝置’用以下 的條件對於形成隔壁之基板,進行撥印墨化電漿處理。Next, pure water is sprayed by a shower nozzle to uniformly wet the surface of the concentrated composition layer, and then the lanthanide developing solution (containing nonionic surfactant, trade name: CD Κ-1, Fujifilm electronic) The material (strand) was diluted to 100 times) at 23 ° C for 80 seconds, and spray-developed with a flat nozzle pressure of 〇 4 MPa to obtain a patterned image. Then, the ultrapure water was continuously sprayed at a pressure of 9.8 MPa at a pressure of 9.8 MPa to carry out residue removal, and the exposure amount was 2500 mJ/cm 2 in the atmosphere, and the surface side of the dense color composition layer K1 of the substrate was formed. After exposure, the film was heated in an oven at 240 ° C for 50 minutes to obtain a stripe-shaped partition wall having a film thickness of 2.0/zm, an optical density of 4.0, and an opening having a width of 100/zm. (Dialing Ink Treatment) The cathode-coupled parallel plate type plasma processing apparatus was used to perform a printing ink plasma treatment on the substrate on which the partition walls were formed under the following conditions.
使用氣體 :CF4 氣體流量 :80sccm 壓力 :4 0 PaGas used: CF4 gas flow: 80sccm Pressure: 4 0 Pa
RF功率 :50W 處理時間 :30sec <藍色(B)用印墨 >的調製法(其1) 混合下述的成分並攪拌1小時。然後,以平均孔徑 0.25/zm的微過濾器進行減壓過濾,以調製藍色用印墨液 (印墨B-1、及印墨B-2)。 所使用之原料的詳細內容係如以所示。 •染料:特定金屬錯合物化合物-I的例示化合物1&一5 1 1 2 201006895 •染料:VALIFAST BLUE 2620(東方化學工業公司製) .DPCA-60(曰本化藥公司製(KAYARAD DPCA-60)): 己內酯變性二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯 •KF-353(信越聚矽氧公司製):聚醚變性聚矽氧油 表2 分類 原料 印墨B-l 印墨B - 2 溶媒 環己酮 62.95 wt% 79.95 wt% 單體 DPCA-60 27 wt% 10 wt% 界面活性劑 KF-353 0.05 wt% 0.05 wt% 塗料 例示化合物 la-5 2.9 wt% 3.0 wt% VALIFAST BLUE 2620 7.1 wt% 7.0 wt% 印墨黏度(mPa · s} 12.1 5.4 表面張力(mN/m) 22.8 29.3 (黏度、表面張力的測定) 將所得到的印墨直接調溫至25°C,並使用東機產業(股) 製E型黏度計(RE-80L)依照以下的條件來測定。 (測定條件) • 使用轉子 :1 °34’xR24 • 測定時間 :2分鐘RF power: 50 W Processing time: 30 sec < Blue (B) Preparation method of Ink > (1) The following components were mixed and stirred for 1 hour. Then, it was filtered under reduced pressure with a microfilter having an average pore diameter of 0.25 / zm to prepare a blue ink (ink B-1, and ink B-2). The details of the raw materials used are as shown. • Dye: exemplified compound of the specific metal complex compound-I 1 & a 5 1 1 2 201006895 • Dyes: VALIFAST BLUE 2620 (manufactured by Oriental Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) DPCA-60 (made by Kawamoto Chemical Co., Ltd. (KAYARAD DPCA- 60)): Caprolactone-denatured dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate • KF-353 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): Polyether-denatured poly-anthracene oil Table 2 Classification of raw materials Ink B Ink B - 2 Solvent cyclohexanone 62.95 Wt% 79.95 wt% Monomer DPCA-60 27 wt% 10 wt% Surfactant KF-353 0.05 wt% 0.05 wt% Coating exemplified compound la-5 2.9 wt% 3.0 wt% VALIFAST BLUE 2620 7.1 wt% 7.0 wt% Ink viscosity (mPa · s} 12.1 5.4 Surface tension (mN/m) 22.8 29.3 (Measurement of viscosity, surface tension) The obtained ink was directly tempered to 25 ° C, and the E machine industry (share) system was used. The viscometer (RE-80L) was measured according to the following conditions (measurement conditions) • Rotor: 1 °34'xR24 • Measurement time: 2 minutes
• 測定溫度 :2 5 °C 將所得到的印墨直接調溫至25 °C,並使用協和界面科 學(股)製表面張力計(FACE SURFACE TENSIOMETER CBVB-A3)來測定。 <對比測定方法> 使用在做爲背光單元之冷陰極管光源(射出圖10所示 波長光譜分布的光的光源)設置擴散板,且在2片偏光板 113- 201006895 (LUCEO製 POLAX-15N)之間設置單色基板,將偏光板設 置成平行尼科耳時所通過的光的色度之Y値,除以將偏光 板設置成正交尼科耳時所通過的光的色度之Y値,以求得 對比。色度的測定係使用色彩亮度計(TOPCON(股)製 BM-5A) 〇單色基板係依照以下的方法來作成。使用構成彩 色濾光片的B印墨(印墨B—1、印墨B-2)之中的一色印墨’ 藉由噴墨法或者旋轉塗布法於玻璃基板上形成;3膜,如同 彩色濾光片形成般進行預烘烤(預加熱)(溫度l〇〇°C、2分 鐘)、後烘烤(後加熱)(溫度22(TC、30分鐘},以形成膜厚 @ 2um( μ m)。 將色彩亮度計的測定角設定爲1°,且在樣品上的視野 0 5mm來測定。背光的光量係在沒有設置樣品之狀態下, 設置 2片偏光板使設置成平行尼科耳時的亮度爲 400cd/m2 〇 測定上述所得之單色基板(2種類)的對比時,無論哪一 片的單色基板均可得到50000以上的値。 <ITO層製作> Ο 接著,於上述所得之單色基板上,使用噴濺裝置在膜 面溫度200 °C下、15分鐘,並噴濺ΙΤΟ (氧化銦錫),來形 成膜厚1500人的ITO膜,以製作附有ITO的彩色濾光片基 板。 <在ITO噴濺前後的分光特性變化> 在ITO噴濺前後,使用紫外線可見光吸收分光裝置(日 本分光製V-570),以得到在400nm~700nm之波長範圍中 ί 114- 201006895 的分光穿透率曲線。在噴濺前後的最大峰値中的分光穿透 率變化量爲小之情形,係意味著耐熱性爲佳。 所製作之單色基板(印墨B—1)在ITO噴濺前後的紫外 線可見光吸收光譜。可知在ITO噴濺前後的光譜形狀係大 致上沒有變化,具有高耐熱性。在其他的B印墨(印墨B-2) 的單色基板中也一樣,在ITO噴濺前後的光譜形狀大致上 是沒有變化的。 <藍色(B)用印墨 >的調製法(其2) 〇 將下述的成分依照表3中所記載之配合比例進行混 合,並攪拌1小時。然後,利用平均孔徑0.25#m的微過 濾器進行減壓過濾,以調製藍色用印墨液(B實施例1 ~ 1 6)。 此外,表中的數値係表示質量%。 在藍色(B)用印墨的調製中所使用之各材料的詳細內容 係如以下所示。 (有機溶劑) •環己酮(和光純藥公司製) ® .N-甲基吡咯啶酮(和光純藥公司製) •苄基醇(和光純藥公司製) • MMPGAC (戴西爾工業公司製):丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸 酯 •1,3-BGDA(戴西爾工業公司製):1,3-丙二醇二乙酸酯 •DCHMA(東京化成公司製):二環己基甲基胺 (聚合性單體) •DPCA-60(日本化藥公司製(KAYARAD DPCA-60):己 115- 201006895 內酯變性二季戊四醇六丙嫌酸醋 •DPHA(日本化藥公司製(KAYARAD DPHA)):二季戊四 醇六丙烯酸酯 •AD-TMP(新中村化學工業公司製(NK酯AD-TMP)):二 -三羥甲基丙烷四丙烯酸酯 (界面活性劑) .KF-353(信越聚矽氧公司製):聚醚變性聚矽氧油 • BYK-377 (BYK Chemie公司製):聚醚變性二甲基矽 氧烷混合物 •Solsperse20000(Lubrizol 公司製) •F781-F(大曰本油墨化學工業製(MEGAFAC F781F)) (染料) .染料C-5 VALIFAST BLUE2620(東方化學工業公司 製) •染料C-6(上述通式(A)所表示之化合物的例示化合物 CA- 1 9) •染料C-7(上述通式(A)所表示之化合物的例示化合物 CC-5) •染料C-8:以下的例示化合物F-2(相當於上述通式(A) 所表示之化合物) .染料M-5(上述通式(II-2)所表示之化合物的例示化合 物 la-5) •染料M-6(上述通式(II-2)所表示之化合物的例示化合 物 la-28} 201006895 •染料M-7(上述通式(III)所表示之化合物的例示化合 物 III-40) •染料M-8(上述通式(III)所表示之化合物的例示化合 物 III-58) •染料M-9(上述通式(III)所表示之化合物的例示化合 物 111-9 2} •染料M-10(上述通式(III)所表示之化合物的例示化合 物 1-23)• Measurement temperature: 2 5 °C The obtained ink was directly tempered to 25 °C and measured using a Concord Interface Science Surface Tension Meter (FACE SURFACE TENSIOMETER CBVB-A3). <Comparative measurement method> A diffusing plate was provided using a cold cathode tube light source (a light source that emits light of a wavelength spectrum distribution shown in Fig. 10) as a backlight unit, and two polarizing plates 113-201006895 (POLAX-made by LUCEO) 15N) A monochrome substrate is provided, and the chromaticity of the light through which the polarizing plate is set to be parallel to the Nicols is divided by the chromaticity of the light that is passed when the polarizing plate is set to the crossed Nicols. Y値, for comparison. The chromaticity was measured by using a color luminance meter (BM-5A manufactured by TOPCON Co., Ltd.). The monochrome substrate was produced by the following method. Using one of the B inks (ink B-1, ink B-2) constituting the color filter is formed on the glass substrate by an inkjet method or a spin coating method; 3 film, like color The filter is pre-baked (preheated) (temperature l〇〇°C, 2 minutes), post-baking (post-heating) (temperature 22 (TC, 30 minutes) to form film thickness @ 2um (μ m) The measurement angle of the color luminance meter is set to 1°, and the field of view on the sample is measured by 0 5 mm. The amount of light in the backlight is set to be parallel to the Nicols without setting the sample. When the brightness is 400 cd/m 2 and the contrast of the monochromatic substrate (two types) obtained above is measured, 单色 of 50,000 or more can be obtained for any single-color substrate. <Production of ITO layer > Ο Next, On the obtained single-color substrate, an ITO film having a film thickness of 1,500 was formed by sputtering a ruthenium (indium tin oxide) at a film surface temperature of 200 ° C for 15 minutes using a sputtering apparatus to prepare an ITO-attached color. Filter substrate. <Change in spectral characteristics before and after ITO sputtering> Before and after ITO sputtering, Ultraviolet visible light absorption spectroscopic device (V-570, Japan Spectrophotometer) to obtain the spectral transmittance curve of ί 114- 201006895 in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 700 nm. Spectral transmittance in the maximum peak before and after sputtering The case where the amount of change is small means that heat resistance is good. The ultraviolet light-visible absorption spectrum of the produced monochromatic substrate (Ink B-1) before and after ITO sputtering shows that the spectral shape before and after ITO sputtering is substantially There is no change and high heat resistance. The same is true for other B-ink (ink B-2) monochromatic substrates, and the spectral shape before and after ITO sputtering is substantially unchanged. B) Preparation method using Ink > (2) 下述 The following components were mixed according to the mixing ratios shown in Table 3, and stirred for 1 hour, and then reduced by a microfilter having an average pore diameter of 0.25 #m. The filter was filtered to modulate the blue ink (B Examples 1 to 16). In addition, the number in the table indicates the mass %. Details of each material used in the preparation of the ink for blue (B) The content is as follows. (Organic solvent) Cyclohexanone (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) ® N-methylpyrrolidone (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) • Benzyl alcohol (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) • MMPGAC (made by Daisei Industrial Co., Ltd.): propylene glycol Methyl Ether Acetate • 1,3-BGDA (made by Daisei Industrial Co., Ltd.): 1,3-propanediol diacetate • DCHMA (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.): Dicyclohexylmethylamine (polymerizable monomer) • DPCA-60 (KAYARAD DPCA-60): 115-201006895 lactone-denatured dipentaerythritol hexa-acrylic acid vinegar • DPHA (KAYARAD DPHA): dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate Ester•AD-TMP (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. (NK ester AD-TMP)): Di-trimethylolpropane tetraacrylate (surfactant) .KF-353 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): Poly Ether-denatured polyoxyxide oil • BYK-377 (manufactured by BYK Chemie): Polyether-denatured dimethyloxane mixture • Solsperse20000 (manufactured by Lubrizol) • F781-F (MEGAFAC F781F) ) (dye) . Dye C-5 VALIFAST BLUE2620 (made by Oriental Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) • Dye C-6 (above) (A) exemplified compound of the compound represented by CA- 1 9) • Dye C-7 (exemplified compound CC-5 of the compound represented by the above formula (A)) • Dye C-8: the following exemplified compound F- 2 (corresponding to the compound represented by the above formula (A)). Dye M-5 (exemplified compound la-5 of the compound represented by the above formula (II-2)) • Dye M-6 (the above formula ( II-2) Exemplary compound of the compound represented by la-28} 201006895 • Dye M-7 (exemplified compound III-40 of the compound represented by the above formula (III)) • Dye M-8 (the above formula (III) Illustrative compound of the compound represented by the formula III-58) • Dye M-9 (exemplified compound 111-9 2 of the compound represented by the above formula (III)) • Dye M-10 (expressed by the above formula (III) Exemplary compounds of the compounds 1-23)
染料C— 6Dye C-6
化合物號碼 Fa Rb CA-19 T-95 T-141 T-9 5 CH,SOjiGHjJgSOjNHCHC^^Compound number Fa Rb CA-19 T-95 T-141 T-9 5 CH, SOjiGHjJgSOjNHCHC^^
i) ch3i) ch3
染料C 一 7Dye C-7
化合物號碼 Ra CC-5 T-95 '~SOj{CH2)3SOjNHCHCH2OCH3 117 201006895 染料C- 8Compound Number Ra CC-5 T-95 '~SOj{CH2)3SOjNHCHCH2OCH3 117 201006895 Dye C-8
化合物 號碼 B2fsKfi=:HiF:Ki2 Ra=R4=IttoKRu Ma I a_5 —NriSfcrig <ννω —ομ-^Λ-οη, C^(C) —ch3 ZnCompound number B2fsKfi=:HiF:Ki2 Ra=R4=IttoKRu Ma I a_5 —NriSfcrig <ννω —ομ-^Λ-οη, C^(C) —ch3 Zn
化合 1) 號碼 Ri-R*=It8=Bis Ki=EB=B$=Rii Rt=Ei4 Ma la-28 C00H —mo&-^3 «AU> —OW-Z^-CK, CAit) -CHs 與CHj Za 118 201006895Compound 1) Number Ri-R*=It8=Bis Ki=EB=B$=Rii Rt=Ei4 Ma la-28 C00H —mo&-^3 «AU> —OW-Z^-CK, CAit) -CHs and CHj Za 118 201006895
08· QL (t) 染料Μ— 7 cAlt) ol a,Wf、-。, * / 化合物 號碼 R* H* B[— 4 0 -P OGHa —CHa 认〇} «ϊΛ 染料M- 8 CAW< βΛί008· QL (t) Dye Μ — 7 cAlt) ol a, Wf, -. , * / compound number R* H* B[— 4 0 -P OGHa —CHa 〇} «ϊΛ Dye M- 8 CAW< βΛί0
,j、-、, j, -,
NCNC
U ;rnU ; rn
>-〇,!、o-c:R· 〇 R. CHfCsA1J 染料M— 9 化合物 號碼 Re Rk ffl-5 8 CH, CH, «ft -0-CH, CH!>-〇,! , o-c:R· 〇 R. CHfCsA1J Dye M-9 Compound No. Re Rk ffl-5 8 CH, CH, «ft -0-CH, CH!
CN 化合物 號碼 r3 Rn R, IH-9 2 -ch3 -CHs —(pHSOjCH, CA —CHMHSOjCfi, 〇ΛCN Compound number r3 Rn R, IH-9 2 -ch3 -CHs —(pHSOjCH, CA —CHMHSOjCfi, 〇Λ
119 201006895 染料Μ—1 Ο119 201006895 Dye Μ—1 Ο
12 0 20 5 :寒 9 wm 8 6 —12 0 20 5 : Cold 9 wm 8 6 —
S,6IS, 6I
OS zzOS zz
SO 8.0 εSO 8.0 ε
•S SS§m•S SS§m
S6.US6.U
SISI
SOO L· ε 寸s ZCO.Z 寸 2 6 6 8.0 L·SOO L· ε inch s ZCO.Z inch 2 6 6 8.0 L·
9.S Γοΐ i Ke s寸 z9.S Γοΐ i Ke s inch z
SI Γ0SI Γ0
ZLZL
LZ CNS §ffl Ιε.9 寸 εο·ο •z 90Ό 9ΊLZ CNS §ffl Ιε.9 inch εο·ο •z 90Ό 9Ί
Is1mIs1m
S.9Z z 01S.9Z z 01
SO s ε s寒sm Ιο寸·6寸 01 01 zz so sSO s ε s cold sm Ιο inch·6 inch 01 01 zz so s
Bim 卜9.寸(ΝBim Bu 9. inch (Ν
OS 8.0OS 8.0
L ε·ε sim ssodcoL ε·ε sim ssodco
OS 01 91OS 01 91
SO s 寸9.U1m 01SO s inch 9.U1m 01
OT εο.ο 8.0 zz 9Sim S 寸·6ιη 01 01 01OT εο.ο 8.0 zz 9Sim S inch·6ιη 01 01 01
SOO s.z z s^ 1mSOO s.z z s^ 1m
I00.SS 91 900so s 6.1 寸s1m LLZI^I00.SS 91 900so s 6.1 inch s1m LLZI^
OS εσο s 寸 B 8m 106Ό 寸 οεOS εσο s inch B 8m 106Ό inch οε
SI soo w εSI soo w ε
B ln6.6zB ln6.6z
OTOT
SOSO
L ε S6OI9L ε S6OI9
LZLZ
SO •z s 1 0<siSO •z s 1 0<si
vaOa'I 09_VDda vHda dm_ov ε9ε·δ 01丨艺霸^ d89—z-w$^'''w_"' 00101¾^ 5$^ 90^¾^^ ~080s_ osjsdsps ζζε—XAa 201006895 <顏料分散液的調製> 在 C.I.P.B.15:6(商品名:Ri〇n〇l Blue ES、東洋油墨 製造(股)製)中,如下述表6所示般摻混分散劑及溶劑(1,3 -丁二醇二乙酸酯)(以下簡稱爲1,3-BGDA),預混合之後, 在電動混合機M-50(AIGA日本公司製}中,以塡充率80% 來使用直徑0.65mm的氧化鉻珠粒,用周速9m/s分散25 小時’以調製B用顔料分散液(B1)。在B用顔料分散液(B1) 中’顔料及其他成分係如表所示般摻混之外,與G用顔料 分散液(B1)同樣地進行,以調製B用顔料分散液(B2)。此 外,使用日機裝公司製Nanotrack UPA-EX 15 0,來測定該 顔料分散液的數量平均粒徑。 表4:顏料分散物 數字表示質量%。 分類 名稱 B顏料分 散液 B1 B2 著色劑 C.I. Pigment Blue 15:6 17.5 16.5 C.I. Pigment Violet 23 — 1 分散劑 EFKA6745 2.5 一 DISPARLON DA-725 — 2.5 溶劑 1,3-BGDA 80 80 數量平均粒徑(nm) 44 此外,在顔料分散液的製作中所使用之著色劑係如以 下所述。vaOa'I 09_VDda vHda dm_ov ε9ε·δ 01丨艺霸^ d89—zw$^'''w_"' 001013⁄4^ 5$^ 90^3⁄4^^ ~080s_ osjsdsps ζζε—XAa 201006895 <Modulation of pigment dispersion> In CIPB 15:6 (trade name: Ri〇n〇l Blue ES, manufactured by Toyo Ink Co., Ltd.), a dispersant and a solvent (1,3-butanediol II) are blended as shown in Table 6 below. Acetate) (hereinafter abbreviated as 1,3-BGDA), after premixing, oxidized chrome beads having a diameter of 0.65 mm were used in an electric mixer M-50 (manufactured by AIGA Japan Co., Ltd.) at a charge ratio of 80%. , Disperse for 25 hours at a peripheral speed of 9 m/s to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid (B1) for B. In the pigment dispersion liquid for B (B1), 'pigment and other components are blended as shown in the table, and G The pigment dispersion liquid (B1) was prepared in the same manner to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid (B2) for B. The number average particle diameter of the pigment dispersion liquid was measured using Nanotrack UPA-EX 15 0 manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd. 4: Pigment Dispersion Number Indicates Mass %. Category Name B Pigment Dispersion B1 B2 Colorant CI Pigment Blue 15:6 17.5 16.5 CI Pigment Violet 23 — 1 Dispersant EFKA6745 2.5 A DISPARLON DA-725 — 2.5 Solvent 1,3-BGDA 80 80 Quantity average particle diameter (nm) 44 Further, the coloring agent used in the production of the pigment dispersion liquid is as follows.
• C.I.P.B.15:6(東洋油墨製造公司製):Ri〇nol Blue ES• C.I.P.B.15:6 (manufactured by Toyo Ink Manufacturing Co., Ltd.): Ri〇nol Blue ES
.C.I.P.V.23(CLIENT 日本公司製):Η o s t ap e r m VioletRL-NF <比較例用印墨> 122- 201006895 使用上述的顔料分散液做爲比較例’以調製依照下述 表5的分量所製作的顔料印墨。此外’所使用的材料係如 以下所述。.CIPV23 (manufactured by CLIENT Japan Co., Ltd.): ost ost ap er erm VioletRL-NF <Comparative Example Ink>122-201006895 The above pigment dispersion was used as a comparative example to prepare according to the components of Table 5 below. Pigment ink. Further, the materials used are as described below.
•DPS100(日本化藥公司製):KAYARAD DPS100 .TMPTA(日本化藥公司製):KAYARAD TMPTA .界面活性劑:界面活性劑ι(化合物2中記載的構造物)• DPS100 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.): KAYARAD DPS100. TMPTA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.): KAYARAD TMPTA. Surfactant: surfactant ι (structure described in Compound 2)
〇/、0 /\^C6F13〇/, 0 /\^C6F13
•V-40(和光純藥公司製):偶氮雙(環己基-1-腈) 表5 :印墨配方_數字表示質量%。_ 分類 名稱 B比較印墨 B比較例1 B比較例2 顏料分散液 B1 32.5 32.5 B2 2.5 12.5 — 單體 DPS100 20 5 TMPTA — 12 — 界面活性劑 界面活性劑1 0.1 0.1 溶劑 1,3-BGDA 28.4 32 MMPGAC 15 4.9 引發劑 V-40 1.5 1 (Afw = 33940, = 2.55) 化合物2 <評價用彩色濾光片的製作方法> 使用在上述所調製的印墨,於利用上述所得之基板上 的隔壁予以區分的領域内(以凸部圍繞的凹部),使用富士軟 片Dimatix公司製噴墨印表機DMP-2831來進行吐出,然 後,於100 °C烘箱中進行加熱2分鐘。 接著,藉由在220 °C的烘箱中靜置30分鐘,以製作單 色的彩色濾光片。所得到之色畫素的膜厚爲2. Oum » 12 3- 201006895 <印墨保存安定性評價> 將於上述所調製的各色印墨保管於50°C的恆溫室中, 並測定3 0天後的黏度,藉由與剛印墨調製後之數値的差 — (%) [(30天後的黏度-剛調製之後的黏度)/剛調製之後的黏 度]來進行評價。評價基準係如以下般進行分類。 ◎:與剛印墨調製之後的黏度的差爲低於1 〇% 〇:與剛印墨調製之後的黏度的差爲1 〇%以上、低於 2 0% △:與剛印墨調製之後的黏度的差爲20%以上、低於 〇 3 0% X:與剛印墨調製之後的黏度的差爲3 0%以上 <連續吐出安定性評價> 使用於上述所調製的印墨來進行吐出安定性的評價。 評價方法係以富士軟片 Dimatix公司製噴墨印表機 DMP-2831、打滴量10pl的噴頭筒匣、打滴頻率10kHz 來進行,以觀察進行連續吐出30分鐘之際的狀態。評價基 準係如以下般進行分類。 & ◎:沒有問題可連續吐出 〇:雖然観察到於吐出中有少量不吐出、吐出紊亂等, 但是能在吐出中恢復,沒有一般問題的狀態 △:於吐出中產生不吐出、吐出紊亂,且沒有在吐出 中恢復,但是經由維護能恢復到正常狀態的狀態 x:於吐出中產生不吐出、吐出紊亂,且無法正常吐出, 即使經由維護亦無法恢復吐出的狀態 124-• V-40 (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.): azobis(cyclohexyl-1-carbonitrile) Table 5: Ink Formulation _Number indicates mass%. _ Category name B comparison ink B Comparative Example 1 B Comparative Example 2 Pigment dispersion B1 32.5 32.5 B2 2.5 12.5 — Monomer DPS100 20 5 TMPTA — 12 — Surfactant surfactant 1 0.1 0.1 Solvent 1,3-BGDA 28.4 32 MMPGAC 15 4.9 Initiator V-40 1.5 1 (Afw = 33940, = 2.55) Compound 2 <Production Method of Color Filter for Evaluation> Using the ink prepared as described above, using the substrate obtained above In the field (the concave portion surrounded by the convex portion) which is divided by the partition wall, the inkjet printer DMP-2831 manufactured by Dimatix Co., Ltd. was used for the discharge, and then heated in an oven at 100 ° C for 2 minutes. Then, a monochromatic color filter was produced by allowing to stand in an oven at 220 ° C for 30 minutes. The film thickness of the obtained color pixel was 2. Oum » 12 3- 201006895 <Ink retention stability evaluation> The inks of the respective colors prepared as described above were stored in a constant temperature chamber at 50 ° C, and measured 3 The viscosity after 0 days was evaluated by the difference between the number 値 after the ink was prepared - (%) [(viscosity after 30 days - viscosity after just modulation) / viscosity immediately after preparation]. The evaluation criteria are classified as follows. ◎: The difference in viscosity after the preparation with the ink is less than 1 〇% 〇: The difference between the viscosity after the preparation of the ink is 1% or more and less than 20% △: after the ink is modulated The difference in viscosity is 20% or more and less than 〇30%. X: The difference in viscosity after the preparation of the ink is 30% or more. <Continuous discharge stability evaluation> Used in the above-described prepared ink Spit out the evaluation of stability. The evaluation method was carried out by using an inkjet printer DMP-2831 manufactured by Fujifilm Dimatix Co., Ltd., a nozzle cylinder having a dropping amount of 10 pl, and a dropping frequency of 10 kHz to observe a state in which continuous discharge was performed for 30 minutes. The evaluation criteria are classified as follows. & ◎: There is no problem, and it is possible to squirt continuously. Although it is observed that there is a small amount of spitting and spitting out of the spit, it can be recovered during the discharge, and there is no general problem. △: No discharge or spit out during discharge. In the state in which it is not restored during the discharge, but it can be restored to the normal state by maintenance x: no discharge or discharge is generated during the discharge, and the discharge cannot be performed normally, and the discharge state cannot be resumed even after maintenance.
I 201006895 維護係藉由DMP-283 1來實施沖洗(加壓噴頭内印墨, 從噴嘴強制性地吐出印墨)、吸除(bio ting)(使噴頭噴嘴面與 ' 清潔墊稍微接觸,以吸取噴嘴面的印墨)。 <休止後吐出安定性評價> 使用於上述所調製的印墨來進行吐出安定性的評價。 評價方法係與連續吐出安定性評價同樣地,使用富士軟片 Dimatix公司製噴墨印表機DMP-2831、打滴量10pl的噴 頭筒匣,以打滴頻率10kHz進行一次5分鐘的吐出,且在 ❹ 停止24小時之後,觀察再以相同的條件開始吐出之際的狀 態。評價基準係如以下般進行分類。 ◎:可與打滴指示同時地沒有問題的吐出 〇:觀察到在剛打滴指示之後有少量不吐出、吐出紊 亂等,但是能在吐出中恢復,沒有一般問題的狀態 △:產生不吐出、吐出紊亂,且沒有在吐出中恢復, 但是經由維護能恢復到正常狀態的狀態 X:產生不吐出、吐出紊亂,且無法正常吐出,即使經 ®由維護亦無法恢復吐出的狀態 維護係藉由DMP-2831來實施沖洗(加壓噴頭内印墨, 從噴嘴強制性地吐出印墨)、吸除(bioting)(使噴頭噴嘴面與 清潔墊稍微接觸,以吸取噴嘴面的印墨)。 <耐熱性評價> 將上述所製作之各色的彩色濾光片放入加熱至230°C 的烘箱内,於放置1小時之後,測定色相。色相的測定係 使用UV-560(日本分光公司製),於評價前後的AEab低於 201006895 5設爲〇。AEab爲5以上、低於15設爲△,AEab爲15 以上設爲X。此外,AEab係由(:1£1976(乙*,&*,13*)空間表色 系從以下的色差公式所求得之數値(日本色彩學會編新編 色彩科學手冊(昭和60年)ρ·266)。 AEab = {(AL)2 + (Aa)2 + (Ab)2}i/a <耐藥品性評價> 將上述所製作之各色的彩色濾光片浸漬於進行評價之 藥品(N-甲基吡咯啶酮、2-丙醇、5%硫酸水溶液、5%氫氧 化鈉水溶液)中2 0分鐘,並測定其前後的色相。色相的測 定係使用UV-560(日本分光公司製),AEab低於5設爲〇。 △ Eab爲5以上、低於15設爲△,AEab爲1 5以上設爲X。 △ Eab的評價方法係與上述相同。 於以下的表6~7中,彙整表示各噴墨用印墨及彩色濾 光片的評價結果。 此外,表7中,「B實施例1~16」係指使用各個B實 施例1~16中記載的印墨所製作之彩色濾光片的評價結果。 在以下的評價結果中*從實用上的使用觀點來看,不 包含X係爲必要的 201006895 蜓鉅起、轵揪1|1£疝蝴:9嗽 si- IN σ^ 28.6 ◎ < X si- d r—< 29.4 〇 < X 寸 od i-H 00 (N ◎ 〇 〇 _!辱 lo m瘥- i—1 00 26.3 ◎ ◎ ◎ IN ui 27.4 ◎ ◎ 〇 S_2 00 〇d 27.3 ◎ 〇 <] 00 vd 26.9 ◎ 〇 ◎ 51- r-H 守 26.9 ◎ ◎ 〇 S|2 (N vd 25.8 ◎ 〇 ◎ Si- co vd 27.7 ◎ 〇 〇 5i- 00 24.7 ◎ ◎ ◎ Si- (N 26.6 ◎ ◎ 〇 m {_ _ 篸 <N 00 ◎ 〇 < Si- t-H N 27.2 ◎ 〇 ◎ Si- ΙΟ 26.8 ◎ ◎ 〇 Si- VD 27.2 ◎ ◎ 〇 Si- 寸 l〇 29.3 ◎ ◎ ◎ IKS ^ m磨 ^-H oa r-H 22.8 ◎ ◎ 〇 毫 s tyjg · 11 i 印 安定性 連_拙 安定[生 休止撇 出安定性 -zst - 201006895 1«紘担<<義wdUI卸醐撇 B比 _ 2 〇 〇 〇 〇 < gj- 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 < 〇 〇 〇 5P 〇 < < 〇 < B實 酬 14 〇 < 〇 〇 〇 〇 <3 < 〇 〇 51^ < 〇 〇 〇 < Si- 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 5襲2 〇 <] 〇 〇 〇 Si- < <1 〇 〇 〇 51- 〇 < 〇 〇 〇 51- 〇 <3 〇 〇 < Si- 〇 〇 〇 〇 51- 〇 <] 〇 〇 〇 < < < 〇 〇 5i- 〇 〇 〇 〇 < 5i- <3 <] 〇 〇 〇 Si- 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 1 Isfe 耐熱性 性 (N-甲纖 iMH 臟口口性 (2-酬 纖口口性 (5%¾水 mm «matt (5%鯀化 Na7熘液) 201006895 如表6~表7所不,本發明中所記載之噴墨用印墨係在 保存性優異的同時’從吐出安定性之點而言亦爲優異的。 ’又’使用本發明中所記載之噴墨用印墨而製造的彩色濾光 片係具有與使用顔料印墨的情形同等程度優異之耐藥品 性、耐熱性。 另一方面,在使用顔料印墨之比較例中,係吐出安定 性變差且缺乏實用性。 【圖式簡單說明】 ❿ 圖1係表示在本發明彩色濾光片之製法,一實施形態 中的製造製程之流程圖。 圖2(a卜圖2(f)係表示在本發明彩色濾光片之製法中, 分別依序從基板到彩色濾光片之製造製程的基板及彩色濾 光片之模式剖面圖。 圖3係表示在本發明的彩色濾光片之製法中,只用於 實施描繪製程的噴墨描繪裝置之一實施形態的部分斜視 圖。 ® 圖4係圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝置的部分剖面圖。 圖5係表示在圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝置中印墨循環系 之一實施形態的槪略構成模式圖。 圖6係表示在圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝置中,所實施描 繪方法之一實施形態流程的流程圖。 圖7 (a卜圖7(c)係表示分別藉由圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝 置所描繪之彩色濾光片的畫素配列之模式圖。 圖8係表示適用於圖3所示噴墨描繪裝置之印墨循環 系的其他實施形態之槪略構成模式圖。 -12 9- 201006895 圖9(a卜圖9(d)係分別表示於圖3所示之噴墨描繪裝置 之噴墨頭的噴嘴配列之一實施例,及藉由具有該噴嘴配列 之噴墨頭所描繪之彩色濾光片中形成畫素圓點之模式圖。 圖1 0係表示從在對比測定中所使用之冷陰極管光源射 出的光的波長光譜分布圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 10 彩色濾光片 12 基板 14 隔壁 16 凹部 18 印墨 18a 未硬化畫素印墨 20 畫素 22 保護膜 30,3 1 噴墨描繪裝置 32 壓板 34 噴墨頭 36 噴頭單元 38 噴頭移動機構 40 基板搬送機構 42 驅動旋桿 43 導軌 44 驅動支持部 45 支持部 46 輸送軋輥 48 壓延軋輥I 201006895 Maintenance is performed by DMP-283 1 (ink in the pressurized nozzle, forced discharge from the nozzle), bio ting (slightly contact the nozzle face with the 'cleaning pad' Draw the ink on the nozzle side). <Evaluation of discharge stability after rest> The evaluation of discharge stability was performed using the ink prepared as described above. In the same manner as the continuous discharge stability evaluation, the inkjet printer DMP-2831 manufactured by Fujifilm Dimatix Co., Ltd., and the nozzle cartridge of 10 pl of dripping amount were used, and the discharge was performed for 5 minutes at a drip frequency of 10 kHz. ❹ After stopping for 24 hours, observe the state at the time of starting the discharge under the same conditions. The evaluation criteria are classified as follows. ◎: It is possible to discharge the sputum at the same time as the drips. It is observed that there is a small amount of non-discharge, spitting, and the like after the drip indication, but it can be recovered during the discharge, and there is no general problem. Discharged, and did not recover during discharge, but returned to the normal state via maintenance. X: No discharge, no discharge, and no normal discharge. Even if maintenance is not maintained by maintenance, the maintenance is performed by DMP. In the -2831, the rinsing (injecting ink in the pressure nozzle, forcibly ejecting the ink from the nozzle) and bioting (slightly contacting the nozzle surface of the nozzle with the cleaning pad to absorb the ink on the nozzle surface) are performed. <Evaluation of heat resistance> The color filters of the respective colors produced above were placed in an oven heated to 230 ° C, and after standing for 1 hour, the hue was measured. The measurement of the hue was carried out using UV-560 (manufactured by JASCO Corporation), and AEab before and after the evaluation was lower than 201006895. AEab is 5 or more, less than 15 is set to Δ, and AEab is 15 or more and X is set. In addition, the AEab is obtained from the following color difference formula by the (1*1976 (B*, &*, 13*) spatial color system (Japanese Color Society, New Color Science Handbook (Showa 60)) ρ·266). AEab = {(AL)2 + (Aa) 2 + (Ab) 2}i/a < Evaluation of chemical resistance> The color filters of the respective colors produced above were immersed in evaluation. The drug (N-methylpyrrolidone, 2-propanol, 5% aqueous solution of sulfuric acid, 5% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution) was used for 20 minutes, and the hue before and after the color was measured. The hue was measured using UV-560 (Japan Spectroscopic) AEab is less than 5 and is set to 〇. Δ Eab is 5 or more, less than 15 is Δ, and AEab is 15 or more and is X. The evaluation method of Δ Eab is the same as described above. In the seventh embodiment, the evaluation results of the inkjet inks and the color filters are shown. In addition, in Table 7, "B Examples 1 to 16" are produced by using the inks described in each of the B examples 1 to 16. The evaluation result of the color filter. In the following evaluation results, * from the viewpoint of practical use, 201006895, which is not necessary for the X system, is required.疝 butterfly: 9嗽si- IN σ^ 28.6 ◎ < X si- dr-< 29.4 〇< X inch od iH 00 (N ◎ 〇〇 _! 辱 lo m瘥- i-1 00 26.3 ◎ ◎ ◎ IN ui 27.4 ◎ ◎ 〇S_2 00 〇d 27.3 ◎ 〇<] 00 vd 26.9 ◎ 〇 ◎ 51- rH 守 26.9 ◎ ◎ 〇 S|2 (N vd 25.8 ◎ 〇 ◎ Si- co vd 27.7 ◎ 〇〇 5i- 00 24.7 ◎ ◎ ◎ Si- (N 26.6 ◎ ◎ 〇m {_ _ 篸 < N 00 ◎ 〇 < Si- tH N 27.2 ◎ 〇 ◎ Si- ΙΟ 26.8 ◎ ◎ 〇Si- VD 27.2 ◎ ◎ 〇Si- Inch l〇29.3 ◎ ◎ ◎ IKS ^ m grinding ^-H oa rH 22.8 ◎ ◎ 〇 s s tyjg · 11 i Indo-safe _ 拙 定 定 [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ <义wdUI醐撇醐撇B ratio_ 2 〇〇〇〇< gj- 〇〇〇〇〇〇< 〇〇〇5P 〇<<〇< B real reward 14 〇< 〇〇〇〇 <3 < 〇〇51^ <〇〇〇< Si- 〇〇〇〇〇5 2 2 〇<] 〇〇〇Si- <<1 〇〇〇51- 〇< 〇〇 〇51- 〇<3 〇〇 < Si- 〇〇〇〇51- 〇<] 〇〇〇<<< 〇〇5i- 〇〇〇〇< 5i- <3 <] 〇〇〇Si- 〇〇〇〇 〇1 Isfe Heat resistance (N-fibrous iMH dirty mouth (2-paid fiber mouth-mouth (5%3⁄4 water mm «matt (5% 鲧化Na7 熘液) 201006895 as shown in Table 6~ Table 7 The inkjet ink according to the present invention is excellent in storage stability and is also excellent in terms of discharge stability. Further, the color filter manufactured by using the inkjet ink according to the present invention has chemical resistance and heat resistance which are excellent in the same degree as in the case of using pigment ink. On the other hand, in the comparative example using the pigment ink, the discharge stability was deteriorated and the practicality was lacking. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. 1 is a flow chart showing a manufacturing process in a method of producing a color filter of the present invention. Fig. 2 (a, Fig. 2(f) is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a substrate and a color filter in a process for sequentially manufacturing a substrate from a substrate to a color filter in the method for producing a color filter of the present invention. Fig. 4 is a partial perspective view showing an embodiment of an ink jet drawing device shown in Fig. 3 in the method of manufacturing a color filter of the present invention. Fig. 5 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of an ink jet circulation system in the ink jet drawing device shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a view showing the ink jet drawing device shown in Fig. 3 A flow chart of one embodiment of the drawing method. Fig. 7 (a) Fig. 7(c) is a schematic view showing a pixel arrangement of color filters respectively drawn by the ink jet drawing device shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 8 is a schematic block diagram showing another embodiment of an ink jet circulation system applied to the ink jet drawing device shown in Fig. 3. -12 9- 201006895 Fig. 9 (a, Fig. 9(d) are respectively shown in the figure An embodiment of the nozzle arrangement of the ink jet head of the ink jet drawing device shown in FIG. 3, and by having A schematic diagram of a pixel dot formed in a color filter depicted by an ink jet head arranged in a nozzle. Fig. 10 shows a wavelength spectrum distribution of light emitted from a cold cathode tube light source used in comparative measurement. Explanation of main component symbols] 10 color filter 12 substrate 14 partition 16 recess 18 ink 18a unhardened pixel ink 20 pixel 22 protective film 30, 3 1 inkjet drawing device 32 platen 34 inkjet head 36 head unit 38 Nozzle moving mechanism 40 Substrate conveying mechanism 42 Driving rotary lever 43 Guide rail 44 Driving support portion 45 Supporting portion 46 conveying roller 48 Calendering roller
-13 0- 201006895-13 0- 201006895
50,90 印墨供給系 52 印墨儲槽 54,54a,54b 印墨供給管 56,84 過濾器 58 管底蓋 60 清潔刮板 62 吸引栗 64 回收儲槽 66,100 印墨回收管 68 噴頭加壓泵 70 印墨補充系統 72 濃縮印墨補充儲槽 74 稀釋液補充儲槽 76,86 濃度檢測部 78 水平檢測部 80 補充控制部 82 回收印墨補充管 92 供給副儲槽 94 補充儲槽 96 印墨泵 98 溢流管 102 大氣開放閥 104 壓力調整閥50,90 Ink supply system 52 Ink reservoir 54, 54a, 54b Ink supply tube 56, 84 Filter 58 Tube bottom cover 60 Cleaning blade 62 Suction chest 64 Recovery tank 66, 100 Ink recovery tube 68 Head pressurization Pump 70 Ink replenishing system 72 Concentrated ink replenishing tank 74 Diluting liquid replenishing tank 76, 86 Concentration detecting unit 78 Level detecting unit 80 Supplementary control unit 82 Retrieving ink replenishing pipe 92 Supplying sub tank 96 Replenishing tank 96 Printing Ink pump 98 overflow pipe 102 atmosphere open valve 104 pressure regulating valve
Claims (1)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2008149467 | 2008-06-06 | ||
JP2009134999A JP2010013639A (en) | 2008-06-06 | 2009-06-04 | Ink for inkjet, color filter and method for manufacturing the same, and liquid crystal display and image display using the same |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
TW201006895A true TW201006895A (en) | 2010-02-16 |
Family
ID=41512595
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
TW98118650A TW201006895A (en) | 2008-06-06 | 2009-06-05 | Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP2010013639A (en) |
CN (1) | CN101619178A (en) |
TW (1) | TW201006895A (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP2362266A3 (en) * | 2010-02-26 | 2012-05-02 | Fujifilm Corporation | Colored curable composition, color filter and method of producing color filter, solid-state image sensor and liquid crystal display device |
TWI479208B (en) * | 2012-02-16 | 2015-04-01 | Mutoh Ind Ltd | Method and device for making light guide plate for LCD TV |
Families Citing this family (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP5607551B2 (en) * | 2010-01-15 | 2014-10-15 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Red colored curable composition, method for producing color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display element |
JP2011221515A (en) * | 2010-03-23 | 2011-11-04 | Fujifilm Corp | Color filter and electronic display apparatus |
JP2011202025A (en) * | 2010-03-25 | 2011-10-13 | Fujifilm Corp | Solid dispersion, colored photosensitive composition, inkjet ink, color filter and method for manufacturing the same, solid imaging element, display, metal complex compound, and its tautomer |
JP5791874B2 (en) * | 2010-03-31 | 2015-10-07 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | COLORING COMPOSITION, INKJET INK, COLOR FILTER AND ITS MANUFACTURING METHOD, SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE, AND DISPLAY DEVICE |
KR20120001641A (en) * | 2010-06-28 | 2012-01-04 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Colored composition for color filter, color filter and method of producing the same, anthraquinone compound, and liquid crystal display device |
JP2012093696A (en) * | 2010-06-28 | 2012-05-17 | Fujifilm Corp | Colored composition for color filter, color filter and production method of the same, anthraquinone compound, and liquid crystal display device |
JP2012077153A (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2012-04-19 | Fujifilm Corp | Coloring composition, color filter, method for manufacturing the color filter, and liquid crystal display device |
KR101971894B1 (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2019-04-24 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Dipyrromethene metal complex compound, and colored composition, ink sheet for recording heat-sensitive transfer, color toner, inkjet recording ink and color filter containing the dipyrromethene metal complex compound |
JP2012127032A (en) * | 2010-12-16 | 2012-07-05 | Fujifilm Corp | Dye composition for dyeing fiber and fiber material |
JP5827901B2 (en) | 2011-02-24 | 2015-12-02 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable coloring composition, color filter and method for producing the same, liquid crystal display device, solid-state imaging device, and dye compound |
JP5722267B2 (en) * | 2011-04-04 | 2015-05-20 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Colored composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, liquid crystal display device, solid-state imaging device, and novel dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound or tautomer thereof |
WO2012137852A1 (en) * | 2011-04-04 | 2012-10-11 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Colored composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, liquid crystal display device, solid state imaging element, and novel dipyrromethane-based metal complex compound or tautomer thereof |
TWI560193B (en) * | 2011-04-05 | 2016-12-01 | Fujifilm Corp | Colored composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, liquid crystal display device, solid-state image sensing device and novel dipyrromethene metal complex compound or tautomer thereof |
JP5885438B2 (en) * | 2011-09-07 | 2016-03-15 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable coloring composition and color filter |
KR101751018B1 (en) | 2014-12-23 | 2017-06-26 | 전북대학교산학협력단 | Porphyrin - metal core - Liquid Crystal style Organic inorganic hybrid Dye-Liquid Crystal and method for preparing the same |
CN109732200A (en) * | 2019-02-28 | 2019-05-10 | 青岛理工大学 | Micro-texture laser processing auxiliary device and micro-texture laser processing method |
Family Cites Families (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH11256057A (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 1999-09-21 | Mitsui Chem Inc | Dipyrromethene-metal chelate compound and optical recording medium containing the same |
JP2004212980A (en) * | 2002-12-19 | 2004-07-29 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | Electronic display filter |
JP2006079011A (en) * | 2004-09-13 | 2006-03-23 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | Color filter structure and liquid crystal display |
JP2006309269A (en) * | 2004-12-28 | 2006-11-09 | Toyobo Co Ltd | Wavelength-selective absorption filter |
JP4918270B2 (en) * | 2006-03-29 | 2012-04-18 | 凸版印刷株式会社 | Organic electroluminescence element and display device |
JP5127022B2 (en) * | 2006-09-25 | 2013-01-23 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Method for producing molded printed matter and molded printed matter |
US8197994B2 (en) * | 2006-09-27 | 2012-06-12 | Fujifilm Corporation | Compound or its tautomer, metal complex compound, colored photosensitive curing composition, color filter, and production |
JP2008083416A (en) * | 2006-09-27 | 2008-04-10 | Fujifilm Corp | Photosensitive colored curable composition, color filter and method for producing the same |
-
2009
- 2009-06-04 JP JP2009134999A patent/JP2010013639A/en not_active Abandoned
- 2009-06-05 CN CN200910146018A patent/CN101619178A/en active Pending
- 2009-06-05 TW TW98118650A patent/TW201006895A/en unknown
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP2362266A3 (en) * | 2010-02-26 | 2012-05-02 | Fujifilm Corporation | Colored curable composition, color filter and method of producing color filter, solid-state image sensor and liquid crystal display device |
EP2568338A1 (en) * | 2010-02-26 | 2013-03-13 | Fujifilm Corporation | Colored curable composition, color filter and method of producing color filter, solid-state image sensor and liquid crystal display device |
TWI479208B (en) * | 2012-02-16 | 2015-04-01 | Mutoh Ind Ltd | Method and device for making light guide plate for LCD TV |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN101619178A (en) | 2010-01-06 |
JP2010013639A (en) | 2010-01-21 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
TW201006895A (en) | Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
JP5548394B2 (en) | Ink jet ink, color filter and method for producing the same, and liquid crystal display and image display device using the same | |
TW200932844A (en) | Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
JP5553687B2 (en) | Ink set, color filter and manufacturing method thereof, and liquid crystal display and image display device using the same | |
JP6115281B2 (en) | Coloring composition, color filter and display element | |
JP2010037545A (en) | Ink for inkjet, color filter and its method of manufacturing the same, and liquid crystal display and image display device using the same | |
TW200829965A (en) | Color filter, liquid crystal display device and CCD device | |
JP2009265641A (en) | Color filter | |
US20090015765A1 (en) | Ink for use in a color filter, color filter, method of manufacturing a color filter, image display apparatus, electronic apparatus | |
TW201905106A (en) | Coloring composition, coloring curable film, and display element and solid-state imaging element | |
JP2011248197A (en) | Method for manufacturing color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using the same | |
JP6303936B2 (en) | Colored composition, colored cured film, and display element | |
WO2017057094A1 (en) | Coloring composition, colored cured film, display element, and solid-state imaging element | |
KR101708494B1 (en) | Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
KR20150123167A (en) | Colorant, curable composition, cured film, display device and solid state imaging device | |
JP2010018653A (en) | Ink for inkjet, color filter and method for manufacturing the same, and liquid crystal display and image display device using the color filter | |
CN101440236A (en) | Print ink for ink jet, color filter, manufacturing method thereof, liquid display device using the color filter and image display element | |
KR20100030590A (en) | Color filter and process for preparing color filter, inkjet ink, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
TW201022737A (en) | Color filter and process for preparing color filter, inkjet ink, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
JP2017066377A (en) | Coloring composition, colored cured film, display element and solid state image sensor | |
KR20090127232A (en) | Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
US20100066953A1 (en) | Color filter ink, color filter, image display device, and electronic device | |
US20090128937A1 (en) | Method of manufacturing color filter, color filter, image display device and electronic apparatus | |
KR20110027581A (en) | Inkjet ink, color filter and process for preparing color filter, and liquid crystal display and image display device using color filter | |
JP2008216802A (en) | Yellow photosensitive composition for color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display device |